RK051801 - 2 Assignments

profileLG_HNDUK
Assignment1BusinessandBusinessEnvironment.zip

Business and Business Environment/Module Booklet/BBE brief.pdf

pg. 1 Issue: Feb 2018 Copyright © - All rights reserved - UK College of Business and Computing

BTEC HND in Business

Assignment Brief

RQF Unit 35 Business and the Business Environment

Unit level 4

Unit code L/508/0485

Guided learning hours 60

Block Start Date 26th February 2018

Hand out date w/c 26th February 2018

Submission Deadline 20th May 2018 11.59 pm

Lecturers & Formative Assessments 10 Weeks

Module Leader Khalid Karim

Copyright © - All rights reserved - UK College of Business and Computing

This document is the product and property of the UK College of Business and Computing and therefore may not

be: shared with any external third party; reproduced in full or in part; or used in any other related manner

whatsoever, without prior expressed written permission. This statement is for the attention of students, staff

and external parties. In the case of copyright infringement, legal action will be exercised.

pg. 2 Issue: Feb 2018 Copyright © - All rights reserved - UK College of Business and Computing

Assignment title Business and the Business Environment

Word count Approximately 3000 words

Purpose of this assignment

The aim of this unit is to provide students with background knowledge and understanding of business, the functions

of an organisation and the wider business environments in which organisations operate. Students will examine the

different types of organisations (including for profit and not for profit), their size and scope (for instance, micro,

SME, transnational and global) and how they operate.

Students will explore the relationships that organisations have with their various stakeholders and how the wider

external environments influence and shape business decision-making.

The knowledge, understanding and skill sets gained in this unit will help students to choose their own preferred

areas of specialism in future studies and in their professional career.

Evidences

The evidences towards this assignment should include;

 Essay

 Case study

pg. 3 Issue: Feb 2018 Copyright © - All rights reserved - UK College of Business and Computing

Section 1

LO1: Explain the different types, size and scope of organisations

LO2: Demonstrate the interrelationship of the various functions within an organisation and how they link to

organisational structure

Write an essay of approximately 1500 words on the types, size and scope of business organisations and explaining

the interrelationship between different organisation structures and functions within organisation.

You must use real organisations as the basis for your discussion.

Your essay must be structured to cover three key areas;

1) Different types of organisations. (P1)

 Differences between profit, not for profit and non-governmental organisations (NGOs)

 Business purpose and supply of goods and services

2) Size and scope of the organisations. (P2)

 Difference between micro, small, medium-size and large enterprises

 Market share, profit share, growth and sustainability

3) Organisation structures and functions(P3)

 Different kinds of structures relating to size and scope of operations

 Complexities of transnational, international and global organisation structures

 How functions relate to overall organisation mission and objectives

To achieve merit

M1: To achieve M1 you are required to develop your response to P1 and P2 by analysing how the

structure, size and scope of different organisations link to the business objectives and product and

services offered by the organisation.

M2: To achieve M2 you are required to develop your response to P3 by analysing the advantages and

disadvantages of interrelationships between organisational functions and the impact that can have upon

organisational structure.

To achieve distinction

D1: To achieve D1 you are required to develop your response to all aspects of section 1 (P1, P2 & P3) by

providing a critical analysis of the complexities of different types of business structures and the interrelationships

of the different organisational functions.

pg. 4 Issue: Feb 2018 Copyright © - All rights reserved - UK College of Business and Computing

Part 2 – The UK Supermarket sector

LO3: Use contemporary examples to demonstrate both the positive and negative influence/impact the macro

environment has on business operations

LO4: Determine the internal strengths and weaknesses of specific businesses and explain their interrelationship

with external macro factors

Most of the major UK supermarket chains has recently announced plans to restructure their businesses in a bid to

be more competitive but also as a direct response to changes within the business environment.

Marks & Spencer has unveiled plans to close up to 14 shops, putting around 500 jobs at risk, as the high street

stalwart takes a more ruthless approach to its struggling stores (The Telegraph – Wednesday 31 January 2018).

Tesco has announced plans to “simplify” its business that will result in 1,700 job cuts (Independent - Monday 22

January 2018).

SAINSBURY's has announced plans to shake up its management, putting thousands of jobs at risk in the process

(The Sun - Wednesday 24 January 2018).

Asda has made a further 28 jobs redundant at its head office. This follows earlier round of redundancies in

September 2017, when Asda axed almost 300 jobs at its 2500-strong Leeds head office as part of a turnaround plan

that features major cost-cutting initiatives (Retail Gazette - January 9, 2018)

Task

Following these stories and researching the sector;

a) Using PESTEL model, identify the positive and negative impacts the macro environment has upon the UK retail

sector. (P4)

b) Conduct internal (SWOT/TOWS analysis) and external (Five forces model) analysis of a UK Supermarket to

identify its strengths and weaknesses. (P5)

c) Explain how strengths and weaknesses interrelate with external macro factors. (P6)

To achieve merit

M3: To achieve M3 you are required to develop your response to P4 by applying appropriately the

PESTLE model to support a detailed analysis of the macro environment within an organisation.

M4: To achieve M4 you are required to develop your response to P5 by applying appropriately

SWOT/TOWS and Five forces analysis in justifying how they influence decision-making.

pg. 5 Issue: Feb 2018 Copyright © - All rights reserved - UK College of Business and Computing

To achieve distinction

D2: To achieve D2 you are required to develop your response to all aspects of section 2 (P4, P5 & P6) by

critically evaluating the impacts that both macro and micro factors have upon business objectives and decision-

making.

Formative submission closes on 13th May 2018

Submitting your assignment

You will submit your assignment to the appropriate submission link on ulearn before midnight on 20th

May 2018. The assignment should be in a word document and preferably using Arial font size 12 and 1.5

spacing. Your assignment should be uploaded on the Turnitin Assignment submission section. It is

advisable to use the Turnitin Plagiarism checker before uploading the final piece of work.

Academic Misconduct’ Statement:

‘Academic Misconduct’ is a term used to describe a deliberate attempt by a student to take unfair

advantage over other students to undermine the quality, standards and credibility of the programmes

and qualifications offer by UKCBC. Academic Misconduct includes: plagiarism; collusion; falsification;

replication; cheating; bribery; and impersonation. A student suspected of Academic Misconduct will be

investigated by the College and appropriate action will be taken.

‘Contract Cheating’ Statement:

‘Contract Cheating’ is defined by the Quality Assurance Agency (QAA) as occurring when, “a third party

completes work for a student who then submits it to an education provider as their own, where such

input is not permitted.” Such third party companies have become known as ‘essay mills’, and it is the

responsibility of students to avoid contact and association with such third party companies throughout

their entire period of study. A student suspected of Contract Cheating will be investigated by the College

and appropriate action will be taken.

pg. 6 Issue: Feb 2018 Copyright © - All rights reserved - UK College of Business and Computing

Glossary of commonly used academic words used in this and other assignments

Account for Give reasons for: explain why something happens.

Analyse Examine something in very close detail and from a number of angles.

Identify the important points and chief features, and understand

their relationships.

Argue Present a case for and against a proposal or statement and present

your own opinion at the end.

Compare Show how two or more things are similar.

Contrast Look at two or more things and draw out differences. State whether

the differences are significant.

Critically evaluate Weigh arguments for and against something, assess the strength of

evidence on both sides.

Define Give the exact meaning of.

Describe Give a detailed account of the main features or characteristics

Discuss Write about the most important characteristics of something. Give

arguments for and against, look at it from a variety of perspectives.

Evaluate Assess the worth or usefulness of something. Use evidence to

support your opinion

Determine To establish appropriateness of a theory or an argument

Business and Business Environment/Module Booklet/BBE Module Booklet.docx

logo-box-line-title-big

BTEC HND in Business

Module Booklet

RQF Unit 1

Business and the Business Environment

Unit level

4

Unit code

L/508/0485

Unit type

Core

Guided learning hours

60

Module Leader

Khalid Karim

Table of Contents 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Learning Outcome 3 1.3 Essential Content 3 1.4 Scheme of Work 5 1.5 Teaching Ethos 13 1.6 Methods of Delivery 13 1.7 Plagiarism 14

1.1 Introduction

The aim of this unit is to provide students with background knowledge and understanding of business, the functions of an organisation and the wider business environments in which organisations operate. Students will examine the different types of organisations (including for profit and not for profit), their size and scope (for instance, micro, SME, transnational and global) and how they operate.

Students will explore the relationships that organisations have with their various stakeholders and how the wider external environments influence and shape business decision-making.

The knowledge, understanding and skill sets gained in this unit will help students to choose their own preferred areas of specialism in future studies and in their professional career.

1.2 Learning Outcome

By the end of this unit a student will be able to:

1 Explain the different types, size and scope of organisations.

2 Demonstrate the interrelationship of the various functions within an organisation and how they link to organisational structure.

3 Use contemporary examples to demonstrate both the positive and negative influence/impact the macro environment has on business operations.

4 Determine the internal strengths and weaknesses of specific businesses and explain their interrelationship with external macro factors.

1.3 Essential Content

LO1 Explain the different types, size and scope of organisations

Different types of organisations:

Differences between for profit and not for profit and non-government organisations (NGOs).

Micro, small, medium-sized enterprises (SMEs). Different business purposes, objectives and supply of goods and services.

The range of legal structures associated with different forms of business: sole traders, partnerships and private limited companies.

Size and scope of organisations:

Differences between large, medium-sized and small organisations including objectives and goals, market share, profit share, growth and sustainability.

Global growth and developments of transnational, international and global organisations.

Differences between franchising, joint ventures and licensing.

Industrial structures and competitive analysis.

Market forces and economic operations e.g. scarcity and choice, supply and demand, income elasticity.

Stakeholders and responsibilities of organisations to meet different stakeholder interests and expectations.

LO2 Demonstrate the interrelationship of the various functions within an organisation and how they link to organisational structure

The various functions within an organisation:

The role of marketing, finance, human resource management and operations within an organisational context and the interrelationships.

How functions relate to overall organisation mission and objectives.

Organisational structure:

Different structures depending upon the size and scope of the organisation, including bureaucratic and post-bureaucratic, parent, strategic business units (SBUs), matrix and functional levels.

Organisation structures and complexities of transnational, international and global organisations.

LO3 Use contemporary examples to demonstrate both the positive and negative influence/impact the macro environment has on business operations

The context of the macro environment:

The application of the PESTLE framework and how organisations need to monitor and forecast external influences.

How the macro environment influences/impacts upon business activities: the impact of the digital revolution on production and consumption; the impact of social technologies; cyberspace security; emerging BRICS markets, the global shift in economic and social power and ethical and sustainable growth.

How organisations go through the transformation process and overcome resistance to change in response to the changing market environment.

LO4 Determine the internal strengths and weaknesses of specific businesses and explain their interrelationship with external macro factors

Frameworks for analysis:

Introduction to SWOT and/or TOWS analysis and how they can assist in the decision-making process within organisations.

Key external macro factors including the competitive environment and government intervention that influence organisations and business.

Recommended Resources

BARON, P. (2012) Business and its Environment. 7th Ed. London: Prentice Hall.

PALMER, A. and HARTLEY, B. (2011) The Business Environment. 7th Ed. Maidenhead: McGraw-Hill.

WEATHERLEY, P. (Editor) and OTTER, D. (Editor) (2014) The Business Environment: Themes and Issues in a Globalised World. 3rd Ed. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

WORTHINGTON, I. and BRITTON. C. (2014) The Business Environment. 7th Ed. Harlow Pearson.

Links

This unit links to the following related units:

Unit 2: Marketing Essentials

Unit 12: Organisational Behaviour

Unit 32: Business Strategy

1.4 Scheme of Work

Week

Session

Lecture Outcome

Session Activities:

1

1

LO1

Topic: Different types of business organisations

• Introduction to the unit’s content.

• What is a business?

• Types of organisation, profit and non-profit entities.

• Formal and informal businesses.

• Legal structures – sole trader, partnerships, limited companies.

• Other forms of business entity.

Sample activities:

• Question and answer activity on general/prior knowledge of different business types.

• Group activity – discuss and differentiate legal entities e.g. sole trader, partnership etc.

• Activity in pairs to establish advantages and disadvantages of each business type.

2

LO1

Topic: Size, scale and scope of different organisations

• Issue and introduce Assignment 1

• Explore differences in businesses on the basis of their main function, scope and the size of operations.

• National, international and global business development and growth.

Sample activities:

• Measure business size. Large and small organisations – business scale.

• Use of case studies to highlight differences in large, small and micro businesses.

• Group discussion – organic growth of a business through different structures e.g sole trader, partnership, limited company.

2

3

LO1

Topic: Stakeholders, roles and responsibilities

• Investigate different roles within typical businesses and the responsibilities associated with different levels and authorities.

• Stakeholder analysis and meeting stakeholder needs.

• Business obligations to stakeholders in the context of corporate social responsibility (CSR).

Sample activities:

• Small groups – research and identify different roles within different businesses.

• Each group create a quiz activity on responsibilities attached to different roles in a business and test one another.

• Group discussion – levels of authority and associated responsibilities.

4

LO1

Topic: Business environment

• The purpose of economic activity and the production of goods and services to satisfy changing needs and wants.

• Intro to economic concepts e.g scarcity and choice, supply and demand

• Industrial structures definition and introduction to Porter's Five forces to analyse industry structure.

Sample Activities:

• Brainstorm activity - to discuss different economic concepts and different examples.

•Group research activity - how do businesses respond to variations in supply and demand?

•Case study discussion - the application of Porter's Five Forces to identify and understand industry competition.

3

5

LO2

Topic: Functional areas in business (part 1)

• Explore different main functions or departments such as marketing, finance, human resources.

Sample activities:

• Group activity – identify different departments/functions in a given business. Tutor to provide different contexts to explore differences.

• Different groups present back the main generic functions such as marketing, finance and human resources, including their roles and responsibilities.

• Review different organisational charts. Small group feedback on how a particular chart illustrates functional interrelationships.

6

LO2

Topic: Functional areas in businesses (part 2)

•Explore secondary/additional functions or departments found in some businesses such as procurement, maintenance, operations and manufacturing.

Sample activities:

• Group activity – identify and list additional support departments/ functions in different types of businesses from different sectors.

Tutor to provide different contexts to explore differences.

• Different groups present back on each of the additional functions such as procurement, maintenance, operations and manufacturing, including their roles and responsibilities.

4

7

LO2

Topic: Functional interrelationships

• Explore interrelationships between various functions and the impact on operational effectiveness.

• Explore the role of different functions in achieving organisational goals and objectives.

Sample activities:

• Group activity – establish the links and dependencies between different departments/functions in a given business. Tutor to provide different contexts to explore differences.

• Discussion and student input in to the relation between various functions previously identified.

• Work in pairs – explore the role of different functions in achieving organisational objectives.

8

LO2

Topic: Functions and structures (part 1)

•Define organisational charts and their use.

•Different structures e.g. flat or tall hierarchical, matrix etc.

•Investigate how different functions impact on organisational structures.

• The impact of size and scope on organisational structures.

Sample activities:

• Question and answer activity – what are organisational charts and what are their purpose. Identify the different types e.g. tall or flat. Discussion and student input on how different functions report into each other.

•Group work – create an organisational chart for a given business.

•Reflect on how size and scope of previous activity affected the structure created by students.

5

9

LO2

Topic: Functions and structures (part 2)

•Explore differences between structures on the basis of size – national, global etc – and location.

•Complexities of local, transnational, international and global organisations.

• Virtual structures.

Sample activities:

•Discussion activity – varied structures such as chain, franchise, head office operated and others.

•Student research into centralised and de-centralised structures and management.

•Student debate on the use of virtual structures, appropriateness and future practices.

10

LO1 & 2

Topic: Assignment draft review workshop

•Review of student progress on the first assignment.

•Review of academic requirements and submission format.

Sample activities:

•Brief tutor-led overview of assignment requirements.

•Open question and answer activity to address general questions and concerns.

6

11

LO3

Topic: Environmental analysis

• Introduction to the second assessment. (Part 2 of assignment brief)

• Define the concept of environmental analysis in a business context.

• Macro and micro environmental analysis.

• Introduction to PESTLE and SWOT/TOWS analytical tools.

Sample activities:

• Pair work – investigate and define business environmental analysis.

• Group activity – differentiate between a macro and micro environmental analysis.

• Tutor-led definition and explanation of a PESTLE and a SWOT/TOWS analysis.

12

LO3

Topic: Macro environmental analysis – PESTLE (part 1)

• In-depth delivery of a PESTLE analytical tool.

• Investigation of current case studies with which to apply the model.

Sample activities:

•Tutor-led explanations and questioning – political, economic and social factors.

• Research activity- students to investigate current political, economic and social factors influencing and impacting the business environment. Present feedback and discuss.

• Group activity – apply these factors to a given organisation.

• Pair work – Find a business to apply PESTLE and

SWOT/TOWS analysis.

7

13

LO3

Topic: Macro environmental analysis – PESTLE (part 2)

• In-depth delivery of a PEST/LE analytical tool.

• Investigation of current case studies with which to apply the model.

Sample activities:

• Tutor-led explanations and questioning – technological, legal and environmental factors.

• Research activity – students to investigate on current technological, legal and environmental factors influencing and impacting the business environment. Present feedback and discuss.

• Group activity – apply a PEST/LE analysis to a given organisation.

Homework in pairs – create a PEST/LE analysis for presentation in the next session.

14

LO3

Topic: Macro environmental analysis applied – PESTLE

•Investigation of PESTLE analysis applied in and presented by student for their selected contexts.

Sample activities:

• Student presentations of a PEST/LE analysis for a chosen business.

• Peer review and feedback on presentations.

• Tutor to summarise findings and link to the Assignment.

8

15

LO3

Topic: Macro environmental impact and response

• Investigation of how the macro environment affects business operations.

• Transformation processes that organisations go through in response to change.

Sample activities:

• Group activity – impact analysis of environmental factors on a selected business.

• Group brainstorming session on ways a business could respond to change.

• Tutor-led critical reflection of practicalities of discussed changes.

16

LO4

Topic: Micro environmental analysis – SWOT/TOWS

• In-depth delivery of a SWOT/TOWS analytical tool as an analysis framework.

• The link between external factors and internal SWOT.

• Investigation of current case studies with which to apply the model.

Sample activities:

• Tutor-led explanations and questioning – SWOT factors. The value of SWOT analysis and implementation.

• Question and answer activity – S&W influenced by PESTLE, which

O&Ts arises from PESTLE.

• Group activity – apply a SWOT/TOWS analysis to a given organisation.

• Group presentation of SWOT analysis with Q&A.

9

17

LO4

Topic: Micro environmental analysis applied – SWOT/TOWS

• Investigation of a SWOT/TOWS analysis applied in and presented by student for their selected contexts.

Sample activities:

• Student presentations of a SWOT analysis for a chosen business.

• Peer review and feedback on presentations.

• Tutor to summarise findings and link to Assignment 2.

18

LO4

Topic: Internal factors and responses affecting operations

• Investigate how internal factors should be analysed and how strengths and weaknesses that affect business operations form the basis for strategic management.

• Decision-making and action-planning based on SWOT analysis findings.

Sample activities:

• Group activity – investigate how information from a SWOT analysis should be viewed and used.

• Pair work – Explore and list possible business strategies that could respond to SWOT and PEST/LE factors.

• Tutor-led critical reflection of practicalities of discussed strategies.

10

19

LO3 & 4

Topic: Assignment workshop

• Review of student progress on the second part of assignment.

Sample activities:

• Brief tutor-led overview of assessment requirements.

• Open question and answer activity to address general questions and concerns.

• Review of academic requirements and submission format.

• Individual student queries and questions.

20

LO 3 & 4

Topic: Assignment draft review workshop

• Review of individual student drafts for second part of assignment.

Sample activities:

• Individual appointments to address individual student queries and questions.

1.5 Teaching Ethos

The college’s approach towards teaching and learning is simple and effective. The main aim of UKCBC is to assist learners in maximising their potential by ensuring that they are taught clearly and effectively. This will enable students to engage in the learning environment and promote success in both their academic studies and subsequent career.

The module tutor(s) will aim to combine lectures, workshops and tutorial activities. This environment will provide opportunities for the student to understand the course material through case study and text and to apply it in a practical way. The intent is to facilitate interactive class activities, and discussion about the significant role of research in a global and local business environment.

1.6 Methods of Delivery

LECTURES:

These will be developed around the key concepts as mentioned in the indicative course content and will use a range of live examples and cases from business practice to demonstrate the application of theoretical concepts. This method is primarily used to identify and explain key aspects of the subject so that learners can utilise their private study time more effectively.

SEMINARS:

These are in addition to the lectures. The seminars are designed to give learners the opportunity to test their understanding of the material covered in the lectures and private study with the help of reference books. This methodology usually carries a set of questions identified in advance. Seminars are interactive sessions led by the learners. This method of study gives the learner an excellent opportunity to clarify any points of difficulty with the tutor and simultaneously develop their oral communication skills.

CASE STUDIES

An important learning methodology is the extensive use of case studies. They enable learners to apply the concepts that they learn in their subjects. The learners have to study the case, analyse the facts presented and arrive at conclusions and recommendations. This assists in the assessment of the learner’s ability to apply to the real world the tools and techniques of analysis which they have learnt. The case study serves as a supplement to the theoretical knowledge imparted through the course work.

1.7 Plagiarism

Any act of plagiarism will be seriously dealt with according to the colleges and awarding bodies’ regulations. In this context the definition and scope of plagiarism are presented below:

Plagiarism is presenting someone’s work as your won. It includes copying information directly from the web or books without referencing the material; submitting joint coursework as an individual effort; copying another student’s coursework; stealing coursework form another student and submitting it as your own work. Suspected plagiarism will be investigated and if found to have occurred will be dealt with according to the college procedure. (For further details please refer to the plagiarism policy and the student code of conduct.)

pg. 1 February 2017

Business and Business Environment/Support/11-1399-guide-legal-forms-for-business.pdf

A GUIDE TO LEGAL FORMS FOR BUSINESS

NOVEMBER 2011

Guide to Legal Forms Unincorporated legal forms: The distinguishing feature of unincorporated forms is that they have no separate legal personality. There are three main forms:

Sole Trader This is the simplest way to set up and run a business: ownership and control of the business rests with a single individual. Being a Sole Trader is inherently risky because the individual is not separate from the business and has sole unlimited personal liability for the business, its debts and contractual obligations, and any claims against it. They own all the assets of the business and can dispose of them as they wish, and may employ staff and trade under a business name. However it is unlikely that sole trader status will be suitable for businesses which need more than a small level of external investment – being unincorporated limits borrowing and prevents the business raising equity finance by issuing shares.

Regulation for the Sole Trader is minimal: there is no requirement for a formal constitution for the business, and no need to register or file accounts and returns with Companies House. Sole Traders are treated as self-employed by HMRC and must register and make an annual self assessment tax return – profits from the business are treated as personal income subject to income tax and national insurance contributions.

Unincorporated Association Unincorporated Associations are groups that agree, or ‘contract’, to come together for specific purpose. They normally have a constitution setting out the purpose for which the association has been set up, and the rules for the association and its members. They are typically governed by a management committee. All members of the management committee will again have unlimited personal liability, unless they are specifically indemnified in the constitution. As for a Sole Trader, there is a limitation on raising finance, minimal regulation, and self-employed tax status for management committee members.

Partnership A Partnership is a relatively simple way for two or more legal persons to set up and run a business together with a view to profit. A partnership can arise, without any formal agreement, when people carry on a business in common, but typically there is agreement to trade as a partnership. Partners will usually draw up a legally binding partnership agreement, setting out such matters as the amount of capital contributed by each partner and the way in which they will share the profits (and losses) of the business.

Again the Partnership has no separate legal personality. Partners share the risks, costs and responsibilities of being in business. Because partners generally bear the consequences of each other’s decisions, partners usually manage the business themselves, though they can hire employees. Partners usually raise money for the business out of their own assets, and / or with loans, although again being unincorporated

2

limits borrowing in practice, and not being a company with a share capital prevents the business itself from raising equity finance by issuing shares.

Each partner is self-employed and pays tax on this basis on their share of the profits: The partnership itself and each individual partner must make annual self-assessment returns to HMRC, and the Partnership must keep records showing business income and expenses.

Legal persons other than individuals – such as Limited Companies or Limited Liability Partnerships – can also be partners in a partnership. They are treated like any other partner except that they have additional tax and reporting obligations – for example companies must pay corporation tax rather than income tax on their profits from the partnership.

Limited Partnership Not to be confused with a Limited Liability Partnership (see below) – a Limited Partnership has two sorts of partner: general partners and limited partners. The form is similar to a Partnership, with the main differences being that the limited partners may not be involved in the management of the business and their liability is limited to the amount that they have invested in the partnership. Note that limited partners are different from ‘sleeping’ partners in a Partnership or Limited Partnership, who do not take part in running the business but remain fully liable for its debts. Limited partnerships must register at Companies House, and do not come into existence until they are registered. Changes to the partnership must also be registered.

Trust Trusts are unincorporated and have no legal identity of their own. They are essentially legal devices for holding assets so as to separate legal ownership from economic interest. A trust holds assets on behalf of an individual or another organisation and governs how they are to be used. A trust is run by a small group of people called trustees who are legally responsible for the administration of the trust and personally liable for any debts or claims against it that cannot be met out of the trust’s own resources. Trusts make their own set of rules – enshrined in a trust deed – which sets the trust’s objectives and may be used to ensure that assets and profits are used for a particular purpose. Trusts do not typically raise finance – they simply manage assets and do not distribute profits. Trusts are often used in conjunction with unincorporated associations, which cannot themselves own property.

3

Incorporated legal forms Limited Company The Limited Company is the most common legal form in use for running a business. Companies are ‘incorporated’ to form an entity with a separate legal personality. This means that the organisation can do business and enter into contracts in its own name.

On incorporation under the Companies Act 2006, a company is required to have two constitutional documents:

 a Memorandum, which records the fact that the initial members (the subscribers) wish to form a company and agree to become its members. The Memorandum cannot be amended; and

 Articles of Association – often just referred to as the Articles – which are essentially a contract between the company and its members, setting the legally binding rules for the company, including the framework for decisions, ownership and control. The Companies Act 2006 provides significant flexibility to draw up articles to suit the specific needs of the company, provided it acts within the law.

A Limited Company is owned by its members – those who have invested in the business – and as the name suggests they enjoy limited liability – i.e. the company’s finances are separate from the personal finances of their owners and as a general rule creditors of the business may only pursue the company’s assets to settle a debt. The personal assets of the owners are not at risk. There are two mechanisms for company membership:

Company Limited by Shares Most companies fall into category. Members each own one or more shares in the company and are therefore known as shareholders. Shareholders’ limited liability means that they only stand to lose what they have already invested or committed to invest (amounts unpaid on shares).

Company Limited by Guarantee Members of the company give a guarantee to pay a set sum if the company should go into liquidation.

A company must have at least one member. In a Company Limited by Shares, each share usually has a voting right attached to it so the members are able to vote on important decisions affecting the company. The arrangement is normally one share one vote, although many companies will create different classes of share with different voting rights attached. In a Company Limited by Guarantee the arrangement is usually one member one vote (OMOV).

Day to day management of a company is nominally separate from its ownership and undertaken by a director or board of directors, with the core principle that they act in the interest of the company and its members. However, directors may also be members, thus the simplest form of Limited Company is a single member who owns the whole company and is also its sole director. A company must have at least one director (public companies described below must have two) and at least one director must be a real person.

4

In a Company Limited by Guarantee, finance comes from the members, from loans or from profits retained in the business as working capital. A Company Limited by Shares can also raise capital from shareholders in return for a stake in the business – any profits from the business are usually distributed to shareholders in the form of dividends, apart from profits retained in the business as working capital. Limited Companies have a greater capacity to finance themselves with loans than unincorporated businesses, as they can use their assets as security for loans, creating a ‘charge’ over the company’s assets. These charges are registered at Companies House, providing transparency about the extent of a company’s secured credit. Lenders, including banks and building societies will therefore typically make incorporation a condition of providing a business loan.

The Limited Company form is subject to stricter regulatory requirements than unincorporated forms: greater accountability and transparency is the price to pay for the benefit of limited liability. Accountability is both to the company’s shareholders and also to the public who may wish to deal with the business. Companies are registered at Companies House, and it is the directors’ responsibility to maintain the company’s public records – including annual accounts and an annual return about the company – and to file them at Companies House. They must notify Companies House of changes in the structure and management of the business.

If a company has any taxable income or profits, it must tell HMRC that it exists and is liable to corporation tax. Companies liable to corporation tax must make annual returns to HMRC.

A Company Limited by Shares is either a Private Limited Company (Ltd) or a Public Limited Company (Plc). The key difference is that the Public Limited Company is permitted to offer shares for sale to the public. The Private Limited Company is the most common legal form used by the vast majority of businesses – ranging from a business with a single shareholder director to large companies which have attracted large investments of private equity capital. Public Limited Companies usually begin life as Private Limited Companies but later go public for the advantage that this provides in raising finance. A Public Limited Company must have at least two directors and a qualified company secretary. It must have issued shares to the public to a value of at least £50,000. Public companies attract stricter regulation than private companies to ensure transparency and protection for the public investor, who is often more separated from the management of the company than in a private company.

A Public Limited Company may also become a Listed Company by floating its shares on a recognised stock exchange, creating a wider market for its shares. Listed companies are subject to even greater regulatory requirements in the form of listing rules and information disclosure requirements put in place to ensure the market works and maintains its integrity.

Limited Liability Partnership (LLP) A Limited Liability Partnership is a body corporate with a separate legal personality similar to a company. Unlike in a normal partnership, the members of an LLP enjoy limited liability as the name suggests – liability is limited to the amount of money they have invested in the business and to any personal guarantees they have given to raise finance. Each member takes an equal share of the profits, unless the members’ agreement specifies otherwise.

5

Much like a Partnership, each non-corporate member of an LLP needs to register as self- employed with HMRC, and both the LLP itself and each individual member must make annual self-assessment returns HMRC. Non-corporate members of an LLP pay income tax and national insurance contributions on their share of the profits. Additionally, LLPs must register and file accounts and annual returns at Companies House. At least two members must be “designated members” who hold additional responsibilities – it is they who appoint auditors and sign off and file the accounts at Companies House.

Limited Liability Partnerships have much more freedom than companies over arranging their internal affairs, for example in the way in which decisions are made, and the way in which profits are distributed to members.

Community Interest Company (CIC)

A Community Interest Company (CIC) is a form of company (limited either by shares or by guarantee) created for so called ‘social enterprises’ that want to use their profits and assets for community benefit. CICs are easy to set up and have all the flexibility and certainty of the company form, but with several special features which ensure they serve a community interest:

 First, all companies applying to be registered as CICs must submit a community interest statement to provide the CIC Regulator with evidence that they will satisfy a community interest test defined in law. The company must continue to satisfy the test for as long as it remains a CIC, and must report annually to the Regulator.

 Second, a CIC must have an “asset lock” which restricts the transfer of the company’s assets (including any profits generated by its activities) to ensure that they are used for the benefit of the community.

 Third, CICs are subject to caps on dividends and interest payable – to strike a balance between encouraging people to invest in CICs and the principle that the assets and profits of a CIC should be devoted to the benefit of the community.

Charitable Incorporated Organisation (CIO)

The Charitable Incorporated Organisation (CIO) is a new legal form which will be available to charities in England and Wales from 2012. Currently charities wanting to incorporate normally do so as a Company Limited by Guarantee – which means dual registration with Companies House and the Charity Commission and dual regulation under company law and charity law. CIO status will offer the benefits of incorporation, but the organisation will only be registered with the Charity Commission and regulated under charity law. The new form is expected to be used primarily by small and medium charities. Like any charity the organisation’s profits and assets will be locked in for charitable purposes. Note that charity law and regulation are devolved: similar legislation has been passed in Scotland, but not yet in Northern Ireland.

6

Industrial and Provident Society

An Industrial and Provident Society (sometimes referred to as an I&P, or IPS) may take one of two forms:

Co-operative Society (Co-op) A Co-operative Society is a membership organisation run for the mutual benefit of its members – serving their interests primarily by trading with them or otherwise providing them with goods, services and facilities – with any surplus usually being ploughed back into the organisation, although profits can be distributed to members. A Co-operative Society may or may not be a social enterprise, depending on its activities and how it distributes its profits.

A Co-operative Society is governed by rules, which must reflect the co-operative values and principles set out by the International Co-operative Alliance. The Alliance defines a co- operative as an autonomous association of persons united voluntarily to meet their common economic, social and cultural needs and aspirations through jointly owned and democratically controlled enterprise.

A Co-operative Society is incorporated – and so has a separate legal personality – and must register and submit annual accounts to the Financial Services Authority (FSA) rather than Companies House. As with a company, the members’ liability is limited to the amount unpaid on shares. They have a principle of open membership and can therefore raise funds by issuing shares to the public.

They are run and managed by their members, usually through a committee of officers, similar to a company’s board, that manages on members’ behalf. However, members always have democratic control on a “one member one vote” (OMOV) basis, regardless of size of respective shareholdings, under the co-operative values and principles.

Community Benefit Society (BenCom) A Community Benefit Society (BenCom) is similar to a Co-operative Society except that it conducts business for the benefit of the community, rather than the members of the society. Indeed a BenCom must be run primarily for the benefit of people who are not members of the society and must also be in the interests of the community at large. Profits are not distributed among members, or external shareholders, but returned to the community. BenComs also often apply an asset lock, which protects their assets for the future benefit of the community. It is unusual for the BenCom to issue more than nominal share capital (eg one share valued at £1 per member. If more than nominal share capital is issued or if members make loans to the BenCom, dividends and interest paid are capped at a reasonable rate needed for the business to retain the capital it needs.

A BenCom can be established as a charity, providing it has exclusively charitable objects that are for the public benefit, allowing them to raise capital through public grants and charitable trusts. If approved, they’re known as exempt charities – reporting only to the Financial Services Authority (FSA), not the Charity Commission. Charitable BenComs must have an asset lock.

7

8

Financial Mutuals There are three other types of mutual form, not covered in detail here, that specifically exist to provide financial services. These are also registered with the FSA.

 Building Society Building Societies are mutual financial services institutions, primarily providing residential mortgage lending, but also other financial services such as other forms of lending and investment, money transmission services, banking and insurance services. They are funded substantially by their members.

 Credit Union A credit union is a cooperative financial institution that is owned and controlled by its members and operated for the purpose of providing credit at reasonable rates, and providing other financial services to its members.

 Friendly Society A friendly society is a voluntary mutual organisation whose main purpose is to assist members financially during sickness, unemployment or retirement, and to provide life assurance.

© Crown copyright 2011

You may re-use this information (not including logos) free of charge in any format or medium, under the terms of the Open Government Licence. Visit www.nationalarchives.gov.uk/doc/open-government-licence, write to the Information Policy Team, The National Archives, Kew, London TW9 4DU, or email: [email protected].

This publication is also available on our website at www.bis.gov.uk

Any enquiries regarding this publication should be sent to: Department for Business, Innovation and Skills 1 Victoria Street London SW1H 0ET Tel: 020 7215 5000 If you require this publication in an alternative format, email [email protected], or call 020 7215 5000. URN 11/1399

  • 0BGuide to Legal Forms
    • 1BUnincorporated legal forms:
      • 3BSole Trader
      • 4BUnincorporated Association
      • 5BPartnership
      • 6BLimited Partnership
      • 7BTrust
    • 2BIncorporated legal forms
      • 8BLimited Company
      • 9BLimited Liability Partnership (LLP)
        • 11BCo-operative Society (Co-op)
        • 12BCommunity Benefit Society (BenCom)
        • 10BFinancial Mutuals

Business and Business Environment/Support/Article for class activity.pdf

1

Montana, P. and Charnov, B. Management: A Streamlined Course for Students and Business People. (Hauppauge, New York: Barron’s Business Review Series, 1993), pp. 155-169.

Chapter 11: ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURES: CONCEPTS AND F0RMATS

When two or more people work together to achieve a group result, it is an organization. After the

objectives of an organization are established, the functions that must be performed are determined. Personnel requirements are assessed and the physical resources needed to accomplish the objectives determined. These elements must then be coordinated into a structural design that will help achieve the objectives. Finally, appropriate responsibilities are assigned.

Determining the functions to be performed involves consideration of division of labor; this is usually accomplished by a process of departmentalization. DEPARTMENTALIZATION

Grouping related functions into manageable units to achieve the objectives of the enterprise in the most efficient and effective manner is departmentalization. A variety of means can be utilized for this purpose. The primary forms of departmentalization are by function, process, product, market, customer, geographic area, and even matrix (also called project organization). In many organizations, a combination of these forms is used.

FUNCTION

KEY TERMS

departmentalization the grouping of related functions into manageable units to achieve the objectives of the

enterprise in the most efficient and effective manner. delegation the process that makes management possible because management is the process of getting results

accomplished through others. Delegation is the work a manager performs to entrust others with responsibility and authority and to create accountability for results. It is an activity of the organizing function.

scalar principle (chain of command) a clear definition of authority in the organization. This authority flows

down the chain of command from the top level to the first or lowest level in the organization. centralization occurs in an organization when a limited amount of authority is delegated. decentralization occurs when a significant amount of authority is delegated to lower levels in the organization. contingency approach an approach to organizational structure that states that the most appropriate

organizational structure depends on the situation, consisting of the particular technology, the environment, and many other dynamic forces.

2

Perhaps the oldest and most common method of grouping related functions is by specialized function,

such as marketing, finance, and production (or operations). Sometimes this form of departmentalization may create problems if individuals with specialized functions become more concerned with their own specialized area than with the overall business. An example of departmentalization by function appears in Figure 11-1 below.

PROCESS

Departmentalization can also take place by process. This type of departmentalization, which often exists in manufacturing companies, is illustrated in Figure 11-2 below.

PRODUCT

Whenever specialized knowledge of certain products or services is needed, departmentalization by

product may be best. This usually occurs in large diversified companies. This form of departmentalization is illustrated in Figure 11-3 below.

MARKET

When a need exists to provide better service to different types of markets, departmentalization by market

may be the appropriate form. An example of a business serving nonprofit markets, which uses the market form of departmentalization, is shown in Figure 11-4 below.

3

CUSTOMER

Sometimes key or major customers warrant departmentalization by customer. This is often the case in banks. See Figure 11-5 below.

GEOGRAPHIC AREA

When organizations are spread throughout the world or have territories in many parts of a country,

departmentalization by geographic area may provide better service to customers and be more cost effective. A typical example for this form of departmentalization. is shown in Figure 11-6 below.

MATRIX (PROJECT ORGANIZATION)

Departmentalization by matrix, or project, has received considerable use in recent years, particularly in

such industries as aerospace (e.g., NASA). In this method, personnel with different backgrounds and experiences that bear on the project are assembled and given the specific project to be accomplished within a certain time period. When the project is completed, these specialized personnel return to their regular work assignments. An example of this form is illustrated in Figure 11-7 below; it often takes the shape of a diamond.

4

COMBINATION APPROACH

Many organizations, particularly large, physically dispersed and diversified organizations, utilize several different forms of departmentalization. Figure 11-8 is an organizational chart showing the use of several forms of departmentalization.

DELEGATION--THE ART OF MANAGING

As shown earlier, the process of managing begins with the establishment of objectives. Once the objectives have been established, the functions that must be accomplished are considered. Then the work to be performed or the responsibilities to be assigned are determined. This means it is necessary to know the personnel and physical resources needed to accomplish the objectives of the enterprise. Thus, when the functions, personnel, and other resources are grouped together by some means of departmentalization into a logical framework or organizational structure, the process of delegation begins.

Delegation is the process that makes management possible. Why? Because management is the process of getting results accomplished through others.

DELEGATION PROCESS, AUTHORITY, AND ACCOUNTABILITY

At the moment a job becomes too complex, too diverse, or too voluminous for one person, the need for delegation arises. In its simplest form, imagine the sole administrator with objectives and with no time to accomplish them. Means allowing, the manager can create a new job, hire an employee, and assign the accomplishment of the objectives to the new employee.

YOU SHOULD REMEMBER

Determining the functions to be performed in an organization involves consideration of division of labor;

this is usually accomplished by a process of departmentalization. The primary forms of departmentalization are by function, process, product, market, customer, geographical area, matrix (project) or some combination of these forms.

5

To meet these responsibilities, the new employee must also have the authority to achieve them. Thus,

authority is delegated along with the responsibility. The manager, however, is still ultimately responsible. By assigning some of his or her responsibilities, the manager transfers or creates accountability. If the employee does not exercise the responsibility properly, the manager can always withdraw the authority. Delegation without control is abdication.

In practice, the process of management works in conjunction with the process of delegation. Since management is the process of getting results through others, delegation facilitates that process by assigning responsibilities, delegating authority, and exacting accountability by employees.

The delegation process works as follows. The manager has certain defined objectives (i.e., results) to

accomplish at the end of the budget period. He or she assigns the responsibilities (i.e., duties to be performed) to key employees, along with the commensurate authority to go with those responsibilities. Thus, the accomplishment of the assigned responsibilities should equal the defined objectives.

The manager then develops standards of performance with each key employee (i.e., the conditions that

should exist when a job is done well). These standards should be developed mutually to be effective. In essence, these standards of performance become the accountability of each employee for the budget period. The successful accomplishment of the standards of performance should equal the assigned responsibilities. The process continues with the appraisal of key subordinates rated against the agreed-upon standards of performance and closes with evaluation and feedback to the beginning of the next budget cycle, when the process begins all over again. See Figure 11-9 below.

RISKS IN DELEGATION

The sheer volume of management responsibilities necessitates delegation. There is somewhat of a paradox in

this situation, however, because delegation involves taking risks. Among the risks of delegation are loss of control, reverse delegation, and even loss of a job.

• LOSS OF CONTROL

In giving over authority to another, the manager loses some control over the proper completion of a

project. The manager who has lived by the adage "If you want it done right, do it yourself' may find it difficult to delegate tasks for which he or she will ultimately be held accountable.

6

The key to successful delegation is assigning the right responsibilities to the right person. Of course, one never knows who the right persons are until one meets and works with them, but it must realistically be assumed that a given organization, department, or section employs at least some competent, willing, and responsible individuals. This assumption does not address itself to the fact that it is nearly impossible today for the manager to be technically superior to all employees. A staff that is not utilized effectively because of a manager's failure to delegate is a major loss to an organization, a waste of human resources.

• REVERSE DELEGATION

An important consideration for the manager who tries to do everybody's job is that he or she does so at the expense of the job for which he was hired--managing. An interesting analogy that underscores the value of delegation for management's sake is the "monkey-on-the-back" analogy, which claims that managers spend far more time with their employees than they even faintly realize. This habit occurs especially when a problem is brought to the manager's attention. In encounters with employees, the manager's use of simple phrases, such as "send me a memo on that," or "let me think about that and I'll let you know," or "just let me know what I can do," causes the "monkey" (problem) to jump onto the manager's back.

The manager assumes the responsibility for handling the task that was delegated to the employee in the first place, and when the employee reaches an impasse, the manager takes the next step. This is reverse delegation, and many employees are adept at it. Naturally, there will be situations in which the next step is justified, but unless the manager wants endless lines at the office door, he or she should avoid the casual and repeated use of those phrases that permit employee problems to ride on the manager's back. in fact, this principle of delegation is that accountability to a superior cannot be delegated.

A solution to this problem is to encourage initiative in employees. Employees should not have to wait until told to do something; nor should they have to ask. They should practice the completion of assigned tasks. By keeping the responsibility where it belongs, the manager will increase discretionary time to manage and can still handle system-imposed tasks. To develop initiative in employees early is one of the ways to develop a new generation of capable managers.

• LOSS OF JOB

The foregoing discussion brings to mind another risk in delegation from management's viewpoint. Is it possible to delegate one's self right out of a job? Suppose a subordinate develops so much initiative that he or she becomes superior to the boss. This is a threatening problem for the manager. The employee would be very happy if his or her development resulted in promotion, but what if the promotion means the manager's job?

Consensus among theorists suggests that the employee should be given the opportunity to perform to as high a level of responsibility as possible if this improves the group's performance. The manager should then endeavor to reward that person accordingly, even if it means helping that person to land a better lob outside the organization. To neglect and waste the talents of any individual is as criminal as the misuse of company funds or equipment.

In practice, we have all heard stories from individuals who feel more competent dim their managers. Thus it would seem that the best safeguard a manager has in preserving his or her position is to be a good manager and to prepare for his or her own advancement.

7

TECHNIQUES OF DELEGATION

The art of delegation often depends on a given situation. Plans change and people differ, but this does not imply that the employee should have to be notified on a daily basis of what is needed. Nor does it imply that there are not some generally accepted techniques that can facilitate the process of delegation, as discussed below. More suggestions are detailed in the list of do's and don'ts.

• DEFINITION OF RESPONSIBILITIES AND AUTHORITY

A clear definition of responsibilities and the authority to accomplish them constitute the foundation of the art of delegation. Whenever possible, these responsibilities should be stated in writing. The employee should also have a good idea of how the job fits into the total picture and why it is important. The manager should also encourage questions and be completely approachable. This practice, in combination with exhibiting confidence and trust by allowing subordinates to pursue goals without undue reporting, constant checking, and other exaggerated forms of control, will create a supportive climate and help to build an effective working relationship.

• PERFORMANCE RATING

Once the employee understands the job, that person should be made aware of how performance will be measured. This step in the management process has already been mentioned.

By and large, and within reason, managers receive the type and level of job performance they expect or informally accept over a period of time. In fact, low expectations tend to breed low performance and the opposite is true of high expectations. The failure to confront lower than desired levels of performance is tantamount to acknowledging them as acceptable; high expectations mean setting challenging but achievable goals. The focus should be on results that are motivating and attainable.

The manager should establish a system for setting objectives and set up a procedure for periodically reporting progress toward these objectives. Consideration of less-experienced employees demands more frequent consultation and, possibly, reporting. The manager who is committed to delegating authority should avoid switching back and forth in delegation, thereby causing only confusion and stagnation among employees

• AWARENESS OF LIMITATIONS

It may seem self-evident, but delegation cannot be used when the individual does not welcome additional responsibility. Knowing who wants greater responsibility or promotion is as important as knowing who is qualified for a job. It is often difficult for successful executives, who owe their success to a driving desire for greater responsibility and recognition, to understand others who seem to lack that motivation.

In essence, the manager-employee relationship is one of interdependence. A major goal of delegation is to reduce dependence on the manager, but the manager incurs a certain responsibility to the employee in delegation. The manager is responsible for helping the assistant discover how best to develop his or her abilities in order to meet future responsibilities.

Managers can develop employees through the art of delegation and should practice this art judiciously. With effective delegation, a manager can multiply his or her effectiveness and, through others, achieve the results expected.

PARITY OF AUTHORITY AND RESPONSIBILITY

8

An important principle of organization as well as management is that authority should equal

responsibility. This principle is known as the parity of authority and responsibility and ensures that work will be performed with a minimum amount of frustration on the part of personnel. By not delegating authority equal to responsibility, a manager will create employee dissatisfaction and generally waste energies and resources.

SCALAR PRINCIPLE

This concept is generally referred to as the chain of command. It means that there should be a clear definition of authority in the organization and that this authority flows, one link at a time, through the chain of command from the top to the bottom of the organization. Communication in the organization is through channels. Following this principle generally results in clarification of relationships, less confusion, and improved decision-making.

DELEGATION DO'S AND DON’TS

Do's

• Delegate as simply and directly as possible. Give precise instructions. • Illustrate how each delegation applies to organizational goals. • Mutually develop standards of performance. • Clarify expected results. • Anticipate the questions your employees may have, and answer them in order. • Discuss recurring problems. • Seek employee ideas about how to do the job. • Accentuate the positive rather than the negative. Be supportive. Exhibit trust. • Recognize superior performance. • Keep your promises.

Don'ts

• Do not threaten your staff. Effective delegation depends more on leadership skills than on position

power. • Do not assume a condescending attitude. • Do not merely give answers. Show an employee how to do something and why it is done that way. • Do not overreact to problems. Refrain from criticizing an employee in front of others. • Avoid excessive checks on progress.

CENTRALIZATION VERSUS DECENTRALIZATION

YOU SHOULD REMEMBER

Delegation is the process that makes management possible because management is the process of getting results accomplished through others. Understanding the process of delegation involves employing the principles of responsibility, authority, and accountability, as well as understanding the concept of the chain of command (scalar principle).

9

The issues of centralization and decentralization involve the principle of delegation of authority. When a

limited amount of authority is delegated in an organization, it is usually characterized as centralized. When a significant amount of authority is delegated to lower levels in the organization, the business is characterized as decentralized. Centralization and decentralization are opposites, and there are different degrees of each. In a highly centralized organization, employees at lower levels have a limited range of decision-making authority. The scope of authority to make decisions in decentralized organizations, by way of contrast, is very broad for lower level employees (see Figure 11-10 below).

One cannot classify all forms of centralization as effective or ineffective. The same applies to

decentralization. Each form has its advantages and disadvantages and is affected by a number of factors. For example, the size and complexity of the enterprise can affect the delegation of authority. If an organization is very large and diversified, the limitations of expertise will generally lead to decentralization of authority to the heads of these different businesses. if speed and adaptability to change are characteristic of the business, it tends toward decentralization. Geographic dispersion also favors decentralization of authority. On the other hand, some organizations have excellent and speedy communications systems that tend to favor the centralization of authority. In situations in which adequate personnel are unavailable, the organization tends to centralized authority.

ADVANTAGES OF CENTRALIZATION 1. Closer control of operations 2. Uniformity of policies, practices, and procedures 3. Better use of centralized, specialized experts

ADVANTAGES OF DECENTRALIZATION 1. Faster decision-making without resort to higher level consultation 2. Excellent training experience for promotion to higher level management 3. Decisions better adapted to local conditions

ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURES

YOU SHOULD REMEMBER

The issues of centralization and decentralization involve the principle of delegation of authority. In

centralization, a limited amount of authority is delegated; in decentralization, a significant amount of authority is delegated to lower levels. Each form has its advantages and disadvantages and is affected by a number of factors, such as size of organization and the amount of geographic dispersion.

10

The primary formal relationships for organizing, as discussed earlier, are responsibility, authority, and

accountability. They enable us to bring together functions, people, and other resources for the purpose of achieving objectives. The framework for organizing these formal relationships is known as the organizational structure. It provides the means for clarifying and communicating the lines of responsibility, authority, and accountability.

MAJOR TYPES OF ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE

Although there are a number of variations of organizational structure, we shall discuss line and staff organizations and committee organization here.

• LINE ORGANIZATION

The line organization is the simplest organizational structure. It is the "doing" organization, in that the work of all organizational units is directly involved in producing and marketing the organization's goods and services. There are direct vertical links between the different levels of the scalar chain. Since there is a clear authority structure, this form of organization promotes greater decisionmaking and is simple in form to understand.

On the other hand, managers may be overburdened when they have too many duties. Figure 11-11 below illustrates a simple line organization.

• LINE AND STAFF ORGANIZATION

When staff specialists are added to a line organization to "advise; "serve;” or “support" the line in some

manner, we have a line and staff organization. These specialists contribute to the effectiveness and efficiency of the organization. Their authority is generally limited to making recommendation to the line organization. Sometimes this creates conflict. However, such conflict can be reduced by having staff specialists obtain some line experience, which will tend to make them better understand the problems facing the line managers they support. Such functions as human resources management and research and development are typical staff functions. Figure 11-12 below provides an example of such a structure.

11

• COMMITTEE ORGANIZATION

When a group of people is formally appointed to consider or decide certain matters, this type of structure

is a committee. Committees can be permanent (standing) or temporary and usually supplement line and staff functions. Sometimes ad hoc or temporary committees are set up to deal with a specific problem. Once this committee makes its recommendations, it is dissolved. On the other hand, permanent committees usually act in an advisory capacity to certain organizational units or managers. For example, committees are used to a large extent in universities. They may report to a dean or department chair. Certain committees, called plural committees, have the authority to order, not only to recommend. These committees are usually reserved for a very high level, such as the board of directors. An example is an executive committee of the board for compensation or for succession planning.

Although committees have a number of advantages, they also have a number of disadvantages, particularly being excessively time consuming. Hence they should be managed effectively.

ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE AND ENVIRONMENT AND TECHNOLOGY

Most studies that have been conducted on the relationship between organizational structure and the environment have concluded that the best organizational structure is contingent to some degree on the conditions in the environment. Several studies have also shown a relationship between technology and structure. In fact, these researchers even suggest that technology itself determines structure. These studies and others have lead to a contingency approach to organizational structure.

CONTINGENCY APPROACH

This approach indicates that the most appropriate organizational structure depends not only on the organizational objectives but also on the situation, which includes the environment, the technology employed, the rate and pace of change, the managerial style, the size of the organization, and other dynamic forces.

12

KNOW THE CONCEPTS

DO YOU KNOW THE BASICS?

1. What is departmentalization? 2. What are the primary forms of departmentalization? 3. Describe a matrix form of departmentalization. 4. Why is delegation the art of managing? 5. Describe how the process of delegation works. 6. What is meant by the parity of authority and responsibility? 7. What is the scalar principle? 8. In the organizational context, what is meant by centralization versus decentralization? 9. How do you differ between line and staff in organizational terms? 10. What is the committee organization, and what forms can it take?

TERMS FOR STUDY centralization committee organization contingency approach decentralization delegation departmentalization environment line organization matrix organization parity of responsibility and authority project organization reverse delegation scalar principle (chain of command) staff organization technology

YOU SHOULD REMEMBER

The framework for organizing the formal relationships of responsibility, authority, and accountability is

known as the organizational structure. There are a number of variations of organizational structure, including line, line and staff, and committee.

Most studies of organizational structure indicate a relationship to the environment as well as to the technology employed. Consequently, a contingency approach to organizational structure has developed, which indicates that a number of dynamic forces can and do affect structure.

13

ANSWERS KNOW THE BASICS 1. Departmentalization is the process in which related functions are grouped into manageable units to achieve

the objective of the enterprise in the most efficient and effective manner. 2. The primary forms of departmentalization are by function, process, product, market, customer, geographic

area, and matrix (also called project organization). In many organizations, a combination of these forms is used.

3. Departmentalization by matrix (or project) involves bringing together personnel with different backgrounds

and experience that bear on a project and giving them a certain time period to complete it. Once the project is completed, these specialized personnel return to their regular work assignments.

4. Delegation is the art of managing because it makes management possible, and management is the process as

well as the art and skill of getting results accomplished through other people. 5. The delegation process works as follows. The manager has certain defined objectives (i.e., results) to

accomplish at the end of a budget period. He or she assigns the responsibilities (i.e., duties to be performed) to key employees, along with the commensurate authority to go with those responsibilities. The accomplishment of the assigned responsibilities should equal the defined objectives. The manager then develops standards of performance with each key employee (i.e., the conditions that should exist when a job is done well). These standards should be mutually developed to be effective. in essence, these standards of performance become the accountability of each employee for the budget period. The successful accomplishment of the standards of performance should equal the assigned responsibilities. The process continues with the appraisal of the key subordinates against the agreed-upon standards of performance and closes with evaluation and feedback to the beginning of the next budget cycle, when the process begins all over again.

6. It means that authority should equal responsibility 7. The scalar principle means that there should be a clear definition of authority in the organization and that this

authority flows, one link at a time, through the chain of command. 8. The issues of centralization and decentralization involve the principle of delegation of authority. When a

limited amount of authority is delegated in an organization, it is usually characterized as centralized. When a significant amount of authority is delegated to lower levels in the organization, the business is characterized as decentralized.

9. The line is the simplest organizational structure. it is the "doing" function, in that the work of all

organizational units is directly involved in producing and marketing the organization's goods and services. When staff specialists are added to a line organization to "advise," "serve," or "support" the line in some manner, we have a line and staff organization. Staff authority is generally limited to making recommendations to the line and contributing to the effectiveness and efficiency of the organization.

14

10. When a group of people is formally appointed to consider or decide certain matters, this type of structure is a committee. Committees can be permanent (standing) or temporary and usually supplement the line and staff functions.

Business and Business Environment/Support/Funtions in organisations.pptx

Business and Business Environment

UKCBC

HND in

Learning Outcomes

Explore different main functions or departments such as marketing, finance, human resources, purchasing, production etc.

Explore inter-dependencies with other departments in carrying their functions

HND in

The term organisational structure refers to the relationships between the various functions and positions in an organisation. Structure determines authority and responsibility for particular tasks/activities. It also specifies the routes of communication between different parts of the organisation.

The work of the organisation is divided up into separate activities or tasks and particular individuals concentrate on specific tasks or activities. This enables the application of specialised knowledge and so improves organisational efficiency and effectiveness.

HND in

Business organisation departments and functions

A typical business organisation may consist of the following main departments or functions:

Production

Research and Development (often abbreviated to R&D)

Purchasing

Marketing (including the selling function)

Human Resource Management

Accounting and Finance.

HND in

The Production function

Deciding the best production methods and factory layout.

Close collaboration will usually be necessary between Production and various other functions within the organisation, for example:

Research and Development, concerning the implications of product design for production methods and cost

Marketing, concerning desired product functionality, appearance, quality, durability and so on

HND in

The Production function

Finance, concerning the availability of funds for purchase of new equipment and the acceptability of inventory levels.

Human Resource Management, concerning staff motivation implications of job design and production methods.

HND in

Research and Development function

The Research and Development (R&D) function is concerned with developing new products or processes and improving existing products/processes.

R&D activities must be closely coordinated with the organisation’s marketing activities to ensure that the organisation is providing exactly what its customers want in the most efficient, effective and economical way.

HND in

The Purchasing function

The Purchasing function is concerned with acquiring goods and services for use by the organisation. These will include, for example, raw materials and components for manufacturing and also production equipment.

The responsibilities of this function usually extend to buying goods and services for the entire organisation (not just the Production function), including, for example, office equipment, furniture, computer equipment and stationery.

In buying goods and services, purchasing managers must take into account a number of factors – collectively referred to as ‘the Purchasing Mix’, namely, Quantity, Quality, Price and Delivery.

HND in

The Purchasing function

Quantity. Buying in large quantities can attract price discounts and prevent inventory running out. On the other hand, there are substantial costs involved in carrying a high level of inventory.

Quality. There will usually be a trade-off between price and quality in acquiring goods and services. Consequently, Production, R&D and Marketing Functions will need to be consulted to determine an acceptable level of quality which will depend on how important quality is as an attribute of the final product or service of the organisation.

Price. Other things being equal, the purchasing manager will look for the best price deal when procuring goods and services, although price must be considered in conjunction with quality and supplier reliability, in order to achieve best value, rather than lowest price only.

Delivery. The time between placing an order and receiving the goods or services, the lead time, can be critical for production planning and scheduling and also has implications for inventory control. Suppliers must therefore be evaluated in terms of their reliability and capability for on time delivery.

HND in

The Marketing function

Marketing is concerned with identifying and satisfying customers needs at the right price. Marketing involves researching what customers want and analysing how the organisation can satisfy these wants.

Marketing activities range from the ‘strategic’, concerned with the choice of product markets (and how to compete in them, for example, on price or product differentiation) to the operational, arranging sales promotions (e.g., offering a 25 per cent discount), producing literature such as product catalogues and brochures, placing advertisements in the appropriate media and so on.

A fundamental activity in marketing is managing the Marketing Mix consisting of the ‘4Ps’: Product, Price, Promotion and Place.

HND in

The Marketing function

Product. Having the right product in terms of benefits that customers value.

Price. Setting the right price which is consistent with potential customers’ perception of the value offered by the product.

Promotion. Promoting the product in a way which creates maximum customer awareness and persuades potential customers to make the decision to purchase the product.

Place. Making the product available in the right place at the right time – including choosing appropriate distribution channels.

HND in

The Human Resources function

The Human Resources function is concerned with the following:

Recruitment and selection. Ensuring that the right people are recruited to the right jobs.

Training and development. Enabling employees to carry out their responsibilities effectively and make use of their potential.

Employee relations. Including negotiations over pay and conditions.

Grievance procedures and disciplinary matters. Dealing with complaints from employees or from the employer.

Health and Safety matters Making sure employees work in a healthy and safe environment.

Redundancy procedures Administering a proper system that is seen to be fair to all concerned when deciding on redundancies and agreeing redundancy payments.

HND in

The Accounting and Finance function

The Accounting and Finance function is concerned with the following:

Financial record keeping of transactions involving monetary inflows or outflows.

Preparing financial statements (the income statement, balance sheet and cash flow statement) for reporting to external parties such as shareholders. The financial statements are also the starting point for calculating any tax due on business profits.

Payroll administration Paying wages and salaries and maintaining appropriate income tax and national insurance records.

Preparing management accounting information and analysis to help managers to plan, control and make decisions.

HND in

? …………

HND in

Business and Business Environment/Support/M3 M4 strategic analysis tools.pdf

Strategic Analysis Tools

Topic Gateway Series

1

Strategic Analysis Tools Topic Gateway Series No. 34

Prepared by Jim Downey and Technical Information Service October 2007

Strategic Analysis Tools

Topic Gateway Series

About Topic Gateways

Topic Gateways are intended as a refresher or introduction to topics of interest

to CIMA members. They include a basic definition, a brief overview and a fuller

explanation of practical application. Finally they signpost some further resources

for detailed understanding and research.

Topic Gateways are available electronically to CIMA Members only in the CPD

Centre on the CIMA website, along with a number of electronic resources.

About the Technical Information Service

CIMA supports its members and students with its Technical Information Service

(TIS) for their work and CPD needs.

Our information specialists and accounting specialists work closely together to

identify or create authoritative resources to help members resolve their work

related information needs. Additionally, our accounting specialists can help CIMA

members and students with the interpretation of guidance on financial reporting,

financial management and performance management, as defined in the CIMA

Official Terminology 2005 edition.

CIMA members and students should sign into My CIMA to access these services

and resources.

The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants 26 Chapter Street

London SW1P 4NP

United Kingdom

T. +44 (0)20 7663 5441 F. +44 (0)20 7663 5442 E. [email protected] www.cimaglobal.com

2

Strategic Analysis Tools

Topic Gateway Series

3

Strategic analysis tools

Definition and concept

Strategic Analysis is:

‘… the process of conducting research on the business environment within which

an organisation operates and on the organisation itself, in order to formulate

strategy.’

BNET Business Dictionary

‘… a theoretically informed understanding of the environment in which an

organisation is operating, together with an understanding of the organisation’s

interaction with its environment in order to improve organisational efficiency and

effectiveness by increasing the organisation’s capacity to deploy and redeploy its

resources intelligently.’

Professor Les Worrall, Wolverhampton Business School

Definitions of strategic analysis often differ, but the following attributes are

commonly associated with it:

1. Identification and evaluation of data relevant to strategy formulation.

2. Definition of the external and internal environment to be analysed.

3. A range of analytical methods that can be employed in the analysis.

Examples of analytical methods used in strategic analysis include:

• SWOT analysis

• PEST analysis

• Porter’s five forces analysis

• four corner’s analysis

• value chain analysis

• early warning scans

• war gaming.

An overview of these strategic analysis tools will be provided in this topic

gateway.

Strategic Analysis Tools

Topic Gateway Series

4

Context

In the current CIMA syllabus, students will study and may be examined on

strategic analysis tools as part of the Management Level Paper 5, Integrated

Management. In addition, the tools are commonly used in many organisations

for strategic decision making. It is therefore an advantage to develop good

strategic analytical skills at an early stage.

Related concepts

Strategic planning; strategic management; business analysis; benchmarking;

balanced scorecard; competitor analysis; CIMA Strategic Scorecard™.

Application

Analytical methods and tools are key to ensuring that consistency and an

appropriate level of rigour is applied to the analysis.

There are a number of important considerations to be aware of when using

analytical tools:

1. The tool must help to answer the question that the organisation has asked.

2. The expected benefit of using the tool needs to be defined and it must be actionable. The more clearly the tool has been defined, the more likely the

analysis will be successful.

3. Many tools benefit from input and collaboration with other people, functions or even organisations. There should be sufficient time for collaboration and

advance warning given so that people can accommodate the analysis.

4. Proper use of analytical tools may be time consuming. It is important to ensure that key stakeholders, for example, the board, senior directors and

company departments are aware of this. Otherwise they may not be able to

provide the necessary commitment to complete the analysis.

The aim of the analytical tool is to sharpen the focus of the analysis and to

ensure a methodical, balanced approach.

All analytical tools rely on historical, backward looking data to extrapolate future

assumptions. It is important to exercise caution when interpreting strategic

analysis results. Otherwise the analysis may be unduly influenced by

preconceptions or pressures within the organisation which seek to validate a

particular strategic assumption.

Strategic Analysis Tools

Topic Gateway Series

5

One of the key skills of a strategic analyst is in understanding which analytical

tools or techniques are most appropriate to the objectives of the analysis. Below

is an overview of some of the more commonly used strategic analysis tools.

SWOT analysis

A SWOT analysis is a simple but widely used tool that helps in understanding the

strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats involved in a project or business

activity.

It starts by defining the objective of the project or business activity and identifies

the internal and external factors that are important to achieving that objective.

strengths and weaknesses are usually internal to the organisation, while

opportunities and threats are usually external. Often these are plotted on a

simple 2x2 matrix.

SWOT analysis diagram

Strengths • What does your organisation do better

than others?

• What are your unique selling points? • What do you competitors and customers

in your market perceive as your

strengths?

• What is your organisations competitive edge?

Opportunities • What political, economic, social-cultural,

or technology (PEST) changes are taking

place that could be favourable to you?

• Where are there currently gaps in the market or unfulfilled demand?

• What new innovation could your organisation bring to the market?

Weakness • What do other organisations do better

than you?

• What elements of your business add little or no value?

• What do competitors and customers in your market perceive as your weakness?

Threats • What political, economic, social-cultural,

or technology (PEST) changes are taking

place that could be unfavourable to you?

• What restraints to you face? • What is your competition doing that

could negatively impact you?

Strategic Analysis Tools

Topic Gateway Series

6

When using SWOT analysis, it should be ensured that:

• Only specific, verifiable statements are used. An example might be ‘price is £1.50 per unit lower than competition’ rather than ‘good value for

money’.

• Internal and external factors are prioritised so that time is spent concentrating on the most significant factors. This should include a risk

assessment to ensure that high risk or high impact threats and

opportunities are clearly identified and are dealt with in priority order.

• Issues identified are retained for later in the strategy formation process.

• The analysis is pitched at the project or business activity level rather than at a total company level, which may be less actionable.

• It is not used in exclusivity. No one tool is likely to be completely comprehensive, so a mixture of option-generating tools should be used.

PEST analysis

PEST analysis is a scan of the external macro-environment in which an

organisation exists. It is a useful tool for understanding the political, economic,

socio-cultural and technological environment that an organisation operates in. It

can be used for evaluating market growth or decline, and as such the position,

potential and direction for a business.

Political factors. These include government regulations such as employment laws, environmental regulations and tax policy. Other political factors are trade

restrictions and political stability.

Economic factors. These affect the cost of capital and purchasing power of an organisation. Economic factors include economic growth, interest rates, inflation

and currency exchange rates.

Social factors. These impact on the consumer’s need and the potential market size for an organisation’s goods and services. Social factors include population

growth, age demographics and attitudes towards health.

Technological factors. These influence barriers to entry, make or buy decisions and investment in innovation, such as automation, investment incentives and the

rate of technological change.

PEST factors can be classified as opportunities or threats in a SWOT analysis. It is

often useful to complete a PEST analysis before completing a SWOT analysis.

Strategic Analysis Tools

Topic Gateway Series

7

It is also worth noting that the four paradigms of PEST vary in significance

depending on the type of business. For example, social factors are more

obviously relevant to consumer businesses or a B2B business near the consumer

end of the supply chain. Conversely, political factors are more obviously relevant

to a defence contractor or aerospace manufacturer.

Porter’s five forces

Porter's five forces of competitive position analysis was developed in 1979 by

Michael E. Porter of Harvard Business School as a simple framework for assessing

and evaluating the competitive strength and position of a business organisation.

This theory is based on the concept that there are five forces which determine

the competitive intensity and attractiveness of a market. Porter’s five forces helps

to identify where power lies in a business situation. This is useful both in

understanding the strength of an organisation’s current competitive position, and

the strength of a position that an organisation may look to move into.

Strategic analysts often use Porter’s five forces to understand whether new

products or services are potentially profitable. By understanding where power

lies, the theory can also be used to identify areas of strength, to improve

weaknesses and to avoid mistakes.

The five forces are:

1. Supplier power. An assessment of how easy it is for suppliers to drive up prices. This is driven by:

• the number of suppliers of each essential input

• the uniqueness of their product or service

• the relative size and strength of the supplier

• the cost of switching from one supplier to another.

2. Buyer power. An assessment of how easy it is for buyers to drive prices down. This is driven by:

• the number of buyers in the market

• the importance of each individual buyer to the organisation

• the cost to the buyer of switching from one supplier to another.

Strategic Analysis Tools

Topic Gateway Series

If a business has just a few powerful buyers, they are often able to dictate terms.

3. Competitive rivalry. The key driver is the number and capability of competitors in the market. Many competitors, offering undifferentiated

products and services, will reduce market attractiveness.

4. Threat of substitution. Where close substitute products exist in a market, it increases the likelihood of customers switching to alternatives in response to

price increases. This reduces both the power of suppliers and the

attractiveness of the market.

5. Threat of new entry. Profitable markets attract new entrants, which erodes profitability. Unless incumbents have strong and durable barriers to entry, for

example, patents, economies of scale, capital requirements or government

policies, then profitability will decline to a competitive rate.

Porter's five forces diagram

Threats of substitution e.g.

• Buyer switching cost • Buyer propensity to

substitute • Product differentiation

Rivaltry e.g. • Number of competitors • Size of competitors • Industry growth rate • Differentiation • Exit barriers

Threat of new entry e.g.

• Switching costs • Economies of scale • Learning curve • Capital requirements • Patents

Buyer power e.g. • Buyer information • Buyer volume • Buyer price sensitivity • Buyer switching costs • Bargaining leverage

Supplier power e.g. • Supplier concentration • Importance of volume

to supplier • Cost relative to selling

price

Based on Michael Porter's five forces of competitive position model

ww.businessballs.com/portersfiveforcesofcompetition.htm [Accessed 12 February 2008]

8

Strategic Analysis Tools

Topic Gateway Series

Four corner’s analysis

Developed by Michael Porter, the four corner’s analysis is a useful tool for

analysing competitors. It emphasises that the objective of competitive analysis

should always be on generating insights into the future.

The model can be used to:

• develop a profile of the likely strategy changes a competitor might make and how successful they may be

• determine each competitor’s probable response to the range of feasible strategic moves other competitors might make

• determine each competitor’s probable reaction to the range of industry shifts and environmental changes that may occur.

The ‘four corners’ refers to four diagnostic components that are essential to

competitor analysis: future goals; current strategy; assumptions; and capabilities.

A summary of Porter's four corner's analysis

Drivers • Financial goals • Corporate culture • Organisational structure • Leadership team backgrounds • External constraints • Business philosophy

Current strategy • How the business creates value • Where the business is choosing to

invest • Relationships and networks the

business has developed

Management assumptions • Company’s perceptions of its

strengths and weaknesses • Cultural traits • Organisational value • Perceived industry forces • Belief about competitor’s goals

Capabilities • Marketing skills • Ability to service channels • Skills and training to work force • Patents and copyrights • Financial strength • Leadership qualities of CEO

COMPETITOR’S FUTURE STRATEGY

MOTIVATION ACTIONS

9

Strategic Analysis Tools

Topic Gateway Series

10

Many organisations carry out basic SWOT analysis and have an appreciation for

their competitor’s strategies. However, motivational factors are often overlooked

and yet are generally the key drivers of competitive behaviour.

Understanding the following four components can help predict how a

competitor may respond to a given situation.

Motivation – drivers. Analysing a competitor’s goals assists in understanding whether they are satisfied with their current performance and market position.

This helps predict how they might react to external forces and how likely it is that

they will change strategy.

Motivation – management assumptions. The perceptions and assumptions that a competitor has about itself, the industry and other companies will

influence its strategic decisions. Analysing these assumptions can help identify

the competitor’s biases and blind spots.

Actions – strategy. A company’s strategy determines how a competitor competes in the market. However, there can be a difference between ‘intended

strategy’ (the strategy as stated in annual reports, interviews and public

statements) and the ‘realised strategy’ (the strategy that the company is following

in practice, as evidenced by acquisitions, capital expenditure and new product

development).

Where the current strategy is yielding satisfactory results, it is reasonable to

assume that an organisation will continue to compete in the same way as it

currently does.

Actions – capabilities. The drivers, assumptions and strategy of an organisation will determine the nature, likelihood and timing of a competitor’s actions.

However, an organisation’s capabilities will determine its ability to initiate or

respond to external forces.

Value chain analysis

Before making a strategic decision, it is important to understand how activities

within the organisation create value for customers. One way to do this is to

conduct a value chain analysis.

Value chain analysis is based on the principle that organisations exist to create

value for their customers. In the analysis, the organisation’s activities are divided

into separate sets of activities that add value. The organisation can more

effectively evaluate its internal capabilities by identifying and examining each of

these activities. Each value adding activity is considered to be a source of

competitive advantage.

Strategic Analysis Tools

Topic Gateway Series

11

The three steps for conducting a value chain analysis are:

1. Separate the organisation’s operations into primary and support

activities. Primary activities are those that physically create a product, as well as market

the product, deliver the product to the customer and provide after-sales

support. Support activities are those that facilitate the primary activities.

2. Allocate cost to each activity. Activity cost information provides managers with valuable insight into the

internal capabilities of an organisation.

3. Identify the activities that are critical to customer’s satisfaction and market success. There are three important considerations in evaluating the role of each activity

in the value chain.

• Company mission. This influences the choice of activities an organisation undertakes.

• Industry type. The nature of the industry influences the relative importance of activities.

• Value system. This includes the value chains of an organisation’s upstream and downstream partners in providing products to end

customers.

Value chain analysis is a comprehensive technique for analysing an organisation’s

source of competitive advantage.

Early warning systems

The purpose of strategic early warning systems is to detect or predict strategically

important events as early as possible. They are often used to identify the first

scene of attack from a competitor or to assess the likelihood of a given scenario

becoming reality.

The seven key components of an early warning system are:

1. Market definition. A clear definition of the scope of the arena to be scrutinised. For example, is the arena a particular geographical region, brand

or market?

2. Open systems. An ability to capture a wide range of information on relevant competitors.

Strategic Analysis Tools

Topic Gateway Series

12

3. Filtering. Information that has been collected on the arena needs to be filtered according to significance. Expert interpretation is required in order to

identify particular events that signify strategic moves or shifts.

4. Predictive intelligence. Using knowledge of the forces driving a competitor to predict which direction they are likely to take. One technique is to build

likely scenarios and actively seek the signals that confirm the scenario. The

predictions need to be assessed for their probability of occurring and

potential impact.

5. Communicating intelligence. Ensuring that the right people in an organisation receive regular briefing on key signals.

6. Contingency planning. Events that have a high potential impact or probability of occurring may merit contingency plans, for example, a change

of strategy or mitigating actions.

7. A cyclical process. The process of scrutinising information for new warning signals should never stop. While the emphasis is on emerging threats and

opportunities, the process should be flexible enough to tackle unexpected

shorter term developments too.

War gaming

War games are a useful technique for identifying competitive vulnerabilities and

misguided internal assumptions about competitors’ strategies.

Simulations of competitive scenarios are used to explore the implications of

changes in strategy in a ‘no risk’ environment. They also encourage new ways of

thinking about the competitive context. War games are often particularly useful

for organisations facing critical strategic decisions.

A typical business war game has the following characteristics:

• an off-site venue

• senior managers representing a cross-functional mix of participants

• two to three full days’ duration

• four or more teams of between four to eight people each. Each team represents either the sponsoring company or one of its competitors

• preparation time in which each team receives a dossier describing the company they are representing, and its strengths and weaknesses

Strategic Analysis Tools

Topic Gateway Series

13

It also has the following characteristics.

• A structure where games comprise several ‘moves’ or decision rounds. Each move consists of a fixed, predetermined amount of time ranging from a

couple of months to several years. During each move, teams make and carry

out strategic decisions. After each move, teams assess their positions relative

to other teams.

• A ‘control team’ of facilitators who serve as the board of directors. They ensure that strategic plans are acceptable and legal. They also facilitate the

debrief, in which participants review the merit of each strategy.

Case studies

The Amway case study on The Times 100 website shows how Amway was able to move its business forward by choosing an appropriate marketing strategy. It

demonstrates the connection between Amway's own strategies and the defining

matrix of strategies developed by Ansoff in 'Strategies for Diversification'

published by Harvard Business Review in 1957. www.thetimes100.co.uk [Accessed 12 February 2008]

The Coursework4you.co.uk website provides a number of case studies which examine strategic analysis models describing PEST analysis, Porter's five forces,

value chain analysis, SWOT analysis and Boston Consulting Group (BCG) matrix

techniques. The validity of the analytical models is evaluated by applying them to

companies such as Diageo, Lastminute.com, Marks and Spencer, Ryanair and

Wal-Mart. www.coursework4you.co.uk/sprtbus53.htm [Accessed 12 February 2008]

The Corporate Strategy Board provides a number of case studies on the use of

strategic analysis tools in companies such as IBM, Procter and Gamble and Shell.

The website is available to registered users only.

www.csb.executiveboard.com/Public/Default.aspx [Accessed 12 February 2008]

Strategic Analysis Tools

Topic Gateway Series

14

References

Articles

Comai, A. and Tena, J. Early warning systems for your competitive landscape.

Society of Competitive Intelligence Professionals, 2007. Volume 10, Number 3,

May-June 2007

Treat, J., Thibault, G. and Asin, A. Dynamic competitive simulation: war gaming

as a strategic tool. Strategy and Business, Second Quarter 1996, pp 46-54

Online articles

BNET Business Directory (2007). Strategic analysis.

http://dictionary.bnet.com/definition/Strategic+Analysis.html [Accessed 12 February 2008]

Boulton, Dr. W.R. (2001). Understanding the strategic analysis model.

www.auburn.edu/~boultwr/index.html [Accessed 12 February 2008]

Businessballs (2006). . PEST market analysis tool

www.businessballs.com/pestanalysisfreetemplate.htm [Accessed 12 February 2008]

Businessballs (2006). Porter’s five forces model.

www.businessballs.com/portersfiveforcesofcompetition.htm [Accessed 12 February 2008]

Mindtools (2007). SWOT analysis: discover new opportunities. Manage and

eliminate threats www.mindtools.com/pages/article/newTMC_05.htm [Accessed 12 February 2008]

Quick MBA (2007). PEST analysis. www.quickmba.com/strategy/pest/ [Accessed 12 February 2008]

Quick MBA (2007). Porter’s five forces.

www.quickmba.com/strategy/porter.shtm [Accessed 12 February 2008]

Skillsoft Corporation (2007). Value chain analysis.

http://rhi.skillport.com/SkillPortFE/login/login.cfm [Accessed 12 February 2008]

Strategic Analysis Tools

Topic Gateway Series

15

Books

Middleton, J. (2003). The ultimate strategy library: the 50 most influential

strategic ideas of all time. Oxford: Capstone

Porter, M.E. (2004). Competitive strategy: techniques for analyzing industries and

competitors. New York; London: Free Press

Porter, M.E. (1998). Competitive advantage: creating and sustaining superior

performance. New York; London: Free Press

Worrell, L. (1998). Strategic analysis: a scientific art. Wolverhampton:

Wolverhampton Business School

Further Information

Websites

The following websites provide a wide range of materials on the topic of

strategic analysis tools.

Businessballs.com

Businessballs.com is a free ethical learning and development resource for people

and organisations. It includes a number of free resources on strategic analysis,

including free materials, exercises, tools and templates.

www.businessballs.com/pestanalysisfreetemplate.htm [Accessed 12 February 2008]

Corporate Strategy Board

Subscription website offering information, case studies and tools on strategic

analysis. www.csb.executiveboard.com/Public/Default.aspx [Accessed 12 February 2008]

Institute for Strategy and Competitiveness (ISC)

Based at Harvard Business School, the ICS is led by Michael Porter and looks at

competition and its implications for company strategy, competitiveness and

solutions to social problems. www.isc.hbs.edu [Accessed 13 February 2008]

Mind Tools

Provides extensive high quality web content, including articles on strategic

analysis topics, which are freely available online. www.mindtools.com [Accessed 13 February 2008]

Strategic Analysis Tools

Topic Gateway Series

QuickMBA

An online knowledge resource for business administration. Topics are presented

as frameworks and summaries on the various subjects of business administration,

including strategic analysis. www.quickmba.com/strategy [Accessed 13 February 2008]

Society of Competitive Intelligence Professionals (SCIP)

SCIP is a global organisation for those involved in the practice of collecting

competitive intelligence. The society produces conferences, ‘Webinars,’ an online

archive of articles related to the field and a quarterly journal. www.scip.org [Accessed 13 February 2008]

Strategy + Business

Online magazine published by the global management and technology

consulting firm, Booz Allen Hamilton. S + B draws on a combination of

journalists, academics, consultants and corporate strategists to contribute articles.

www.strategy-business.com [Accessed 13 February 2008]

16

Copyright ©CIMA 2007

First published in 2007 by:

The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants 26 Chapter Street London SW1P 4NP United Kingdom

Printed in Great Britain

No responsibility for loss occasioned to any person acting or refraining from action as a result of any material in this publication can be accepted by the authors or the publishers.

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means method or device, electronic (whether now or hereafter known or developed), mechanical, photocopying, recorded or otherwise, without the prior permission of the publishers.

Permission requests should be submitted to CIMA at [email protected]

Business and Business Environment/Support/Micro teach - Stakeholders.pptx

Stakeholders

A micro presentation by:

Dalton Vincent

1

Learning outcomes

By the end of this presentation a learner should be able to;

Define stakeholder

Identify and categorise stakeholders

Explain their influence on an organisation

Stakeholders

A Stakeholder is anyone individual or group with an interest in a business. Stakeholders may affect or be affected by the decisions of an organisation.

3

Types of stakeholder

Internal External
Shareholders/owners Pressure groups
Managers Customers
Employees Local community
Competitors
Government

4

Stakeholder interests

Each stakeholder group will have its own expectations of the business.

For example, customers expect good value for money and good quality products and customer service.

What do you think are the expectations of the other stakeholders?

Examples include:

Shareholders/owners – dividends/profit

Employees – job security and fair pay

Managers – the authority to make decisions

Customers – value for money, regular supply of goods

Suppliers – regular orders, to be paid on time

Local community – provision of jobs to local people, the environment to be kept free of pollution

Government – taxes paid, high employment

Competitors – to gain ideas about how to develop their own businesses

Pressure groups – will depend on each pressure group

Financiers – to be repaid with interest in a timely manner

5

Business expectations of stakeholders

Different stakeholders have their own interests and

expectations of a organisation, however, the business will also have expectations of the stakeholders

e.g. Suppliers may be expected to comply with ethical and environmental guidelines set down by the business.

UNDERSTANDING THE INFLUENCE OF EACH STAKEHOLDER

Influence = Power x Interest

The stakeholders with the highest combination of power and interest are likely to be those with the most actual influence over objectives.

Power is the ability to influence

Interest is to do with willingness to act

Keep satisfied Key players
Minimal effort Keep informed

Power

Interest

Low

Low

High

High

UNDERSTANDING THE INFLUENCE OF EACH STAKEHOLDER (MENDELOW’s MATRIX)

Exercise - Primark

The textile manufacture and clothing distribution industry has seen dramatic changes in recent years. Consumers’ expectations are higher today than ever before, they expect fashionable clothing at affordable prices. As a result many clothing retailers, including Primark, source clothes from countries like China, Bangladesh, India and Vietnam where materials and labour costs are lower. Primark works with a variety of manufacturers from around the world to provide consumers with what they want. Identify and explain the influence of

different stakeholders in Primark.

What have you learned?

Definition of stakeholder

Identify and categorise stakeholders

Analyse stakeholders’ influence

As a student of UKCBC Think of why you have student reps who represent your voice in meetings.

Just a thought!!

Business and Business Environment/Support/Organisations_and_business environment(1).pdf

Organisations and management

accounting

About this free course

This free course is an adapted extract from the Open University course B292 Management accounting http://www.open.ac.uk/courses/modules/b292

This version of the content may include video, images and interactive content that may not be optimised for your device.

You can experience this free course as it was originally designed on OpenLearn, the home of free learning from The Open University: www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content- section-0.

There you’ll also be able to track your progress via your activity record, which you can use to demonstrate your learning.

Copyright © 2016 The Open University

Intellectual property

Unless otherwise stated, this resource is released under the terms of the Creative Commons Licence v4.0 http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/4.0/deed.en_GB. Within that The Open University interprets this licence in the following way: www.open.edu/openlearn/about-openlearn/frequently-asked-questions-on-openlearn. Copyright and rights falling outside the terms of the Creative Commons Licence are retained or controlled by The Open University. Please read the full text before using any of the content.

We believe the primary barrier to accessing high-quality educational experiences is cost, which is why we aim to publish as much free content as possible under an open licence. If it proves difficult to release content under our preferred Creative Commons licence (e.g. because we can’t afford or gain the clearances or find suitable alternatives), we will still release the materials for free under a personal end- user licence.

This is because the learning experience will always be the same high quality offering and that should always be seen as positive – even if at times the licensing is different to Creative Commons.

When using the content you must attribute us (The Open University) (the OU) and any identified author in accordance with the terms of the Creative Commons Licence.

The Acknowledgements section is used to list, amongst other things, third party (Proprietary), licensed content which is not subject to Creative Commons licensing. Proprietary content must be used (retained) intact and in context to the content at all times.

The Acknowledgements section is also used to bring to your attention any other Special Restrictions which may apply to the content. For example there may be times when the Creative Commons Non- Commercial Sharealike licence does not apply to any of the content even if owned by us (The Open University). In these instances, unless stated otherwise, the content may be used for personal and non- commercial use.

We have also identified as Proprietary other material included in the content which is not subject to Creative Commons Licence. These are OU logos, trading names and may extend to certain photographic and video images and sound recordings and any other material as may be brought to your attention.

Unauthorised use of any of the content may constitute a breach of the terms and conditions and/or intellectual property laws.

We reserve the right to alter, amend or bring to an end any terms and conditions provided here without notice.

All rights falling outside the terms of the Creative Commons licence are retained or controlled by The Open University.

Head of Intellectual Property, The Open University

2 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Contents Introduction 5 Learning Outcomes 6 1 What is an organisation? 7

1.1 Mintzberg’s five components of organisation 7 1.2 Why do organisations exist? 8 1.3 What types of organisation are there? 9

2 What is organisational structure? 11 2.1 Principles of organisational structure 12 2.2 Tall versus flat organisations 14

3 Forms of organisational structure 16 3.1 Functional structure 16 3.2 Product or service structure 17 3.3 Geographical structure 17 3.4 Matrix structure 18 3.5 Project teams 19 3.6 Hybrid structure 20 3.7 Recent trends in organisational design 21

4 Organisational departments and functions 22 4.1 Typical business organisation departments and functions 22 4.2 The Production function 22 4.3 The Research and Development function 23 4.4 The Purchasing function 24 4.5 The Marketing function 24 4.6 The Human Resources function 26 4.7 The Accounting and Finance function 27

5 Decentralisation and centralisation 27 5.1 Advantages of decentralisation 27 5.2 Disadvantages of decentralisation 28 5.3 Responsibility centres 29 5.4 The divisionalised organisation 31 5.5 Line and staff relationships 31

6 The organisational environment 32 6.1 Political and legal environment 32 6.2 Economic environment 33 6.3 Demographic and social trends impacting on organisations 33 6.4 Sociological factors 34 6.5 Technology and its impact 36

Conclusion 37 Keep on learning 37 Glossary 38

3 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

References 42 Acknowledgements 43

4 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Introduction Management accounting is concerned with providing information and analysis to managers to help them plan, evaluate and control activities, in order to achieve an organisation’s objectives. Whereas financial accounting is concerned with reporting on the past financial performance of an organisation, management accounting is essentially concerned with improving its future performance. In order to understand the concepts and principles of management accounting it is necessary first to have some appreciation of what managers do! This, in turn, requires an understanding of the organisations in which managers work – and of the external environment in which these organisations exist and operate. This OpenLearn free course, therefore, looks at the nature of organisations, specifically their objectives and structure. Organisational objectives and structure are key elements of organisations and they determine management functions and responsibilities within the organisation. The course also considers the main environmental factors (economic, social, political, legal and technological) that impact on organisational behaviour. This OpenLearn course is an adapted extract from the Open University course B292 Management accounting. Tell us what you think! We’d love to hear from you to help us improve our free learning offering through OpenLearn by filling out this short survey.

Introduction

5 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Learning Outcomes After studying this course, you should be able to: l understand the nature and purpose of different types of organisations (commercial, voluntary, public sector and

so on) l describe the different ways in which organisations may be structured l understand basic concepts of organisational structure l describe the main departments or functions of a business organisation l explain the advantages and disadvantages of centralised and decentralised organisations.

1 What is an organisation? An ‘organisation’ is a group of individuals working together to achieve one or more objectives. Although organisations have been defined differently by different theorists, virtually all definitions refer to five common features:

1 they are composed of individuals and groups of individuals 2 they are oriented towards achieving collective goals 3 they consist of different functions 4 the functions need to be coordinated 5 they exist independently of individual members who may come and go.

1.1 Mintzberg’s five components of organisation Mintzberg (1979, p. 24) suggested that all organisations consist of five components, as shown in Figure 1.

Figure 1 Mintzberg’s five parts of the organisation

At the top of the organisation is a Strategic apex the purpose of which is to ensure the organisation follows its mission and manages its relationship with its environment. The

1 What is an organisation?

7 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

individuals comprising the apex, for example, the Chief Executive Officer (CEO), are responsible to owners, government agencies, unions, communities and so on. Below the apex is the Middle line, a group of managers who are concerned with converting the objectives and broad plans of the Strategic apex into operational plans that can be carried out by the workers. As organisations grow and become more complex, they usually develop a separate group of people who are concerned with the best way of doing a job, specifying output criteria (e.g., quality standards) and ensuring that personnel have appropriate skills (e.g., by organising training programmes). This group of analysts is referred to by Mintzberg as the Technostructure. The organisation also adds other administrative functions that provide services to itself, for example legal advice, public relations, mailroom, cafeteria and so on. These are the Support staff. Finally, at the bottom of the organisation, is the Operating core. These are the people who do the basic work of producing the products or delivering the services. Mintzberg’s generic organisational model also illustrates an important principle of organisation structure: the separation of direction and management, whereby those people who decide the mission and general direction of the organisation are different (other than in a very small organisation) from those who handle the implementation of plans and subsequent controlling of operations to ensure that objectives are met. Senior managers (the Strategic apex) will establish long-term organisational objectives and policies through which goals are to be achieved. Middle managers (the Middle line) will be responsible for translating the necessarily broad and general strategic plans into detailed action plans, specifying managerial responsibilities for particular tasks and how resources are to be allocated. These middle managers will also be responsible for monitoring activities and taking action to ensure that resources are being used efficiently and effectively to achieve organisational objectives.

Efficiency refers to the relationship between inputs and outputs. An activity or process is efficient, if it produces a given output with the minimum of inputs necessary. Effectiveness refers to the extent to which goals/objectives are actually achieved.

Other important principles of organisational structure are discussed later in Sections 2 and 3.

1.2 Why do organisations exist? Organisations exist because groups of people working together can achieve more than the sum of the achievements which the individuals in the organisation could produce when working separately. For example, one person might struggle all day to carry a piano upstairs, whereas a team of four people, each taking one corner, may need to put in much less than a quarter of the effort of one person to complete the task (Coates et al., 1996, p. 19). Although such cooperation is beneficial, if individuals pull in different directions, the result is counter-productive. Thus coordination is necessary and this is a fundamental role of management, as will be discussed in a later section of this session. It can also be argued that organisations exist as a result of the impact of transaction costs, because they can arrange transactions between their different parts at a lower total cost than that available in the open market. In crude terms, it may be cheaper to make or do something ‘in house’ because this cuts out the time consuming process of negotiating

1 What is an organisation?

8 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

terms – and renegotiating them every time your requirements change. Before the Industrial Age, it was common for artisans/craftsmen to work individually from home, producing various products, which merchants would purchase from these individuals and sell to consumers. All transactions were conducted through market exchange without the need for formal organisations. As economic development gained pace, however, it became clear that it was more efficient to organise production internally within a firm rather than undertake each transaction externally through the market. The latter process involved substantial costs in terms of time that had to be spent investigating suppliers, detailing specifications, negotiating/renegotiating contracts, checking that agreed terms had been met and so on.

1.3 What types of organisation are there? Organisations can be classified in different ways. One way is according to their over- arching purpose, or primary objective. Broadly, organisations may be classified as ‘for- profit’ (i.e., commercial) or ‘not-for-profit’ entities. ‘For-profit’ (commercial) organisa- tions may have several different objectives. For a very long time, it was generally accepted that maximising the wealth of the owners and continuing in existence were the primary objectives of profit seeking organisations. However, as organisations also aim, for example, to provide goods and services to customers and employment to employees, it is perhaps more reasonable to suggest that increasing, rather than maximising the wealth of owners, is a more fitting objective. ‘Not-for–profit’ organisations comprise a large variety of organisations including charities, clubs, cooperative firms/social enterprises and public sector organisations. Public sector organisations are owned, funded and run by central or local government. They include:

l public hospitals l the armed forces (military) l most schools and universities l government departments.

These organisations exist to provide services which, for various reasons, it is considered impractical or undesirable for the commercial sector to provide. Whereas commercial organisations, charities and social enterprises must generate sufficient funds from their activities to sustain themselves on a continuing basis, public sector organisations are funded by government. Nevertheless, constraints on government expenditure mean that resources are limited. Consequently, economic scarcity requires that virtually all organisations be run effectively and efficiently. As a result, many of the management principles employed by the commercial sector are also employed in the not- for-profit sector, requiring extensive use of management accounting in all sectors. A traditional view of differences between sectors is illustrated in Figure 2. However, these distinctions are becoming blurred, as indicated by the overlapping circles. Commercial organisations are increasingly pursuing social responsibility objectives, while not-for- profit organisations are increasingly adopting commercial criteria to ensure the sound financial management of scarce resources.

Maximisation of shareholder value has long been the publicly stated objective of most business enterprises. It is likely, however, partly as a result of the global financial crises

1 What is an organisation?

9 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

that began in 2008, that the publicly stated objectives will be expanded to embrace more stakeholders, such as employees and the local community.

Figure 2 Organisations highlighting differences between sectors

Activity 1 Think of an organisation that you know well.

l In which sector or sectors from Figure 2 do you feel your organisation most comfortably fits?

l Which factors (profit, accountability, commitment) exert pressure on it or influence its objectives?

1 What is an organisation?

10 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Provide your answer...

Discussion You may have decided that your organisation sits clearly inside one of the circles or, more likely, you will have sited it in an intermediate position – operating for commercial purposes, but anxious to satisfy other criteria such as accountability to a wider public. For example, there has been a rise in the number of investment companies which use not only financial but also ethical criteria to decide in which organisations to invest. Such criteria could include the environmental impact of the production processes used by the companies in question, or the working conditions and wages of their employees. Another example of the mixture of the pressures that can affect organisations could be taken from the social care sector: a organisation in this sector might be keen to provide an excellent service to local people, but it could also have to operate on commercial principles in managing costs in order to compete with more cost effective providers.

2 What is organisational structure? The term organisational structure refers to the relationships between the various functions and positions in an organisation. Structure determines authority and responsibility for particular tasks/activities. It also specifies the routes of communication between different parts of the organisation. Organisational structure therefore has important implications for the design of management accounting systems. For example, some organisations are highly decentralised, with decision making authority delegated to relatively junior managers at lower levels in the organisational hierarchy. In this case, a major role of the organisation’s management accounting system will be to monitor the outcomes and provide feedback to senior managers about the performance of those who have the decision making authority. Such a role will not be necessary in a highly centralised organisation, where senior managers make all the important decisions.

Theories of organisational structure With the emergence of large industrial enterprises in the nineteenth century, management theorists began to consider how organisations should be designed and managed. As you will read later in this session, early organisational theorists such as Henri Fayol (1949) attempted to derive universal prescriptions for the optimal design of organisations. More recently, theorists have emphasised the contingent nature of optimal organisational design – depending on variables such as size, production technology, degree of stability in the organisation’s business environment, nature of competition in the industry and so on. These factors are assumed to influence, for example, whether organisations are ‘tall’ or ‘flat’, centralised or decentralised in terms of decision making and so on. (These terms are discussed later.)

Ultimately, organisational structure is a means of influencing and controlling the behaviour of the individuals who work in the organisation. Structure is used to assign authority and responsibility to individuals and hold them accountable for the achievement of specific tasks or objectives (Emmanuel et al., 1990, p. 38). Management accounting is an

2 What is organisational structure?

11 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

important part of this process as it provides managers with the information to carry out the various activities for which they are responsible. It also measures and monitors their performance to ensure that the organisation achieves its objectives.

A good example of a management accounting technique employed widely for organisational planning and control purposes is budgeting.

The sort of information managers need to undertake various activities and the way their performance is measured/monitored will depend on the way in which the organisation is structured.

2.1 Principles of organisational structure Certain principles are basic to the operation of any organisation:

Specialisation The work of the organisation is divided up into separate activities or tasks and particular individuals concentrate on specific tasks or activities. This enables the application of specialised knowledge and so improves organisational efficiency and effectiveness.

Coordination If an organisation’s activities are to be separated into different areas or operations, it will be necessary to ensure that the various actions are coordinated, that is, consistent with each other and working towards the same organisational objectives. This is a very important task of management. The management hierarchy or ‘chain of command’ facilitates the coordination of various departments and their activities.

Management principles of the hierarchy of authority Management theorists (notably Henri Fayol, 1949) have, over the years, developed several principles relating to the hierarchy of authority for coordinating activities. Some of the most important are:

l Unity of Command. Every person should receive orders and be accountable to one and only one superior. If people receive orders from more than one superior, conflict and confusion may well result.

l The Scalar Chain. There should be a clear line of authority from top to bottom, linking all managers at all levels.

l The Responsibility and Authority Principle. If an organisational member is allocated responsibility, then that person should also be given the necessary authority to carry out the tasks necessary – including the right to ask other people to undertake particular tasks. A manager should not be given responsibility without the necessary authority, but conversely delegation of authority implies responsibility and the need for accountability.

2 What is organisational structure?

12 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Span of control refers to the number of subordinates directly reporting to a manager or supervisor.

l Span of Control. There is a limit to the number of activities or people that can be supervised effectively by one person. What constitutes an effective span of control will be determined by a number of factors, including:

l the similarity of tasks/functions undertaken (the more similar, the greater the potential effective span of control)

l the proximity of the tasks to each other and to the supervisor (the closer the proximity, the greater the potential effective span of control)

l the complexity of the tasks (the more complex, the smaller the potential effective span of control)

l the direction and control needed by subordinates (the more direction and control needed, the smaller the potential effective span of control).

Activity 2 Consider the organisation where you (or a close friend or relative) work or have worked.

l What is the span of control of your immediate manager? l What is the span of control of her or his manager? l Do you think they are appropriate, bearing in mind the ability of either person to

monitor what is going on in the organisation?

Provide your answer...

Discussion The appropriateness of a span of control may depend on the extent of the delegation that can be exercised by managers (i.e., entrusting the responsibility for tasks to someone else) and also on reporting mechanisms within the organisation. Many organisations have introduced systems of regular meetings between managers and staff at which SMART objectives are set and monitored. SMART objectives are:

l Specific l Measurable l Achievable l Realistic l Time-bound (i.e., have a defined time scale associated with their achievement).

If objectives are SMART, managers should be able to tell whether or not they have been achieved. The appropriateness of the span of control will then be related to the number of people who can realistically be monitored in this way and the frequency with which monitoring takes place.

2 What is organisational structure?

13 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

2.2 Tall versus flat organisations Where there is a large number of levels in the management hierarchy, the organisation is said to be ‘tall’. This will tend to result in narrow spans of control. Where there is a small number of levels in the hierarchy, the organisation is said to be ‘flat’. Flat organisations will tend to have wide spans of control. Figure 3 shows a comparison of tall and flat organisation structures.

Figure 3 Tall and flat organisations

In recent years, there has been a trend towards delayering, whereby tall organisations have tended to become flat organisations by the removal of various levels in the hierarchy. This has been facilitated by:

(a) Information technology, which has reduced the need for many middle management jobs, which were largely concerned with processing information to facilitate control within the organisational hierarchy.

(b) The management philosophy of empowerment, whereby people at lower levels have been delegated authority to take actions and make decisions which would previously have been the domain of middle managers

Changes in organisation structures have led to changes in approach to management and vice versa.

The advantages of delayering are:

(a) A significant reduction in costs as middle managers’ salary costs are removed. (b) Increased motivation as people at lower levels are given power/discretion to make

decisions. Improved performance is likely to be a consequence of increased motivation.

2 What is organisational structure?

14 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

(c) Improved, faster communication between senior management and operational levels – increasingly important in a faster changing, more uncertain and increasingly competitive external environment.

There are also disadvantages to delayering, the principal one being a possible loss of control. Middle managers are often necessary to translate the inevitably broad and general plans of senior management into operational plans and actions that can be implemented. Senior managers may have only a hazy understanding of what is going on at the operational level and much is thereby entrusted to relatively junior people (Coates et al., 1996, p. 116).

Activity 3

l How will a tall organisational structure, in contrast with a flat one, impact on the span of control and the speed of information flows through the organisation?

l What do you think are the advantages and disadvantages of flat organisations?

Provide your answer...

Discussion In tall organisations, managers have smaller spans of control (i.e., fewer people reporting directly to them). This reduces the number of people they have to manage, but means it takes longer for information to travel through the layers of the organisation. In flat organisations, the opposite is true: communication can be quicker because of fewer layers, but the spans of control are larger. In recent years, tall organisations have tended to be associated with large bureaucracies. Communication will be formal and middle managers may be in a position to use information as a device to retain control. On the other hand, smaller spans of control may mean that managers have more time to manage. Furthermore, there are more explicit career paths, with opportunities for promotion. In flat organisations, the opposite is true: communication can be quicker because of fewer layers, but the spans of control are larger. In recent years, tall organisations have tended to be associated with large bureaucracies. Communication will be formal and middle managers may be in a position to use information as a device to retain control. On the other hand, smaller spans of control may mean that managers have more time to manage. Furthermore, there are more explicit career paths, with opportunities for promotion. Flat organisations have developed because there is a belief that communication is impaired by additional levels of management. Flatter organisations are thought to be able to react to change more quickly. Managers may be forced to delegate if their span of control is enlarged. This can be motivating for those to whom work is delegated. On the other hand, career paths are less explicit: employees may have to look sideways or even outside the organisation for career development opportunities.

2 What is organisational structure?

15 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

3 Forms of organisational structure It is no easy task to design and develop a structure. Many organisations continuously debate whether to structure around products, geography, common tasks or information. It is, however, possible to distinguish six important forms of organisational structure:

1 functional structure 2 product or service structure 3 geographical structure 4 matrix structure 5 project team 6 hybrid structure

Each of these forms is now explained in turn.

3.1 Functional structure As you can see from Figure 4, in a functional structure people are grouped according to the type of job they do.

Figure 4 A functional structure

This structure may be appropriate when people within functional departments need to communicate regularly with each other. For example, in a marketing department, the marketing director will coordinate the activities of marketing specialists in fields such as promotion, advertising, product design, market research, and packaging. Although there is a need for communication with all the other parts of the company, the bulk of the information exchange and communication is likely to be within the functional areas, so it makes sense to group these people together. Functional structures, however, can have disadvantages.

l Career paths tend to develop through functions and this can reduce managers’ awareness of other issues facing the organisation. The organisation will not develop many generalists this way (e.g., people who know about marketing and operations or finance and HR). This will expose the organisation to significant risks, as managers will not have an overview of its operations.

l Staff may work for the benefit of their department and not the organisation as a whole.

3 Forms of organisational structure

16 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l Many members of staff may never meet an external customer and may not therefore have a customer service orientation.

3.2 Product or service structure

Figure 5 Product and service structures

At first glance this looks similar to the functional structure, but here staff members are grouped together on product or service lines. This very often happens in larger organisations. For example, a big accountancy firm may group staff by the industry served or a public education department may group staff around different areas of work (e.g., pre- school children, primary, secondary and special needs). Each product or service group will have its own production and service people and also its own accounting and personnel staff. A product or service structure can be more responsive to customer needs and better at motivating staff. However, there is a danger of creating independent units, which can be difficult to manage as they assume the attitude, ‘we know what the customer wants, so stop interfering!’. It can also mean that professional expertise becomes fragmented. For example, if each product line has its own small accounting team (perhaps just one person) this may reduce career opportunities for specialists.

3.3 Geographical structure

3 Forms of organisational structure

17 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 6 A geographical structure

A variation on the product or service structure is to group staff by physical location – for example, by region, country or continent. This has advantages for international organisations because there are likely to be big differences in markets, languages and cultures. National issues are usually best identified locally. However, there are several disadvantages to structuring by location:

l information flows between staff in different locations can be costly and problematic l there may be duplication of activities, typically, support functions such as accounting,

human resources and information technology l it may be difficult to achieve integrated strategies across a number of different

countries.

3.4 Matrix structure We have seen that functional, product or service, and geographical structures all have disadvantages. In a matrix structure, each person has two reporting lines: (i) to the functional head; and (ii) to a project, product, service or region manager. These dual reporting lines are permanent. Advocates of matrix structures believe that they combine the advantages of both functional and product or service structures. Figure 7 is an example of a matrix structure.

Figure 7 An example of how a matrix structure might work

In Figure 7, there is a Finance function and everyone in it will report to the Finance Director. However, each product (1, 2, 3, 4) will have its own independent finance team who also will report to the relevant product or service manager. Hence each group has two people to whom they report – a functional manager and a product/service manager. There are, however, problems associated with a matrix structure. First, heads of reporting lines may need to meet regularly to decide how to apportion each person’s time. What

3 Forms of organisational structure

18 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

happens if the Finance Director and the Service 1 manager disagree about what the Service 1 finance team should be doing? Staff may feel uncomfortable with the change and uncertainty implicit in a matrix structure. In practice, matrix structures can be very difficult to manage. Dual reporting can lead to conflict, confusion, and overlapping responsibilities. This can then result in loss of accountability. There could be a number of people who are responsible if Service 1 budgets are delivered late. The person responsible could be the Finance Director who changed the format, or the Service 1 manager who would not agree a sales budget, or the Service 1 finance team who took advantage of the conflict between the Finance Director and the Service 1 manager to get more time to do the task. Matrix structures can suffer from low responsiveness, slow decision making and high levels of internal political conflict. On the other hand, they can offer a way of forcing people to work flexibly across functional boundaries (which can result in some productivity benefits for the organisation and outweigh the potential disadvantages). Organisations such as Texas Instruments, Shell, NASA, NCR, ITT and Monsanto Chemical have attributed some of their success to the matrix structure, which, in their opinion, helped them respond rapidly to customers’ needs.

3.5 Project teams Some organisations carry out the bulk of their work through project teams, which are often set up to react to changing circumstances and allow the organisation to respond quickly. They are an example of what are called organic structures, as distinct from the mechanistic structures that have been described so far. Project teams draw staff from across the organisation, seconded on a full or part time basis. The latter can be very stressful for the individual, who effectively gets two jobs usually for the life of the project. An example of how this might work can be seen in Figure 8. This looks very like the matrix structure you have just looked at – and in a way it is. Clearly, those serving on project teams also have two reporting lines: to their functional head and to the project manager. The main difference is that the project teams are not permanent groupings like the Service 1, 2, 3, 4 groupings we saw in the matrix structure in Figure 7. Instead, these project teams only last as long as the projects on which they are working. This can lead to problems of control but, on the other hand, it can generate a tremendous sense of excitement as project goals are achieved. Also, fast moving changes can be implemented as a result of the flexibility and speed of response that this sort of structure can give an organisation.

3 Forms of organisational structure

19 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 8 An example of project teams working across a functionally structured organisation

3.6 Hybrid structure In practice, organisations evolve and changes to their structure should occur as and when necessary. This evolutionary process can produce structures that are well adapted to meeting the particular needs of the moment. A hybrid (mixture) of functional and product or service structures is common, and Figure 9 illustrates how this might look. Here we see that the sales function is structured along product lines.

3 Forms of organisational structure

20 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 9 The organisational structure of a department store as a typical hybrid of product and function.

A hybrid structure might include functional departments, the work of which is primarily internal (e.g., finance and HR), with the rest of the company organised on a product, service, geographic or project basis, as required to meet best the needs of the customer (as in Figure 9).

3.7 Recent trends in organisational design In response to a dynamic, fast changing and competitive environment, flexibility and speed of decision making have become increasingly important in modern organisations. This has led to a number of trends in recent years:

1 The flattening of structures to remove levels in the organisational hierarchy. This shortens the chain of command and thereby increases the speed of decision making.

2 The establishment of multi-functional project teams and an empowered, multi-skilled workforce to increase flexibility.

3 A customer service orientation rather than an inward, internal process orientation. 4 The emergence of the ‘flexible firm’. In an increasingly competitive environment,

continuous reduction of costs is essential. Organisations have responded by replacing full time, permanent, salaried staff with temporary and part time contract labour. This allows greater flexibility, as labour can be readily taken on/laid off as demand conditions fluctuate. It also provides substantial savings in pension, health insurance and holiday pay costs. Such organisations consist of a small core of permanent full time salaried professional staff, who organise and direct the

3 Forms of organisational structure

21 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

organisation’s affairs, supplemented by various levels of contract staff. Some of these will be professionals contracted for particular projects, but the majority are likely to be the flexible workforce that carries out the routine operations of the organisation.

4 Organisational departments and functions Business organisations typically consist of a number of departments or functions and it is important to have an appreciation of the purpose and activities of these departments/ functions in order to understand the role of management accounting in the organisation. After all, management accounting is concerned with providing managers at all levels with information to help them undertake their various activities and to monitor/report on the impact of these activities on the organisation. A well designed management accounting system must be based on an understanding of what various managers actually do.

Management accountants are increasingly acting as ‘business partners’ to teams in other functional areas of the organisation. If they are to be accepted within these decision making teams, it is essential they understand the operations and technology of the organisation.

4.1 Typical business organisation departments and functions A typical business organisation may consist of the following main departments or functions:

l Production l Research and Development (often abbreviated to R&D) l Purchasing l Marketing (including the selling function) l Human Resource Management l Accounting and Finance.

4.2 The Production function The Production function undertakes the activities necessary to provide the organisation’s products or services. Its main responsibilities are:

l production planning and scheduling l control and supervision of the production workforce

4 Organisational departments and functions

22 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l managing product quality (including process control and monitoring l maintenance of plant and equipment l control of inventory l deciding the best production methods and factory layout.

Close collaboration will usually be necessary between Production and various other functions within the organisation, for example:

l Research and Development, concerning the implications of product design for production methods and cost

l Marketing, concerning desired product functionality, appearance, quality, durability and so on

l Finance, concerning the availability of funds for purchase of new equipment and the acceptability of inventory levels.

l Human Resource Management, concerning staff motivation implications of job design and production methods.

Service organisations Although many of the principles of good management in a manufacturing environment also apply in organisations that provide services (rather than manufacture products), service businesses, such as banking and professional firms of accountants and solicitors, do have a number of distinctive features which have implications for how they are managed.

1 Services are less easily standardised than manufactured products and so service quality tends to be more variable. This makes human resource management and motivation more critical.

2 Services are often ‘intangible’ (i.e., something that cannot be precisely measured or assessed) and multi-dimensional – what exactly is the ‘service’ being offered by a bank, a private hospital or educational establishment? This can make attracting customers more difficult as it often depends on promoting an intangible item.

3 Unlike manufactured products, services cannot be stored, but must be consumed as they are produced or they are wasted. This creates additional problems matching productive capacity with customer demand. This is reflected in, for example, the common practice of commercial airlines offering very cheap flights based on marginal cost to fill empty seats – a plane flying empty to New York is a service provided but wasted!

4 Ascertaining the cost of individual services is often also problematic, as the cost structure of many service businesses is such that costs are often shared among different services. This makes, among other things, pricing and the analysis of profitability of different services more difficult than with most manufactured goods.

4.3 The Research and Development function The Research and Development (R&D) function is concerned with developing new products or processes and improving existing products/processes. R&D activities must be

4 Organisational departments and functions

23 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

closely coordinated with the organisation’s marketing activities to ensure that the organisation is providing exactly what its customers want in the most efficient, effective and economical way.

4.4 The Purchasing function The Purchasing function is concerned with acquiring goods and services for use by the organisation. These will include, for example, raw materials and components for manufacturing and also production equipment. The responsibilities of this function usually extend to buying goods and services for the entire organisation (not just the Production function), including, for example, office equipment, furniture, computer equipment and stationery. In buying goods and services, purchasing managers must take into account a number of factors – collectively referred to as ‘the Purchasing Mix’, namely, Quantity, Quality, Price and Delivery.

l Quantity. Buying in large quantities can attract price discounts and prevent inventory running out. On the other hand, there are substantial costs involved in carrying a high level of inventory.

l Quality. There will usually be a trade-off between price and quality in acquiring goods and services. Consequently, Production, R&D and Marketing Functions will need to be consulted to determine an acceptable level of quality which will depend on how important quality is as an attribute of the final product or service of the organisation.

l Price. Other things being equal, the purchasing manager will look for the best price deal when procuring goods and services, although price must be considered in conjunction with quality and supplier reliability, in order to achieve best value, rather than lowest price only.

l Delivery. The time between placing an order and receiving the goods or services, the lead time, can be critical for production planning and scheduling and also has implications for inventory control. Suppliers must therefore be evaluated in terms of their reliability and capability for on time delivery.

In short, the ‘purchasing mix’ can be considered as making sure that the organisation has the right amount, of the right quality, at the right price, in the right place at the right time!

4.5 The Marketing function Marketing is concerned with identifying and satisfying customers needs at the right price. Marketing involves researching what customers want and analysing how the organisation can satisfy these wants. Marketing activities range from the ‘strategic’, concerned with the choice of product markets (and how to compete in them, for example, on price or product differentiation) to the operational, arranging sales promotions (e.g., offering a 25 per cent discount), producing literature such as product catalogues and brochures, placing advertisements in the appropriate media and so on. A fundamental activity in marketing is managing the Marketing Mix consisting of the ‘4Ps’: Product, Price, Promotion and Place.

l Product. Having the right product in terms of benefits that customers value. l Price. Setting the right price which is consistent with potential customers’ perception

of the value offered by the product.

4 Organisational departments and functions

24 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l Promotion. Promoting the product in a way which creates maximum customer awareness and persuades potential customers to make the decision to purchase the product.

l Place. Making the product available in the right place at the right time – including choosing appropriate distribution channels.

In order to be successful, a business enterprise must either have a lower price than its competitors, or a product that is in some way superior – or both! A competitive strategy based on low price is known as a cost leadership strategy. A competitive strategy based on developing a superior product is known as a differentiation strategy.

The historical evolution of marketing Several writers (e.g., Harrison, 1978) have argued (and it is now widely accepted among management theorists and practitioners) that there have been three distinct eras in the history of advanced capitalist countries, such as the UK, which have affected the status, role and responsibilities of the Marketing function. These were:

1 The Production Era (pre–1930). This refers to a period of time during which products (and services) were relatively scarce (thereby constraining consumer choice) and the most important function of business was that of production. Marketing, in so far as it existed, was considered the least important function.

2 The Sales Era (1930–50). This refers to an era characterised by a shift in emphasis of business management from the production function to that of selling. With continued industrial development and innovations, many new consumer oriented products became available and a much more competitive selling environment resulted. This made it necessary to seek out customers and make significant use of advertising, promotion and personal selling.

3 The Marketing Era (1950–present). This period marked another significant change in the attitude of senior management towards the status and responsibilities of marketing. This change, referred to by many writers as the Marketing Concept (Kotler, 1967), meant a departure from the previous concept of marketing as being the sales function of a business, to one where marketing had a much greater responsibility in total company policy formation and operation. Under the Marketing Concept, marketing was placed at the beginning of the process of determining the products (services) which were needed by the market, the price at which they should be sold and the way in which they were to be distributed.

4 Organisational departments and functions

25 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 10 ‘We produce an inferior line of goods. That’s why we’re looking for a real first class marketing man.’

4.6 The Human Resources function The Human Resources function is concerned with the following:

l Recruitment and selection. Ensuring that the right people are recruited to the right jobs.

l Training and development. Enabling employees to carry out their responsibilities effectively and make use of their potential.

l Employee relations. Including negotiations over pay and conditions. l Grievance procedures and disciplinary matters. Dealing with complaints from

employees or from the employer. l Health and Safety matters Making sure employees work in a healthy and safe

environment. l Redundancy procedures Administering a proper system that is seen to be fair to all

concerned when deciding on redundancies and agreeing redundancy payments.

Organisations are dependent on their employees. Consequently, their recruitment and selection require careful management.

In recent years, the Human Resources function has attained a more important status as there has developed an increasing need (especially in service organisations) to ‘get the most’ from employees, in terms of customer service, for the benefit of the organisation.

4 Organisational departments and functions

26 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

4.7 The Accounting and Finance function The Accounting and Finance function is concerned with the following:

l Financial record keeping of transactions involving monetary inflows or outflows. l Preparing financial statements (the income statement, balance sheet and cash

flow statement) for reporting to external parties such as shareholders. The financial statements are also the starting point for calculating any tax due on business profits.

l Payroll administration Paying wages and salaries and maintaining appropriate income tax and national insurance records.

l Preparing management accounting information and analysis to help managers to plan, control and make decisions.

5 Decentralisation and centralisation Centralisation describes a situation where decision making authority is held predomi- nantly by senior managers within an organisation. Such a situation is common within smaller businesses where the owner/manager takes all the important decisions. Centralisation, however, is not only found in such organisations, as a number of very large organisations, such as banks and some large retailers, are also highly centralised. Little, if any, discretion is given to branch managers, who must simply run their branches in accordance with the procedures established by Head Office. Decentralisation describes the situation where the authority to make decisions is delegated to people at lower levels of the organisation. This often occurs where growth in size and increased complexity make the delegation of significant decision making authority necessary. Decentralisation is a matter of degree and is usually present to varying degrees in most organisations.

Effective delegation has benefits for managers, staff and the organisation as a whole.

5.1 Advantages of decentralisation Coates et al. (1996, pp. 115–6) identify the advantages of decentralisation as follows:

l Specialisation. Managers can develop more detailed and specialised knowledge by concentrating on a limited aspect of the organisation’s operations. This should result in better quality decisions.

l Timeliness. Quicker decisions are possible if it is not necessary to pass decisions up through the hierarchical chain of command. In addition, senior managers’ time is then available for more important decisions affecting the future of the whole organisation.

l Motivation. Having authority to make decisions usually results in greater motivation and commitment and hence improved performance.

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

27 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l Human resource development. Less experienced managers can ‘learn their trade’ without their mistakes jeopardising the entire organisation. The impact of mistakes/ misjudgements is likely to be confined to a limited aspect of the organisation’s operations.

l Organisational segment performance comparison. By dividing the organisation into separate segments, it is possible to evaluate which aspects of operations are performing well and which are not – something not usually possible when the inputs/ outputs are at a more aggregate level.

5.2 Disadvantages of decentralisation Coates et al. (1996, pp. 115–6) also identify the disadvantages of decentralisation as follows:

l Dysfunctional decision making. This occurs where managers take actions which improve the measured performance of their organisational segment, but damage the organisation as a whole. For example, a manager in one department may keep costs down in his/her own department in ways which have an impact on the quality of service provided to other departments.

l Loss of control. There is a danger that senior management may lose control of the organisation, as they become far removed from the detail of underlying operations and unaware of the decisions being made by lower level managers.

l Increased cost of control. Costly management information systems may be necessary to monitor the performance of lower management levels to ensure that delegated decision making authority is being used in the best interests of the organisation.

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

28 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 11 ‘In the interest of overcoming my reluctance to delegate, starting Monday I want you to do all of my worrying for me.’

5.3 Responsibility centres Decentralisation results in the creation of separate responsibility centres – aspects/ areas of the organisation’s operations for which a particular manager is responsible. The main types of responsibility centre in common use are as follows. Cost centre. The manager is assumed to be able to influence significantly the level of cost incurred and will be judged according to how well costs are controlled. There may or may not be revenues associated with the particular aspect of operations concerned, but if there are, the manager is assumed to have no control over these. Managers of cost centres will need regular information to be provided by the accounting system, concerning how individual cost items compare with budget – that is, budget variance and, of course, budgetary planning information, for example, cost targets to be achieved. Revenue centre. The manager is assumed to be able to influence significantly the level of revenue earned and will be judged on the basis of this. Revenue centres are principally intended to be applied to sales operations, where the manager’s responsibilities relate to the generation of income, whether or not there are attributable costs. Managers will need information concerning targets for individual revenue generating units (e.g., products), and also regular feedback information on actual versus budgeted revenues. Profit centre. The manager is assumed to be able to influence significantly both costs and revenues and is judged on the basis of the level of profit generated by the particular aspect of operations concerned. The term profit centre is usually limited to the situation where the manager does not have responsibility for the level of investment in the centre (this decision being made by more senior management). Managers need information concerning both revenues and costs, for example, which products/services are profitable.

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

29 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Investment centre. This is a type of profit centre, but one for which the manager also has significant influence over investment decisions. In such cases, it would be expected that, in addition to the normal profit centre measures (e.g., Return on Sales), profit would be related to the capital invested (e.g., Return on Investment). Managers need the same information as for profit centres and in addition, detailed appraisals of potential investments and control information concerning the level of investment (e.g., working capital levels, namely, inventory, receivables and payables) at any particular point in time.

Activity 4 What do you think would be the appropriate type of responsibility centre for each of the following functions/departments?

l A marketing department l A research and development department l A machinery service and repair department of a factory l The German manufacturing and distribution division of a large multinational

company l A regional sales office of a US company

How would you measure the performance of the manager/s of each centre?

Provide your answer...

Discussion In some organisations, which are departmentalised on the basis of product groups, each product group department will have its own marketing activities. Where, however, an organisation is departmentalised on a functional basis and has a separate marketing department serving all its product groups, this department will incur expenditure on behalf of the whole organisation, but will not have its own revenues. It is likely then to be a cost centre. The same is true of a research and development and a service and repairs department. Research and development is difficult to measure, but this is attempted in many firms by use of such measures as number of patents registered, percentage of sales from recently introduced products and so on. The German manufacturing division of a large multinational company is likely to earn revenues (the level of which it can presumably influence) and incur costs (the level of which it can also influence). It is likely to be a profit centre, or even an investment centre. A regional sales office is likely to be able to influence the level of revenue generated, but the main elements of cost (e.g., sales personnel salaries) are likely to be the result of decisions made by more senior (Head Office) managers. It is likely to be a revenue centre. Responsibility centres should be evaluated according to financial performance (comparison of budgeted and actual costs, revenues and profits as appropriate). It will probably be desirable also to measure various non-financial indicators that are important for each centre achieving its goals – for example, in the case of the service and repairs department, average response time for machine breakdowns, and in the

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

30 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

case of the research and development department, the number of new product or process innovations, and so on.

5.4 The divisionalised organisation The ultimate form of decentralisation occurs when an organisation is separated into a number of investment centres that operate almost as independent businesses, each with its own profit responsibility. The basis of divisionalisation may be according to product (or service), geographical area and so on. Such a divisional structure is illustrated by the common legal form of groups with subsidiary companies. Each division in the organisation will typically have its own functional structure.

5.5 Line and staff relationships The existence of an organisational structure implies that authority and control are exercised from above and pass down through the hierarchy. The relationships that result are known as line relationships. In any organisation, there should be a clear line of authority and responsibility from the top to the bottom of the hierarchy: the ‘scalar chain’ which indicates the line relationships. By contrast, staff relationships exist when a manager gives/receives advice from another organisational member. For example, the Accounting and Finance manager will provide information and analysis to help the Marketing and Production managers make decisions and control their respective operations.

Activity 5 This activity draws together some important ideas you have considered concerning organisation structure. Consider the organisation in which you work, or one with which you are familiar. (Focus on the part of the organisation with which you are most familiar.)

l What is the span of control? l How many layers or levels of management are there? Is your organisation tall or

flat? l Is authority centralised or decentralised? l How clear is the definition of jobs? Do some of them overlap? l To how many people do employees report? Are there single or dual lines of

control?

You may find it difficult to answer these questions, especially if there are dual responsibilities or reporting lines in some areas.

Provide your answer...

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

31 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

6 The organisational environment Organisations exist in an environment – everything that surrounds the organisation physically and socially. The constituents of the organisation’s environment are likely to have an important impact on the management of the organisation. An organisation’s management must systematically analyse its environment in formulating plans to achieve organisational objectives. The major environmental factors impacting on an organisation can be grouped under four headings: political/legal, economic, social/demographic and technological (reflected in the acronym: PEST analysis).

6.1 Political and legal environment Clearly, there are laws that must be complied with, emanating from a number of sources, of which the organisation must be aware. These cover areas such as:

l ways of doing business (e.g., included within contract law); professional negligence (included within the law of tort)

l protection of consumers (e.g., Sale of Goods Act 1979, Consumer Credit Act 1974, 2006)

l safe working environment for employees (health and safety legislation) l confidentiality and use of information held concerning customers or employees (Data

Protection Act 1998) l duties of directors and financial reporting requirements (company law, in particular,

the Companies Act 2006) l minimum wage, equal opportunities and unfair dismissal rules (employment law)

pollution, waste disposal (environmental legislation) l tax liabilities (tax law).

In recent years, the European Union (EU) has become increasingly important for member states in terms of international trade rules. In addition to requiring the removal of trade barriers, the EU requires that:

l there be free movement of capital between countries l governments do not discriminate between companies in different EU countries in

awarding government contracts l financial services can be provided in any EU country l telecommunications organisations be opened up to greater competition l qualifications awarded in one country are recognised in the others.

In addition to the legal framework, government impacts directly on many organisations in a number of ways:

l via taxes or subsidies to discourage/encourage particular activities (e.g., alcohol consumption)

6 The organisational environment

32 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l national and, in particular, European, regulations have impacted on organisations in ways such as product standardisation, anti-discrimination legislation, workers’ rights, etc.

l location incentives (often funded by the European Union) to encourage businesses to locate in particular areas

l by providing barriers to entry (e.g., the requirement to obtain a license to operate) and thus restricting competition in a particular field

l the government may be a major customer l anti-monopoly, competition legislation l as a supplier of infrastructure (e.g., roads), government can influence competition

(e.g., road versus rail freight).

Political change, for example, wars, expropriation or nationalisation, political instability and so on, can also present a major threat to organisational plans.

6.2 Economic environment Economic variables such as inflation, interest rates, savings patterns, economic growth, exchange rates, the levels of taxation and government spending all influence the amount of money people have to spend. This is likely to have an impact on most organisations. Businesses will experience, for example, varying levels of demand for their products or services and charities will experience varying levels of donations, as the amount of money people have to spend fluctuates in response to variations in major economic variables.

6.3 Demographic and social trends impacting on organisations Demography is concerned with the study of data relating to the population and groups within it – births, deaths, diseases and so on – as indicators of the conditions of life in communities. Recent trends in the UK include a fall in the number of young people entering the labour market and an increase in the number of retired people. Such data are used by organisations, especially in the identification of consumer markets, but they are also important for human resource management too. Organisations must monitor demographic changes in their HR planning, especially with regard to recruitment. These changes must be taken into account in considering the best ways to tap into the future talent pool. It will be necessary to assess the current and future labour requirements in terms of both the level and the type of labour. The area from which the labour force is to be drawn must be identified. Once the labour force recruitment area is identified, the size and composition of the available labour force can be determined. The next step then involves a comparison of need as opposed to supply. In view of recent demographic changes, it is likely to be necessary to tap into currently under-utilised labour resources such as older workers and women returning to work after long periods spent bringing up children. HR policies need to be geared towards these requirements, for example, by providing training (e.g., in IT skills), part time working and child care facilities.

6 The organisational environment

33 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

6.4 Sociological factors A number of factors concerning the way society is structured will also be of relevance to many organisations.

Social class An important component of social structure is social class. Social class refers to the hierarchical distinction between individuals or groups in society. The factors that determine class vary from one society to another. The most obvious meaning of this term used to be in relation to the stratum of society into which one was born (aristocratic, middle class, working class) and class still means this to many people. In contemporary capitalist societies, it is common to define class in terms of income, status, education or profession, or a combination of these. An important implication of the existence of such a class structure is that social class can create different customer groups. It is therefore a tool for market segmentation. The social classes are widely used to profile and predict different customer behaviour. Identifying a segment, in which customers share certain characteristics, such as level of income, is useful when developing products for those customers.

Culture Culture refers to a set of shared attitudes, values, goals and practices that characterise a society or a social group within it. Cultural factors also have a significant impact on customer behaviour as culture is the most fundamental influence on a person’s wants and behaviour. As with social class, culture can create customer groups and is therefore important for marketing. For example, there has been a cultural shift towards greater concern about health and fitness, which has created opportunities for serving customers who wish to buy:

l low calorie foods l health club memberships l exercise equipment l activity- or health-related holidays.

Similarly, the increased desire for leisure time has resulted in increased demand for convenience products and services such as microwave ovens, ready meals and direct marketing service businesses such as telephone banking and insurance. Each culture contains sub-cultures – particular groups of people with shared values. Sub- cultures can include nationalities, religions, and racial groups of people sharing the same geographical location. Sometimes a sub-culture will create a substantial and distinctive market segment of its own. For example, the ‘youth culture’ or ‘club culture’ has quite distinct values and buying characteristics from the much older ‘grey generation’.

6 The organisational environment

34 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 12 ‘This looks good. It’s a six hour special on how society is becoming too sedentary.’

Cultural shifts also impact on other functions within an organisation. For example, there has been a dramatic increase in the number of women participating in the workforce and this raises a number of potential (and actual) discrimination issues, for instance, in terms of promotion and seniority and sexual harassment. HR policies must attempt to guard against these. Many organisations are responding by, for example:

l introducing flexible working hours to help women cope with the demands of career and family responsibilities

l providing education and training for managers and the workforce to encourage equal opportunities and discourage discrimination.

Another important cultural shift is the increasing concern for the physical environment among organisations’ various stakeholders (employees, customers, investors, local community and so on). Organisations are responding in a number of ways:

l by introducing ‘green products’ to exploit the opportunity, for example, environmen- tally friendly deodorants, washing powder and cleaning agents

l by exercising greater care in disposing of industrial waste l by reducing their carbon footprint by, for example, sourcing raw materials locally,

not using air freight, using video conferencing instead of executive travel, using energy efficient appliances, etc.

l by social and environmental reporting. Increasingly, large companies are providing information (which is not currently required by law or accounting regulations) on environmental policies in their annual financial reports.

Many companies now present a corporate social responsibility report, although the content varies greatly between companies. This report is usually posted on the company’s website.

6 The organisational environment

35 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

In addition to such voluntary responses based on enlightened self-interest, organisations are increasingly needing to familiarise themselves with environmental legislation and direct government action, for example:

l the congestion charge in inner London l fines for breaching pollution guidelines l the landfill tax on hazardous waste.

6.5 Technology and its impact In recent years, information systems (IS) and information technology (IT) have had a profound impact on most organisations. So pervasive is IT that IT skills are now essential for employees in virtually all organisations. IT has:

l facilitated flatter organisations and wider spans of control l made possible faster, more accurate processing of larger volumes of data l provided access to more – and more up to date – information for managers l provided computer modelling (e.g., simulations) which can improve the quality of

planning and decision making l made possible the provision of control information to senior managers in real time l improved customer service by provision of electronic data interchange (EDI)

between organisations, customer databases, extranets and so on.

Perhaps even more dramatic than the improvements in information processing are the improvements in communications that IT has provided. E-mail provides instant worldwide messaging; online conferencing enables collaboration between people in geographi- cally distant locations; voice mail allows communication between people whose working time schedules do not coincide; video conferencing allows face to face meetings without the need for expensive travel. IT has also changed the relationship between employers and employees and the nature of work, for example in terms of:

l home working (telecommuting) is commonplace, providing more flexible working arrangements and reducing the time and cost of travelling to work

l greater visibility provided to management, allowing increased monitoring and control.

Activity 6

(a) Explain (spend no more than about ten minutes on this) why it is necessary for an organisation to undertake a PEST analysis.

(b) Give three examples of actions that might result from such an analysis.

Provide your answer...

Discussion Environmental changes may have a significant impact on the organisation’s ability to achieve its objectives, including, possibly, survival. Major environmental changes,

6 The organisational environment

36 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

however, can often be anticipated if the environment is systematically monitored and analysed, and appropriate action can be taken to safeguard against threats and/or exploit opportunities arising. Examples of possible actions in response to an environmental analysis include:

l developing a new product range based on emerging technology ahead of the competition

l developing staff education and training programmes in anticipation of future skills shortages in the local labour market

l planning a programme of redundancies based on anticipation of a serious economic downturn.

Conclusion This course has provided an introduction to the nature of organisations. You should now have an appreciation of the way in which different organisations are structured and of the different components within an organisation. You should also have an understanding of the main environmental factors that impact on organisations, including political/legal, economic, social/demographic and technological factors.

Keep on learning

Conclusion

37 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Study another free course There are more than 800 courses on OpenLearn for you to choose from on a range of subjects. Find out more about all our free courses.

Take your studies further Find out more about studying with The Open University by visiting our online prospectus. If you are new to university study, you may be interested in our Access Courses or Certificates.

What’s new from OpenLearn? Sign up to our newsletter or view a sample.

For reference, full URLs to pages listed above:

OpenLearn – www.open.edu/openlearn/free-courses

Visiting our online prospectus – www.open.ac.uk/courses

Access Courses – www.open.ac.uk/courses/do-it/access

Certificates – www.open.ac.uk/courses/certificates-he

Newsletter – www.open.edu/openlearn/about-openlearn/subscribe-the-openlearn-newsletter

Glossary anti-monopoly, competition legislation Laws which seek to maintain the benefits of competition (in order to protect con- sumers), by preventing the emergence of monopolies in a particular market.

balance sheet An accounting report summarising an organisation’s assets and liabilities.

barriers to entry Factors that prevent competitors from entering a particular market.

carbon footprint The total amount of carbon emissions (greenhouse gasses), that result from an organisation’s activities.

cash flow statement

Glossary

38 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

An accounting report showing the principal types of cash inflows and outflows during a period and any cash surplus or deficit arising.

cooperative firms/social enterprises Organisations which are typically engaged in commercial activity, but whose primary purpose is social (for example, to provide employment) rather than earning profit for the owner/s. Such organisations are typically owned by their employees and/or customers.

Cost centre. A production or service location, function, activity or item of equipment for which costs are accumulated.A responsibility centre (e.g. division, department) where local man- agement has responsibility for and is called to account on the basis of costs (or expenses) only.

Culture The set of shared attitudes, values, goals and practices that characterise a society or social groups within it. Culture is a term which describes the psychology, attitudes, experiences, beliefs and values of an organisation. It has also been defined as the specific collection of values and norms that are shared by people and groups in an organization and that control the way they interact with each other and with stake- holders outside the organisation.

databases A computer-based store of organised data, structured so that it can be used to deliver information to more than one application.

delayering The process of removing layers in the management hierarchy, so that ‘tall’ organisations become flatter, with fewer hierarchical levels.

Demography The study of data relating to the population, for example, birth and death rates and population age profiles.

divisionalisation The process of dividing an organisation into a number of separate investment centres/ business segments (divisions) that operate almost as independent businesses.

effectively Achieving the specified outcomes; the extent to which specified outcomes are achieved.

efficiently Achieving specified outputs with the minimum necessary inputs (for a given quality specification).

electronic data interchange (EDI) The exchange of information directly between separate information systems (usually in different organisations). It is the basis of electronic commerce.

empowerment Giving employees power, in order to increase their self-confidence and motivation in order to improve their performance in pursuing organisational objectives.

extranets A form of intranet, accessible by specified individuals who may be outside a particular organisation, for example as customers or suppliers.

‘For-profit’ (commercial) organisations Commercial organisations whose primary purpose is to earn profit for the owner/s.

Glossary

39 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

income statement An accounting report summarising revenues earned, expenditure incurred and any surplus/deficit of revenue over expenditure during a certain period.

Investment centre. A type of profit centre for which the manager also has significant influence over the amount of capital investment and is therefore also responsible for profit in relation to capital employed.

lead time The time between a customer placing an order and the product or service being delivered.

line relationships The vertical relationships (in the organisational hierarchy) between managers and subordinates.

Marketing Concept The combination of factors which marketing managers take into account when marketing a product or service, namely: product, price, promotion and place.

mechanistic structures Tall, hierarchical, bureaucratic organisation structures, with centralisation of authority, formalisation of procedures and high levels of specialisation.

Middle line The group of middle managers whose role is to convert the objectives and broad plans of the Strategic Apex into operational plans that can be carried out by the organisation's workers.

‘Not-for–profit’ organisations Organisations that exist to pursue a particular social objective rather than to earn profit for the owner/s.

online conferencing A computer based communication system which enables collaboration between people in geographically distant locations.

Operating core The people who do the basic work of providing the products or delivering the services.

organic structures Flat organisation structures, with decentralisation of authority and low levels of specialisation.

PEST analysis An analysis of the organisation’s Political/legal, Economic, Social/demographic and Technological environment factors (hence the acronym PEST). This analysis is undertaken as part of the organisation's long- term planning process.

Profit centre. A division or department where local management has responsibility for revenue and costs, and is called to account on the basis of the difference between them (e.g. profit, loss, surplus, deficit).

Purchasing Mix The combination of factors which purchasing managers take into account when procuring goods or services, namely: quantity, quality, price and delivery.

responsibility centres

Glossary

40 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

An organisational segment such as a department or a function which a particular manager is accountable for.

Return on Investment Profit expressed as a percentage of the capital invested in an enterprise.

Return on Sales Profit earned expressed as a percentage of sales revenue.

Revenue centre. An organisational segment for which a particular manager is held accountable in terms of revenue earned.

social and environmental reporting The provision of information about an organisation’s social and environmental policies in its annual financial report.

social class The hierarchical distinction between individuals or groups in society. In contemporary capitalist society, it is common to define class in terms of income, education or profession –or a combination of these.

social responsibility objectives Objectives of an organisation relating to wider needs (for example, protecting the environment, provision of employment) rather than just the needs of the owners/ providers of funds.

staff relationships The horizontal relationship between a manager and another organisational member to/ from whom the manager gives or receives information or advice.

stakeholders Individuals or groups who have an interest in the activities of an organisation (they may be influenced by it) and may also have the power to influence the future course of the organisation (such as shareholders or employees). However, stakeholders will differ greatly in their degree of interest and/or influence.

Strategic apex The highest management level in an organisation, whose purpose is to ensure that the organisation follows its mission and manages its relationship with its environment.

Support staff The administrative personnel whose purpose is to provide services to other parts of the organisation.

Technostructure The group of technical/professional staff concerned with the best way of doing a job, specifying output criteria and ensuring that personnel have appropriate skills.

telecommuting Working from home, facilitated by information technology enabled communication with colleagues.

transaction costs The costs of engaging in economic activity resulting from an organisation’s relationship to the market.

video conferencing People in distant locations conducting conferences, through the use of computer networks to transmit audio and video data.

Glossary

41 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

working capital A measure of a company's liquidity and financial health. It encompasses short term assets (stock, debtors, cash) as well as less short term liabilities (creditors) by which they are financed; often referred to as net current assets. Working capital is generally calculated as: Working capital = current capital - current liabilities.

References Table of statutes Great Britain Companies Act 2006. Elizabeth II. Chapter 46. (2006) London: The Stationery Office. Great Britain. Consumer Credit Act 1974. Elizabeth II. Chapter 39. (1974) London: The Stationery Office. Great Britain. Consumer Credit Act 2006. Elizabeth II. Chapter 14.(2006) London: The Stationery Office. Great Britain. Data Protection Act 1998. Elizabeth II. Chapter 29. (1998) London: The Stationery Office. Great Britain. Sale of Goods Act 1979. Elizabeth II. Chapter 54.(1979) London: The Stationery Office. Publications Anthony, R.N. (1965) Planning and Control Systems: A Framework for Analysis, Boston, MA, Division of Research, Harvard Graduate School of Business. Bentley, T.J. (1998) Managing Information: Avoiding Overload, London, Chartered Institute of Management Accountants, Kogan Page. Chandler, A.D. (1962) Strategy and Structure, Boston, MA, MIT Press. Coates, J.B., Rickwood, C. and Stacey, R.J. (1996) Management Accounting for Strategic and Operational Control, Oxford, Butterworth-Heinemann. Davenport, T.H. and Prusak, L. (1997) Working Knowledge, Boston, MA, Harvard Business School Press. Emmanuel, C., Otley, D. and Merchant, K. (1990) Accounting for Management Control (2nd edn), London, Chapman and Hall. Fayol, H. (1949) General and Industrial Management, London, Pitman. Harrison, G.L. (1978) ‘The role of the management accountant in the marketing function of business: case observations and analyses’, Research paper no. 157, School of Economics and Financial Studies, Macquarie University. Johnson, H.T. and Kaplan, R.S. (1987) Relevance Lost: The Rise and Fall of Management Accounting, Boston, MA, Harvard Business School Press. Kotler, P. (1967) Marketing Management, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, Prentice Hall. Mintzberg, H. (1978) ‘Patterns in Strategy Formation’, Management Science, vol. 24, no. 9, pp. 934–48. Mintzberg, H. (1979) The Structuring of Organisations, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, Prentice Hall. Porter, M.E. (1985) Competitive Advantage: Creating and Sustaining Superior Perfor- mance, New York, Free Press.

References

42 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Rockart, J.F. (1979) ‘Chief executives define their own data needs’, Harvard Business Review, vol. 57, no. 2, pp. 238–41.

Acknowledgements This course was written by Dr Mike Lucas. Except for third party materials and otherwise stated (see terms and conditions), this content is made available under a Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 4.0 Licence. The material acknowledged below is Proprietary and used under licence (not subject to Creative Commons Licence). Grateful acknowledgement is made to the following sources for permission to reproduce material in this course: Course image: Ken Teegardin in Flickr made available under Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 2.0 Licence. Images Figure 1: Mintzberg, H. (1979) ‘Five basic parts of organisations’, The Structure of Organizations, Pearson Education, Inc. Illustrations Section 4.5: © John Morris, www.CartoonStock.com Section 5.2: © Mike Shapiro, www.CartoonStock.com Section 6.4: © Mike Shapiro, www.CartoonStock.com Every effort has been made to contact copyright owners. If any have been inadvertently overlooked, the publishers will be pleased to make the necessary arrangements at the first opportunity. Don't miss out: If reading this text has inspired you to learn more, you may be interested in joining the millions of people who discover our free learning resources and qualifications by visiting The Open University - www.open.edu/openlearn/free-courses

Acknowledgements

43 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Business and Business Environment/Support/Organisations_and_business environment(2).pdf

Organisations and management

accounting

About this free course

This free course is an adapted extract from the Open University course B292 Management accounting http://www.open.ac.uk/courses/modules/b292

This version of the content may include video, images and interactive content that may not be optimised for your device.

You can experience this free course as it was originally designed on OpenLearn, the home of free learning from The Open University: www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content- section-0.

There you’ll also be able to track your progress via your activity record, which you can use to demonstrate your learning.

Copyright © 2016 The Open University

Intellectual property

Unless otherwise stated, this resource is released under the terms of the Creative Commons Licence v4.0 http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/4.0/deed.en_GB. Within that The Open University interprets this licence in the following way: www.open.edu/openlearn/about-openlearn/frequently-asked-questions-on-openlearn. Copyright and rights falling outside the terms of the Creative Commons Licence are retained or controlled by The Open University. Please read the full text before using any of the content.

We believe the primary barrier to accessing high-quality educational experiences is cost, which is why we aim to publish as much free content as possible under an open licence. If it proves difficult to release content under our preferred Creative Commons licence (e.g. because we can’t afford or gain the clearances or find suitable alternatives), we will still release the materials for free under a personal end- user licence.

This is because the learning experience will always be the same high quality offering and that should always be seen as positive – even if at times the licensing is different to Creative Commons.

When using the content you must attribute us (The Open University) (the OU) and any identified author in accordance with the terms of the Creative Commons Licence.

The Acknowledgements section is used to list, amongst other things, third party (Proprietary), licensed content which is not subject to Creative Commons licensing. Proprietary content must be used (retained) intact and in context to the content at all times.

The Acknowledgements section is also used to bring to your attention any other Special Restrictions which may apply to the content. For example there may be times when the Creative Commons Non- Commercial Sharealike licence does not apply to any of the content even if owned by us (The Open University). In these instances, unless stated otherwise, the content may be used for personal and non- commercial use.

We have also identified as Proprietary other material included in the content which is not subject to Creative Commons Licence. These are OU logos, trading names and may extend to certain photographic and video images and sound recordings and any other material as may be brought to your attention.

Unauthorised use of any of the content may constitute a breach of the terms and conditions and/or intellectual property laws.

We reserve the right to alter, amend or bring to an end any terms and conditions provided here without notice.

All rights falling outside the terms of the Creative Commons licence are retained or controlled by The Open University.

Head of Intellectual Property, The Open University

2 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Contents Introduction 5 Learning Outcomes 6 1 What is an organisation? 7

1.1 Mintzberg’s five components of organisation 7 1.2 Why do organisations exist? 8 1.3 What types of organisation are there? 9

2 What is organisational structure? 11 2.1 Principles of organisational structure 12 2.2 Tall versus flat organisations 14

3 Forms of organisational structure 16 3.1 Functional structure 16 3.2 Product or service structure 17 3.3 Geographical structure 17 3.4 Matrix structure 18 3.5 Project teams 19 3.6 Hybrid structure 20 3.7 Recent trends in organisational design 21

4 Organisational departments and functions 22 4.1 Typical business organisation departments and functions 22 4.2 The Production function 22 4.3 The Research and Development function 23 4.4 The Purchasing function 24 4.5 The Marketing function 24 4.6 The Human Resources function 26 4.7 The Accounting and Finance function 27

5 Decentralisation and centralisation 27 5.1 Advantages of decentralisation 27 5.2 Disadvantages of decentralisation 28 5.3 Responsibility centres 29 5.4 The divisionalised organisation 31 5.5 Line and staff relationships 31

6 The organisational environment 32 6.1 Political and legal environment 32 6.2 Economic environment 33 6.3 Demographic and social trends impacting on organisations 33 6.4 Sociological factors 34 6.5 Technology and its impact 36

Conclusion 37 Keep on learning 37 Glossary 38

3 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

References 42 Acknowledgements 43

4 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Introduction Management accounting is concerned with providing information and analysis to managers to help them plan, evaluate and control activities, in order to achieve an organisation’s objectives. Whereas financial accounting is concerned with reporting on the past financial performance of an organisation, management accounting is essentially concerned with improving its future performance. In order to understand the concepts and principles of management accounting it is necessary first to have some appreciation of what managers do! This, in turn, requires an understanding of the organisations in which managers work – and of the external environment in which these organisations exist and operate. This OpenLearn free course, therefore, looks at the nature of organisations, specifically their objectives and structure. Organisational objectives and structure are key elements of organisations and they determine management functions and responsibilities within the organisation. The course also considers the main environmental factors (economic, social, political, legal and technological) that impact on organisational behaviour. This OpenLearn course is an adapted extract from the Open University course B292 Management accounting. Tell us what you think! We’d love to hear from you to help us improve our free learning offering through OpenLearn by filling out this short survey.

Introduction

5 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Learning Outcomes After studying this course, you should be able to: l understand the nature and purpose of different types of organisations (commercial, voluntary, public sector and

so on) l describe the different ways in which organisations may be structured l understand basic concepts of organisational structure l describe the main departments or functions of a business organisation l explain the advantages and disadvantages of centralised and decentralised organisations.

1 What is an organisation? An ‘organisation’ is a group of individuals working together to achieve one or more objectives. Although organisations have been defined differently by different theorists, virtually all definitions refer to five common features:

1 they are composed of individuals and groups of individuals 2 they are oriented towards achieving collective goals 3 they consist of different functions 4 the functions need to be coordinated 5 they exist independently of individual members who may come and go.

1.1 Mintzberg’s five components of organisation Mintzberg (1979, p. 24) suggested that all organisations consist of five components, as shown in Figure 1.

Figure 1 Mintzberg’s five parts of the organisation

At the top of the organisation is a Strategic apex the purpose of which is to ensure the organisation follows its mission and manages its relationship with its environment. The

1 What is an organisation?

7 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

individuals comprising the apex, for example, the Chief Executive Officer (CEO), are responsible to owners, government agencies, unions, communities and so on. Below the apex is the Middle line, a group of managers who are concerned with converting the objectives and broad plans of the Strategic apex into operational plans that can be carried out by the workers. As organisations grow and become more complex, they usually develop a separate group of people who are concerned with the best way of doing a job, specifying output criteria (e.g., quality standards) and ensuring that personnel have appropriate skills (e.g., by organising training programmes). This group of analysts is referred to by Mintzberg as the Technostructure. The organisation also adds other administrative functions that provide services to itself, for example legal advice, public relations, mailroom, cafeteria and so on. These are the Support staff. Finally, at the bottom of the organisation, is the Operating core. These are the people who do the basic work of producing the products or delivering the services. Mintzberg’s generic organisational model also illustrates an important principle of organisation structure: the separation of direction and management, whereby those people who decide the mission and general direction of the organisation are different (other than in a very small organisation) from those who handle the implementation of plans and subsequent controlling of operations to ensure that objectives are met. Senior managers (the Strategic apex) will establish long-term organisational objectives and policies through which goals are to be achieved. Middle managers (the Middle line) will be responsible for translating the necessarily broad and general strategic plans into detailed action plans, specifying managerial responsibilities for particular tasks and how resources are to be allocated. These middle managers will also be responsible for monitoring activities and taking action to ensure that resources are being used efficiently and effectively to achieve organisational objectives.

Efficiency refers to the relationship between inputs and outputs. An activity or process is efficient, if it produces a given output with the minimum of inputs necessary. Effectiveness refers to the extent to which goals/objectives are actually achieved.

Other important principles of organisational structure are discussed later in Sections 2 and 3.

1.2 Why do organisations exist? Organisations exist because groups of people working together can achieve more than the sum of the achievements which the individuals in the organisation could produce when working separately. For example, one person might struggle all day to carry a piano upstairs, whereas a team of four people, each taking one corner, may need to put in much less than a quarter of the effort of one person to complete the task (Coates et al., 1996, p. 19). Although such cooperation is beneficial, if individuals pull in different directions, the result is counter-productive. Thus coordination is necessary and this is a fundamental role of management, as will be discussed in a later section of this session. It can also be argued that organisations exist as a result of the impact of transaction costs, because they can arrange transactions between their different parts at a lower total cost than that available in the open market. In crude terms, it may be cheaper to make or do something ‘in house’ because this cuts out the time consuming process of negotiating

1 What is an organisation?

8 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

terms – and renegotiating them every time your requirements change. Before the Industrial Age, it was common for artisans/craftsmen to work individually from home, producing various products, which merchants would purchase from these individuals and sell to consumers. All transactions were conducted through market exchange without the need for formal organisations. As economic development gained pace, however, it became clear that it was more efficient to organise production internally within a firm rather than undertake each transaction externally through the market. The latter process involved substantial costs in terms of time that had to be spent investigating suppliers, detailing specifications, negotiating/renegotiating contracts, checking that agreed terms had been met and so on.

1.3 What types of organisation are there? Organisations can be classified in different ways. One way is according to their over- arching purpose, or primary objective. Broadly, organisations may be classified as ‘for- profit’ (i.e., commercial) or ‘not-for-profit’ entities. ‘For-profit’ (commercial) organisa- tions may have several different objectives. For a very long time, it was generally accepted that maximising the wealth of the owners and continuing in existence were the primary objectives of profit seeking organisations. However, as organisations also aim, for example, to provide goods and services to customers and employment to employees, it is perhaps more reasonable to suggest that increasing, rather than maximising the wealth of owners, is a more fitting objective. ‘Not-for–profit’ organisations comprise a large variety of organisations including charities, clubs, cooperative firms/social enterprises and public sector organisations. Public sector organisations are owned, funded and run by central or local government. They include:

l public hospitals l the armed forces (military) l most schools and universities l government departments.

These organisations exist to provide services which, for various reasons, it is considered impractical or undesirable for the commercial sector to provide. Whereas commercial organisations, charities and social enterprises must generate sufficient funds from their activities to sustain themselves on a continuing basis, public sector organisations are funded by government. Nevertheless, constraints on government expenditure mean that resources are limited. Consequently, economic scarcity requires that virtually all organisations be run effectively and efficiently. As a result, many of the management principles employed by the commercial sector are also employed in the not- for-profit sector, requiring extensive use of management accounting in all sectors. A traditional view of differences between sectors is illustrated in Figure 2. However, these distinctions are becoming blurred, as indicated by the overlapping circles. Commercial organisations are increasingly pursuing social responsibility objectives, while not-for- profit organisations are increasingly adopting commercial criteria to ensure the sound financial management of scarce resources.

Maximisation of shareholder value has long been the publicly stated objective of most business enterprises. It is likely, however, partly as a result of the global financial crises

1 What is an organisation?

9 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

that began in 2008, that the publicly stated objectives will be expanded to embrace more stakeholders, such as employees and the local community.

Figure 2 Organisations highlighting differences between sectors

Activity 1 Think of an organisation that you know well.

l In which sector or sectors from Figure 2 do you feel your organisation most comfortably fits?

l Which factors (profit, accountability, commitment) exert pressure on it or influence its objectives?

1 What is an organisation?

10 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Provide your answer...

Discussion You may have decided that your organisation sits clearly inside one of the circles or, more likely, you will have sited it in an intermediate position – operating for commercial purposes, but anxious to satisfy other criteria such as accountability to a wider public. For example, there has been a rise in the number of investment companies which use not only financial but also ethical criteria to decide in which organisations to invest. Such criteria could include the environmental impact of the production processes used by the companies in question, or the working conditions and wages of their employees. Another example of the mixture of the pressures that can affect organisations could be taken from the social care sector: a organisation in this sector might be keen to provide an excellent service to local people, but it could also have to operate on commercial principles in managing costs in order to compete with more cost effective providers.

2 What is organisational structure? The term organisational structure refers to the relationships between the various functions and positions in an organisation. Structure determines authority and responsibility for particular tasks/activities. It also specifies the routes of communication between different parts of the organisation. Organisational structure therefore has important implications for the design of management accounting systems. For example, some organisations are highly decentralised, with decision making authority delegated to relatively junior managers at lower levels in the organisational hierarchy. In this case, a major role of the organisation’s management accounting system will be to monitor the outcomes and provide feedback to senior managers about the performance of those who have the decision making authority. Such a role will not be necessary in a highly centralised organisation, where senior managers make all the important decisions.

Theories of organisational structure With the emergence of large industrial enterprises in the nineteenth century, management theorists began to consider how organisations should be designed and managed. As you will read later in this session, early organisational theorists such as Henri Fayol (1949) attempted to derive universal prescriptions for the optimal design of organisations. More recently, theorists have emphasised the contingent nature of optimal organisational design – depending on variables such as size, production technology, degree of stability in the organisation’s business environment, nature of competition in the industry and so on. These factors are assumed to influence, for example, whether organisations are ‘tall’ or ‘flat’, centralised or decentralised in terms of decision making and so on. (These terms are discussed later.)

Ultimately, organisational structure is a means of influencing and controlling the behaviour of the individuals who work in the organisation. Structure is used to assign authority and responsibility to individuals and hold them accountable for the achievement of specific tasks or objectives (Emmanuel et al., 1990, p. 38). Management accounting is an

2 What is organisational structure?

11 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

important part of this process as it provides managers with the information to carry out the various activities for which they are responsible. It also measures and monitors their performance to ensure that the organisation achieves its objectives.

A good example of a management accounting technique employed widely for organisational planning and control purposes is budgeting.

The sort of information managers need to undertake various activities and the way their performance is measured/monitored will depend on the way in which the organisation is structured.

2.1 Principles of organisational structure Certain principles are basic to the operation of any organisation:

Specialisation The work of the organisation is divided up into separate activities or tasks and particular individuals concentrate on specific tasks or activities. This enables the application of specialised knowledge and so improves organisational efficiency and effectiveness.

Coordination If an organisation’s activities are to be separated into different areas or operations, it will be necessary to ensure that the various actions are coordinated, that is, consistent with each other and working towards the same organisational objectives. This is a very important task of management. The management hierarchy or ‘chain of command’ facilitates the coordination of various departments and their activities.

Management principles of the hierarchy of authority Management theorists (notably Henri Fayol, 1949) have, over the years, developed several principles relating to the hierarchy of authority for coordinating activities. Some of the most important are:

l Unity of Command. Every person should receive orders and be accountable to one and only one superior. If people receive orders from more than one superior, conflict and confusion may well result.

l The Scalar Chain. There should be a clear line of authority from top to bottom, linking all managers at all levels.

l The Responsibility and Authority Principle. If an organisational member is allocated responsibility, then that person should also be given the necessary authority to carry out the tasks necessary – including the right to ask other people to undertake particular tasks. A manager should not be given responsibility without the necessary authority, but conversely delegation of authority implies responsibility and the need for accountability.

2 What is organisational structure?

12 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Span of control refers to the number of subordinates directly reporting to a manager or supervisor.

l Span of Control. There is a limit to the number of activities or people that can be supervised effectively by one person. What constitutes an effective span of control will be determined by a number of factors, including:

l the similarity of tasks/functions undertaken (the more similar, the greater the potential effective span of control)

l the proximity of the tasks to each other and to the supervisor (the closer the proximity, the greater the potential effective span of control)

l the complexity of the tasks (the more complex, the smaller the potential effective span of control)

l the direction and control needed by subordinates (the more direction and control needed, the smaller the potential effective span of control).

Activity 2 Consider the organisation where you (or a close friend or relative) work or have worked.

l What is the span of control of your immediate manager? l What is the span of control of her or his manager? l Do you think they are appropriate, bearing in mind the ability of either person to

monitor what is going on in the organisation?

Provide your answer...

Discussion The appropriateness of a span of control may depend on the extent of the delegation that can be exercised by managers (i.e., entrusting the responsibility for tasks to someone else) and also on reporting mechanisms within the organisation. Many organisations have introduced systems of regular meetings between managers and staff at which SMART objectives are set and monitored. SMART objectives are:

l Specific l Measurable l Achievable l Realistic l Time-bound (i.e., have a defined time scale associated with their achievement).

If objectives are SMART, managers should be able to tell whether or not they have been achieved. The appropriateness of the span of control will then be related to the number of people who can realistically be monitored in this way and the frequency with which monitoring takes place.

2 What is organisational structure?

13 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

2.2 Tall versus flat organisations Where there is a large number of levels in the management hierarchy, the organisation is said to be ‘tall’. This will tend to result in narrow spans of control. Where there is a small number of levels in the hierarchy, the organisation is said to be ‘flat’. Flat organisations will tend to have wide spans of control. Figure 3 shows a comparison of tall and flat organisation structures.

Figure 3 Tall and flat organisations

In recent years, there has been a trend towards delayering, whereby tall organisations have tended to become flat organisations by the removal of various levels in the hierarchy. This has been facilitated by:

(a) Information technology, which has reduced the need for many middle management jobs, which were largely concerned with processing information to facilitate control within the organisational hierarchy.

(b) The management philosophy of empowerment, whereby people at lower levels have been delegated authority to take actions and make decisions which would previously have been the domain of middle managers

Changes in organisation structures have led to changes in approach to management and vice versa.

The advantages of delayering are:

(a) A significant reduction in costs as middle managers’ salary costs are removed. (b) Increased motivation as people at lower levels are given power/discretion to make

decisions. Improved performance is likely to be a consequence of increased motivation.

2 What is organisational structure?

14 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

(c) Improved, faster communication between senior management and operational levels – increasingly important in a faster changing, more uncertain and increasingly competitive external environment.

There are also disadvantages to delayering, the principal one being a possible loss of control. Middle managers are often necessary to translate the inevitably broad and general plans of senior management into operational plans and actions that can be implemented. Senior managers may have only a hazy understanding of what is going on at the operational level and much is thereby entrusted to relatively junior people (Coates et al., 1996, p. 116).

Activity 3

l How will a tall organisational structure, in contrast with a flat one, impact on the span of control and the speed of information flows through the organisation?

l What do you think are the advantages and disadvantages of flat organisations?

Provide your answer...

Discussion In tall organisations, managers have smaller spans of control (i.e., fewer people reporting directly to them). This reduces the number of people they have to manage, but means it takes longer for information to travel through the layers of the organisation. In flat organisations, the opposite is true: communication can be quicker because of fewer layers, but the spans of control are larger. In recent years, tall organisations have tended to be associated with large bureaucracies. Communication will be formal and middle managers may be in a position to use information as a device to retain control. On the other hand, smaller spans of control may mean that managers have more time to manage. Furthermore, there are more explicit career paths, with opportunities for promotion. In flat organisations, the opposite is true: communication can be quicker because of fewer layers, but the spans of control are larger. In recent years, tall organisations have tended to be associated with large bureaucracies. Communication will be formal and middle managers may be in a position to use information as a device to retain control. On the other hand, smaller spans of control may mean that managers have more time to manage. Furthermore, there are more explicit career paths, with opportunities for promotion. Flat organisations have developed because there is a belief that communication is impaired by additional levels of management. Flatter organisations are thought to be able to react to change more quickly. Managers may be forced to delegate if their span of control is enlarged. This can be motivating for those to whom work is delegated. On the other hand, career paths are less explicit: employees may have to look sideways or even outside the organisation for career development opportunities.

2 What is organisational structure?

15 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

3 Forms of organisational structure It is no easy task to design and develop a structure. Many organisations continuously debate whether to structure around products, geography, common tasks or information. It is, however, possible to distinguish six important forms of organisational structure:

1 functional structure 2 product or service structure 3 geographical structure 4 matrix structure 5 project team 6 hybrid structure

Each of these forms is now explained in turn.

3.1 Functional structure As you can see from Figure 4, in a functional structure people are grouped according to the type of job they do.

Figure 4 A functional structure

This structure may be appropriate when people within functional departments need to communicate regularly with each other. For example, in a marketing department, the marketing director will coordinate the activities of marketing specialists in fields such as promotion, advertising, product design, market research, and packaging. Although there is a need for communication with all the other parts of the company, the bulk of the information exchange and communication is likely to be within the functional areas, so it makes sense to group these people together. Functional structures, however, can have disadvantages.

l Career paths tend to develop through functions and this can reduce managers’ awareness of other issues facing the organisation. The organisation will not develop many generalists this way (e.g., people who know about marketing and operations or finance and HR). This will expose the organisation to significant risks, as managers will not have an overview of its operations.

l Staff may work for the benefit of their department and not the organisation as a whole.

3 Forms of organisational structure

16 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l Many members of staff may never meet an external customer and may not therefore have a customer service orientation.

3.2 Product or service structure

Figure 5 Product and service structures

At first glance this looks similar to the functional structure, but here staff members are grouped together on product or service lines. This very often happens in larger organisations. For example, a big accountancy firm may group staff by the industry served or a public education department may group staff around different areas of work (e.g., pre- school children, primary, secondary and special needs). Each product or service group will have its own production and service people and also its own accounting and personnel staff. A product or service structure can be more responsive to customer needs and better at motivating staff. However, there is a danger of creating independent units, which can be difficult to manage as they assume the attitude, ‘we know what the customer wants, so stop interfering!’. It can also mean that professional expertise becomes fragmented. For example, if each product line has its own small accounting team (perhaps just one person) this may reduce career opportunities for specialists.

3.3 Geographical structure

3 Forms of organisational structure

17 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 6 A geographical structure

A variation on the product or service structure is to group staff by physical location – for example, by region, country or continent. This has advantages for international organisations because there are likely to be big differences in markets, languages and cultures. National issues are usually best identified locally. However, there are several disadvantages to structuring by location:

l information flows between staff in different locations can be costly and problematic l there may be duplication of activities, typically, support functions such as accounting,

human resources and information technology l it may be difficult to achieve integrated strategies across a number of different

countries.

3.4 Matrix structure We have seen that functional, product or service, and geographical structures all have disadvantages. In a matrix structure, each person has two reporting lines: (i) to the functional head; and (ii) to a project, product, service or region manager. These dual reporting lines are permanent. Advocates of matrix structures believe that they combine the advantages of both functional and product or service structures. Figure 7 is an example of a matrix structure.

Figure 7 An example of how a matrix structure might work

In Figure 7, there is a Finance function and everyone in it will report to the Finance Director. However, each product (1, 2, 3, 4) will have its own independent finance team who also will report to the relevant product or service manager. Hence each group has two people to whom they report – a functional manager and a product/service manager. There are, however, problems associated with a matrix structure. First, heads of reporting lines may need to meet regularly to decide how to apportion each person’s time. What

3 Forms of organisational structure

18 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

happens if the Finance Director and the Service 1 manager disagree about what the Service 1 finance team should be doing? Staff may feel uncomfortable with the change and uncertainty implicit in a matrix structure. In practice, matrix structures can be very difficult to manage. Dual reporting can lead to conflict, confusion, and overlapping responsibilities. This can then result in loss of accountability. There could be a number of people who are responsible if Service 1 budgets are delivered late. The person responsible could be the Finance Director who changed the format, or the Service 1 manager who would not agree a sales budget, or the Service 1 finance team who took advantage of the conflict between the Finance Director and the Service 1 manager to get more time to do the task. Matrix structures can suffer from low responsiveness, slow decision making and high levels of internal political conflict. On the other hand, they can offer a way of forcing people to work flexibly across functional boundaries (which can result in some productivity benefits for the organisation and outweigh the potential disadvantages). Organisations such as Texas Instruments, Shell, NASA, NCR, ITT and Monsanto Chemical have attributed some of their success to the matrix structure, which, in their opinion, helped them respond rapidly to customers’ needs.

3.5 Project teams Some organisations carry out the bulk of their work through project teams, which are often set up to react to changing circumstances and allow the organisation to respond quickly. They are an example of what are called organic structures, as distinct from the mechanistic structures that have been described so far. Project teams draw staff from across the organisation, seconded on a full or part time basis. The latter can be very stressful for the individual, who effectively gets two jobs usually for the life of the project. An example of how this might work can be seen in Figure 8. This looks very like the matrix structure you have just looked at – and in a way it is. Clearly, those serving on project teams also have two reporting lines: to their functional head and to the project manager. The main difference is that the project teams are not permanent groupings like the Service 1, 2, 3, 4 groupings we saw in the matrix structure in Figure 7. Instead, these project teams only last as long as the projects on which they are working. This can lead to problems of control but, on the other hand, it can generate a tremendous sense of excitement as project goals are achieved. Also, fast moving changes can be implemented as a result of the flexibility and speed of response that this sort of structure can give an organisation.

3 Forms of organisational structure

19 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 8 An example of project teams working across a functionally structured organisation

3.6 Hybrid structure In practice, organisations evolve and changes to their structure should occur as and when necessary. This evolutionary process can produce structures that are well adapted to meeting the particular needs of the moment. A hybrid (mixture) of functional and product or service structures is common, and Figure 9 illustrates how this might look. Here we see that the sales function is structured along product lines.

3 Forms of organisational structure

20 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 9 The organisational structure of a department store as a typical hybrid of product and function.

A hybrid structure might include functional departments, the work of which is primarily internal (e.g., finance and HR), with the rest of the company organised on a product, service, geographic or project basis, as required to meet best the needs of the customer (as in Figure 9).

3.7 Recent trends in organisational design In response to a dynamic, fast changing and competitive environment, flexibility and speed of decision making have become increasingly important in modern organisations. This has led to a number of trends in recent years:

1 The flattening of structures to remove levels in the organisational hierarchy. This shortens the chain of command and thereby increases the speed of decision making.

2 The establishment of multi-functional project teams and an empowered, multi-skilled workforce to increase flexibility.

3 A customer service orientation rather than an inward, internal process orientation. 4 The emergence of the ‘flexible firm’. In an increasingly competitive environment,

continuous reduction of costs is essential. Organisations have responded by replacing full time, permanent, salaried staff with temporary and part time contract labour. This allows greater flexibility, as labour can be readily taken on/laid off as demand conditions fluctuate. It also provides substantial savings in pension, health insurance and holiday pay costs. Such organisations consist of a small core of permanent full time salaried professional staff, who organise and direct the

3 Forms of organisational structure

21 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

organisation’s affairs, supplemented by various levels of contract staff. Some of these will be professionals contracted for particular projects, but the majority are likely to be the flexible workforce that carries out the routine operations of the organisation.

4 Organisational departments and functions Business organisations typically consist of a number of departments or functions and it is important to have an appreciation of the purpose and activities of these departments/ functions in order to understand the role of management accounting in the organisation. After all, management accounting is concerned with providing managers at all levels with information to help them undertake their various activities and to monitor/report on the impact of these activities on the organisation. A well designed management accounting system must be based on an understanding of what various managers actually do.

Management accountants are increasingly acting as ‘business partners’ to teams in other functional areas of the organisation. If they are to be accepted within these decision making teams, it is essential they understand the operations and technology of the organisation.

4.1 Typical business organisation departments and functions A typical business organisation may consist of the following main departments or functions:

l Production l Research and Development (often abbreviated to R&D) l Purchasing l Marketing (including the selling function) l Human Resource Management l Accounting and Finance.

4.2 The Production function The Production function undertakes the activities necessary to provide the organisation’s products or services. Its main responsibilities are:

l production planning and scheduling l control and supervision of the production workforce

4 Organisational departments and functions

22 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l managing product quality (including process control and monitoring l maintenance of plant and equipment l control of inventory l deciding the best production methods and factory layout.

Close collaboration will usually be necessary between Production and various other functions within the organisation, for example:

l Research and Development, concerning the implications of product design for production methods and cost

l Marketing, concerning desired product functionality, appearance, quality, durability and so on

l Finance, concerning the availability of funds for purchase of new equipment and the acceptability of inventory levels.

l Human Resource Management, concerning staff motivation implications of job design and production methods.

Service organisations Although many of the principles of good management in a manufacturing environment also apply in organisations that provide services (rather than manufacture products), service businesses, such as banking and professional firms of accountants and solicitors, do have a number of distinctive features which have implications for how they are managed.

1 Services are less easily standardised than manufactured products and so service quality tends to be more variable. This makes human resource management and motivation more critical.

2 Services are often ‘intangible’ (i.e., something that cannot be precisely measured or assessed) and multi-dimensional – what exactly is the ‘service’ being offered by a bank, a private hospital or educational establishment? This can make attracting customers more difficult as it often depends on promoting an intangible item.

3 Unlike manufactured products, services cannot be stored, but must be consumed as they are produced or they are wasted. This creates additional problems matching productive capacity with customer demand. This is reflected in, for example, the common practice of commercial airlines offering very cheap flights based on marginal cost to fill empty seats – a plane flying empty to New York is a service provided but wasted!

4 Ascertaining the cost of individual services is often also problematic, as the cost structure of many service businesses is such that costs are often shared among different services. This makes, among other things, pricing and the analysis of profitability of different services more difficult than with most manufactured goods.

4.3 The Research and Development function The Research and Development (R&D) function is concerned with developing new products or processes and improving existing products/processes. R&D activities must be

4 Organisational departments and functions

23 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

closely coordinated with the organisation’s marketing activities to ensure that the organisation is providing exactly what its customers want in the most efficient, effective and economical way.

4.4 The Purchasing function The Purchasing function is concerned with acquiring goods and services for use by the organisation. These will include, for example, raw materials and components for manufacturing and also production equipment. The responsibilities of this function usually extend to buying goods and services for the entire organisation (not just the Production function), including, for example, office equipment, furniture, computer equipment and stationery. In buying goods and services, purchasing managers must take into account a number of factors – collectively referred to as ‘the Purchasing Mix’, namely, Quantity, Quality, Price and Delivery.

l Quantity. Buying in large quantities can attract price discounts and prevent inventory running out. On the other hand, there are substantial costs involved in carrying a high level of inventory.

l Quality. There will usually be a trade-off between price and quality in acquiring goods and services. Consequently, Production, R&D and Marketing Functions will need to be consulted to determine an acceptable level of quality which will depend on how important quality is as an attribute of the final product or service of the organisation.

l Price. Other things being equal, the purchasing manager will look for the best price deal when procuring goods and services, although price must be considered in conjunction with quality and supplier reliability, in order to achieve best value, rather than lowest price only.

l Delivery. The time between placing an order and receiving the goods or services, the lead time, can be critical for production planning and scheduling and also has implications for inventory control. Suppliers must therefore be evaluated in terms of their reliability and capability for on time delivery.

In short, the ‘purchasing mix’ can be considered as making sure that the organisation has the right amount, of the right quality, at the right price, in the right place at the right time!

4.5 The Marketing function Marketing is concerned with identifying and satisfying customers needs at the right price. Marketing involves researching what customers want and analysing how the organisation can satisfy these wants. Marketing activities range from the ‘strategic’, concerned with the choice of product markets (and how to compete in them, for example, on price or product differentiation) to the operational, arranging sales promotions (e.g., offering a 25 per cent discount), producing literature such as product catalogues and brochures, placing advertisements in the appropriate media and so on. A fundamental activity in marketing is managing the Marketing Mix consisting of the ‘4Ps’: Product, Price, Promotion and Place.

l Product. Having the right product in terms of benefits that customers value. l Price. Setting the right price which is consistent with potential customers’ perception

of the value offered by the product.

4 Organisational departments and functions

24 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l Promotion. Promoting the product in a way which creates maximum customer awareness and persuades potential customers to make the decision to purchase the product.

l Place. Making the product available in the right place at the right time – including choosing appropriate distribution channels.

In order to be successful, a business enterprise must either have a lower price than its competitors, or a product that is in some way superior – or both! A competitive strategy based on low price is known as a cost leadership strategy. A competitive strategy based on developing a superior product is known as a differentiation strategy.

The historical evolution of marketing Several writers (e.g., Harrison, 1978) have argued (and it is now widely accepted among management theorists and practitioners) that there have been three distinct eras in the history of advanced capitalist countries, such as the UK, which have affected the status, role and responsibilities of the Marketing function. These were:

1 The Production Era (pre–1930). This refers to a period of time during which products (and services) were relatively scarce (thereby constraining consumer choice) and the most important function of business was that of production. Marketing, in so far as it existed, was considered the least important function.

2 The Sales Era (1930–50). This refers to an era characterised by a shift in emphasis of business management from the production function to that of selling. With continued industrial development and innovations, many new consumer oriented products became available and a much more competitive selling environment resulted. This made it necessary to seek out customers and make significant use of advertising, promotion and personal selling.

3 The Marketing Era (1950–present). This period marked another significant change in the attitude of senior management towards the status and responsibilities of marketing. This change, referred to by many writers as the Marketing Concept (Kotler, 1967), meant a departure from the previous concept of marketing as being the sales function of a business, to one where marketing had a much greater responsibility in total company policy formation and operation. Under the Marketing Concept, marketing was placed at the beginning of the process of determining the products (services) which were needed by the market, the price at which they should be sold and the way in which they were to be distributed.

4 Organisational departments and functions

25 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 10 ‘We produce an inferior line of goods. That’s why we’re looking for a real first class marketing man.’

4.6 The Human Resources function The Human Resources function is concerned with the following:

l Recruitment and selection. Ensuring that the right people are recruited to the right jobs.

l Training and development. Enabling employees to carry out their responsibilities effectively and make use of their potential.

l Employee relations. Including negotiations over pay and conditions. l Grievance procedures and disciplinary matters. Dealing with complaints from

employees or from the employer. l Health and Safety matters Making sure employees work in a healthy and safe

environment. l Redundancy procedures Administering a proper system that is seen to be fair to all

concerned when deciding on redundancies and agreeing redundancy payments.

Organisations are dependent on their employees. Consequently, their recruitment and selection require careful management.

In recent years, the Human Resources function has attained a more important status as there has developed an increasing need (especially in service organisations) to ‘get the most’ from employees, in terms of customer service, for the benefit of the organisation.

4 Organisational departments and functions

26 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

4.7 The Accounting and Finance function The Accounting and Finance function is concerned with the following:

l Financial record keeping of transactions involving monetary inflows or outflows. l Preparing financial statements (the income statement, balance sheet and cash

flow statement) for reporting to external parties such as shareholders. The financial statements are also the starting point for calculating any tax due on business profits.

l Payroll administration Paying wages and salaries and maintaining appropriate income tax and national insurance records.

l Preparing management accounting information and analysis to help managers to plan, control and make decisions.

5 Decentralisation and centralisation Centralisation describes a situation where decision making authority is held predomi- nantly by senior managers within an organisation. Such a situation is common within smaller businesses where the owner/manager takes all the important decisions. Centralisation, however, is not only found in such organisations, as a number of very large organisations, such as banks and some large retailers, are also highly centralised. Little, if any, discretion is given to branch managers, who must simply run their branches in accordance with the procedures established by Head Office. Decentralisation describes the situation where the authority to make decisions is delegated to people at lower levels of the organisation. This often occurs where growth in size and increased complexity make the delegation of significant decision making authority necessary. Decentralisation is a matter of degree and is usually present to varying degrees in most organisations.

Effective delegation has benefits for managers, staff and the organisation as a whole.

5.1 Advantages of decentralisation Coates et al. (1996, pp. 115–6) identify the advantages of decentralisation as follows:

l Specialisation. Managers can develop more detailed and specialised knowledge by concentrating on a limited aspect of the organisation’s operations. This should result in better quality decisions.

l Timeliness. Quicker decisions are possible if it is not necessary to pass decisions up through the hierarchical chain of command. In addition, senior managers’ time is then available for more important decisions affecting the future of the whole organisation.

l Motivation. Having authority to make decisions usually results in greater motivation and commitment and hence improved performance.

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

27 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l Human resource development. Less experienced managers can ‘learn their trade’ without their mistakes jeopardising the entire organisation. The impact of mistakes/ misjudgements is likely to be confined to a limited aspect of the organisation’s operations.

l Organisational segment performance comparison. By dividing the organisation into separate segments, it is possible to evaluate which aspects of operations are performing well and which are not – something not usually possible when the inputs/ outputs are at a more aggregate level.

5.2 Disadvantages of decentralisation Coates et al. (1996, pp. 115–6) also identify the disadvantages of decentralisation as follows:

l Dysfunctional decision making. This occurs where managers take actions which improve the measured performance of their organisational segment, but damage the organisation as a whole. For example, a manager in one department may keep costs down in his/her own department in ways which have an impact on the quality of service provided to other departments.

l Loss of control. There is a danger that senior management may lose control of the organisation, as they become far removed from the detail of underlying operations and unaware of the decisions being made by lower level managers.

l Increased cost of control. Costly management information systems may be necessary to monitor the performance of lower management levels to ensure that delegated decision making authority is being used in the best interests of the organisation.

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

28 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 11 ‘In the interest of overcoming my reluctance to delegate, starting Monday I want you to do all of my worrying for me.’

5.3 Responsibility centres Decentralisation results in the creation of separate responsibility centres – aspects/ areas of the organisation’s operations for which a particular manager is responsible. The main types of responsibility centre in common use are as follows. Cost centre. The manager is assumed to be able to influence significantly the level of cost incurred and will be judged according to how well costs are controlled. There may or may not be revenues associated with the particular aspect of operations concerned, but if there are, the manager is assumed to have no control over these. Managers of cost centres will need regular information to be provided by the accounting system, concerning how individual cost items compare with budget – that is, budget variance and, of course, budgetary planning information, for example, cost targets to be achieved. Revenue centre. The manager is assumed to be able to influence significantly the level of revenue earned and will be judged on the basis of this. Revenue centres are principally intended to be applied to sales operations, where the manager’s responsibilities relate to the generation of income, whether or not there are attributable costs. Managers will need information concerning targets for individual revenue generating units (e.g., products), and also regular feedback information on actual versus budgeted revenues. Profit centre. The manager is assumed to be able to influence significantly both costs and revenues and is judged on the basis of the level of profit generated by the particular aspect of operations concerned. The term profit centre is usually limited to the situation where the manager does not have responsibility for the level of investment in the centre (this decision being made by more senior management). Managers need information concerning both revenues and costs, for example, which products/services are profitable.

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

29 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Investment centre. This is a type of profit centre, but one for which the manager also has significant influence over investment decisions. In such cases, it would be expected that, in addition to the normal profit centre measures (e.g., Return on Sales), profit would be related to the capital invested (e.g., Return on Investment). Managers need the same information as for profit centres and in addition, detailed appraisals of potential investments and control information concerning the level of investment (e.g., working capital levels, namely, inventory, receivables and payables) at any particular point in time.

Activity 4 What do you think would be the appropriate type of responsibility centre for each of the following functions/departments?

l A marketing department l A research and development department l A machinery service and repair department of a factory l The German manufacturing and distribution division of a large multinational

company l A regional sales office of a US company

How would you measure the performance of the manager/s of each centre?

Provide your answer...

Discussion In some organisations, which are departmentalised on the basis of product groups, each product group department will have its own marketing activities. Where, however, an organisation is departmentalised on a functional basis and has a separate marketing department serving all its product groups, this department will incur expenditure on behalf of the whole organisation, but will not have its own revenues. It is likely then to be a cost centre. The same is true of a research and development and a service and repairs department. Research and development is difficult to measure, but this is attempted in many firms by use of such measures as number of patents registered, percentage of sales from recently introduced products and so on. The German manufacturing division of a large multinational company is likely to earn revenues (the level of which it can presumably influence) and incur costs (the level of which it can also influence). It is likely to be a profit centre, or even an investment centre. A regional sales office is likely to be able to influence the level of revenue generated, but the main elements of cost (e.g., sales personnel salaries) are likely to be the result of decisions made by more senior (Head Office) managers. It is likely to be a revenue centre. Responsibility centres should be evaluated according to financial performance (comparison of budgeted and actual costs, revenues and profits as appropriate). It will probably be desirable also to measure various non-financial indicators that are important for each centre achieving its goals – for example, in the case of the service and repairs department, average response time for machine breakdowns, and in the

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

30 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

case of the research and development department, the number of new product or process innovations, and so on.

5.4 The divisionalised organisation The ultimate form of decentralisation occurs when an organisation is separated into a number of investment centres that operate almost as independent businesses, each with its own profit responsibility. The basis of divisionalisation may be according to product (or service), geographical area and so on. Such a divisional structure is illustrated by the common legal form of groups with subsidiary companies. Each division in the organisation will typically have its own functional structure.

5.5 Line and staff relationships The existence of an organisational structure implies that authority and control are exercised from above and pass down through the hierarchy. The relationships that result are known as line relationships. In any organisation, there should be a clear line of authority and responsibility from the top to the bottom of the hierarchy: the ‘scalar chain’ which indicates the line relationships. By contrast, staff relationships exist when a manager gives/receives advice from another organisational member. For example, the Accounting and Finance manager will provide information and analysis to help the Marketing and Production managers make decisions and control their respective operations.

Activity 5 This activity draws together some important ideas you have considered concerning organisation structure. Consider the organisation in which you work, or one with which you are familiar. (Focus on the part of the organisation with which you are most familiar.)

l What is the span of control? l How many layers or levels of management are there? Is your organisation tall or

flat? l Is authority centralised or decentralised? l How clear is the definition of jobs? Do some of them overlap? l To how many people do employees report? Are there single or dual lines of

control?

You may find it difficult to answer these questions, especially if there are dual responsibilities or reporting lines in some areas.

Provide your answer...

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

31 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

6 The organisational environment Organisations exist in an environment – everything that surrounds the organisation physically and socially. The constituents of the organisation’s environment are likely to have an important impact on the management of the organisation. An organisation’s management must systematically analyse its environment in formulating plans to achieve organisational objectives. The major environmental factors impacting on an organisation can be grouped under four headings: political/legal, economic, social/demographic and technological (reflected in the acronym: PEST analysis).

6.1 Political and legal environment Clearly, there are laws that must be complied with, emanating from a number of sources, of which the organisation must be aware. These cover areas such as:

l ways of doing business (e.g., included within contract law); professional negligence (included within the law of tort)

l protection of consumers (e.g., Sale of Goods Act 1979, Consumer Credit Act 1974, 2006)

l safe working environment for employees (health and safety legislation) l confidentiality and use of information held concerning customers or employees (Data

Protection Act 1998) l duties of directors and financial reporting requirements (company law, in particular,

the Companies Act 2006) l minimum wage, equal opportunities and unfair dismissal rules (employment law)

pollution, waste disposal (environmental legislation) l tax liabilities (tax law).

In recent years, the European Union (EU) has become increasingly important for member states in terms of international trade rules. In addition to requiring the removal of trade barriers, the EU requires that:

l there be free movement of capital between countries l governments do not discriminate between companies in different EU countries in

awarding government contracts l financial services can be provided in any EU country l telecommunications organisations be opened up to greater competition l qualifications awarded in one country are recognised in the others.

In addition to the legal framework, government impacts directly on many organisations in a number of ways:

l via taxes or subsidies to discourage/encourage particular activities (e.g., alcohol consumption)

6 The organisational environment

32 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l national and, in particular, European, regulations have impacted on organisations in ways such as product standardisation, anti-discrimination legislation, workers’ rights, etc.

l location incentives (often funded by the European Union) to encourage businesses to locate in particular areas

l by providing barriers to entry (e.g., the requirement to obtain a license to operate) and thus restricting competition in a particular field

l the government may be a major customer l anti-monopoly, competition legislation l as a supplier of infrastructure (e.g., roads), government can influence competition

(e.g., road versus rail freight).

Political change, for example, wars, expropriation or nationalisation, political instability and so on, can also present a major threat to organisational plans.

6.2 Economic environment Economic variables such as inflation, interest rates, savings patterns, economic growth, exchange rates, the levels of taxation and government spending all influence the amount of money people have to spend. This is likely to have an impact on most organisations. Businesses will experience, for example, varying levels of demand for their products or services and charities will experience varying levels of donations, as the amount of money people have to spend fluctuates in response to variations in major economic variables.

6.3 Demographic and social trends impacting on organisations Demography is concerned with the study of data relating to the population and groups within it – births, deaths, diseases and so on – as indicators of the conditions of life in communities. Recent trends in the UK include a fall in the number of young people entering the labour market and an increase in the number of retired people. Such data are used by organisations, especially in the identification of consumer markets, but they are also important for human resource management too. Organisations must monitor demographic changes in their HR planning, especially with regard to recruitment. These changes must be taken into account in considering the best ways to tap into the future talent pool. It will be necessary to assess the current and future labour requirements in terms of both the level and the type of labour. The area from which the labour force is to be drawn must be identified. Once the labour force recruitment area is identified, the size and composition of the available labour force can be determined. The next step then involves a comparison of need as opposed to supply. In view of recent demographic changes, it is likely to be necessary to tap into currently under-utilised labour resources such as older workers and women returning to work after long periods spent bringing up children. HR policies need to be geared towards these requirements, for example, by providing training (e.g., in IT skills), part time working and child care facilities.

6 The organisational environment

33 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

6.4 Sociological factors A number of factors concerning the way society is structured will also be of relevance to many organisations.

Social class An important component of social structure is social class. Social class refers to the hierarchical distinction between individuals or groups in society. The factors that determine class vary from one society to another. The most obvious meaning of this term used to be in relation to the stratum of society into which one was born (aristocratic, middle class, working class) and class still means this to many people. In contemporary capitalist societies, it is common to define class in terms of income, status, education or profession, or a combination of these. An important implication of the existence of such a class structure is that social class can create different customer groups. It is therefore a tool for market segmentation. The social classes are widely used to profile and predict different customer behaviour. Identifying a segment, in which customers share certain characteristics, such as level of income, is useful when developing products for those customers.

Culture Culture refers to a set of shared attitudes, values, goals and practices that characterise a society or a social group within it. Cultural factors also have a significant impact on customer behaviour as culture is the most fundamental influence on a person’s wants and behaviour. As with social class, culture can create customer groups and is therefore important for marketing. For example, there has been a cultural shift towards greater concern about health and fitness, which has created opportunities for serving customers who wish to buy:

l low calorie foods l health club memberships l exercise equipment l activity- or health-related holidays.

Similarly, the increased desire for leisure time has resulted in increased demand for convenience products and services such as microwave ovens, ready meals and direct marketing service businesses such as telephone banking and insurance. Each culture contains sub-cultures – particular groups of people with shared values. Sub- cultures can include nationalities, religions, and racial groups of people sharing the same geographical location. Sometimes a sub-culture will create a substantial and distinctive market segment of its own. For example, the ‘youth culture’ or ‘club culture’ has quite distinct values and buying characteristics from the much older ‘grey generation’.

6 The organisational environment

34 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 12 ‘This looks good. It’s a six hour special on how society is becoming too sedentary.’

Cultural shifts also impact on other functions within an organisation. For example, there has been a dramatic increase in the number of women participating in the workforce and this raises a number of potential (and actual) discrimination issues, for instance, in terms of promotion and seniority and sexual harassment. HR policies must attempt to guard against these. Many organisations are responding by, for example:

l introducing flexible working hours to help women cope with the demands of career and family responsibilities

l providing education and training for managers and the workforce to encourage equal opportunities and discourage discrimination.

Another important cultural shift is the increasing concern for the physical environment among organisations’ various stakeholders (employees, customers, investors, local community and so on). Organisations are responding in a number of ways:

l by introducing ‘green products’ to exploit the opportunity, for example, environmen- tally friendly deodorants, washing powder and cleaning agents

l by exercising greater care in disposing of industrial waste l by reducing their carbon footprint by, for example, sourcing raw materials locally,

not using air freight, using video conferencing instead of executive travel, using energy efficient appliances, etc.

l by social and environmental reporting. Increasingly, large companies are providing information (which is not currently required by law or accounting regulations) on environmental policies in their annual financial reports.

Many companies now present a corporate social responsibility report, although the content varies greatly between companies. This report is usually posted on the company’s website.

6 The organisational environment

35 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

In addition to such voluntary responses based on enlightened self-interest, organisations are increasingly needing to familiarise themselves with environmental legislation and direct government action, for example:

l the congestion charge in inner London l fines for breaching pollution guidelines l the landfill tax on hazardous waste.

6.5 Technology and its impact In recent years, information systems (IS) and information technology (IT) have had a profound impact on most organisations. So pervasive is IT that IT skills are now essential for employees in virtually all organisations. IT has:

l facilitated flatter organisations and wider spans of control l made possible faster, more accurate processing of larger volumes of data l provided access to more – and more up to date – information for managers l provided computer modelling (e.g., simulations) which can improve the quality of

planning and decision making l made possible the provision of control information to senior managers in real time l improved customer service by provision of electronic data interchange (EDI)

between organisations, customer databases, extranets and so on.

Perhaps even more dramatic than the improvements in information processing are the improvements in communications that IT has provided. E-mail provides instant worldwide messaging; online conferencing enables collaboration between people in geographi- cally distant locations; voice mail allows communication between people whose working time schedules do not coincide; video conferencing allows face to face meetings without the need for expensive travel. IT has also changed the relationship between employers and employees and the nature of work, for example in terms of:

l home working (telecommuting) is commonplace, providing more flexible working arrangements and reducing the time and cost of travelling to work

l greater visibility provided to management, allowing increased monitoring and control.

Activity 6

(a) Explain (spend no more than about ten minutes on this) why it is necessary for an organisation to undertake a PEST analysis.

(b) Give three examples of actions that might result from such an analysis.

Provide your answer...

Discussion Environmental changes may have a significant impact on the organisation’s ability to achieve its objectives, including, possibly, survival. Major environmental changes,

6 The organisational environment

36 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

however, can often be anticipated if the environment is systematically monitored and analysed, and appropriate action can be taken to safeguard against threats and/or exploit opportunities arising. Examples of possible actions in response to an environmental analysis include:

l developing a new product range based on emerging technology ahead of the competition

l developing staff education and training programmes in anticipation of future skills shortages in the local labour market

l planning a programme of redundancies based on anticipation of a serious economic downturn.

Conclusion This course has provided an introduction to the nature of organisations. You should now have an appreciation of the way in which different organisations are structured and of the different components within an organisation. You should also have an understanding of the main environmental factors that impact on organisations, including political/legal, economic, social/demographic and technological factors.

Keep on learning

Conclusion

37 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Study another free course There are more than 800 courses on OpenLearn for you to choose from on a range of subjects. Find out more about all our free courses.

Take your studies further Find out more about studying with The Open University by visiting our online prospectus. If you are new to university study, you may be interested in our Access Courses or Certificates.

What’s new from OpenLearn? Sign up to our newsletter or view a sample.

For reference, full URLs to pages listed above:

OpenLearn – www.open.edu/openlearn/free-courses

Visiting our online prospectus – www.open.ac.uk/courses

Access Courses – www.open.ac.uk/courses/do-it/access

Certificates – www.open.ac.uk/courses/certificates-he

Newsletter – www.open.edu/openlearn/about-openlearn/subscribe-the-openlearn-newsletter

Glossary anti-monopoly, competition legislation Laws which seek to maintain the benefits of competition (in order to protect con- sumers), by preventing the emergence of monopolies in a particular market.

balance sheet An accounting report summarising an organisation’s assets and liabilities.

barriers to entry Factors that prevent competitors from entering a particular market.

carbon footprint The total amount of carbon emissions (greenhouse gasses), that result from an organisation’s activities.

cash flow statement

Glossary

38 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

An accounting report showing the principal types of cash inflows and outflows during a period and any cash surplus or deficit arising.

cooperative firms/social enterprises Organisations which are typically engaged in commercial activity, but whose primary purpose is social (for example, to provide employment) rather than earning profit for the owner/s. Such organisations are typically owned by their employees and/or customers.

Cost centre. A production or service location, function, activity or item of equipment for which costs are accumulated.A responsibility centre (e.g. division, department) where local man- agement has responsibility for and is called to account on the basis of costs (or expenses) only.

Culture The set of shared attitudes, values, goals and practices that characterise a society or social groups within it. Culture is a term which describes the psychology, attitudes, experiences, beliefs and values of an organisation. It has also been defined as the specific collection of values and norms that are shared by people and groups in an organization and that control the way they interact with each other and with stake- holders outside the organisation.

databases A computer-based store of organised data, structured so that it can be used to deliver information to more than one application.

delayering The process of removing layers in the management hierarchy, so that ‘tall’ organisations become flatter, with fewer hierarchical levels.

Demography The study of data relating to the population, for example, birth and death rates and population age profiles.

divisionalisation The process of dividing an organisation into a number of separate investment centres/ business segments (divisions) that operate almost as independent businesses.

effectively Achieving the specified outcomes; the extent to which specified outcomes are achieved.

efficiently Achieving specified outputs with the minimum necessary inputs (for a given quality specification).

electronic data interchange (EDI) The exchange of information directly between separate information systems (usually in different organisations). It is the basis of electronic commerce.

empowerment Giving employees power, in order to increase their self-confidence and motivation in order to improve their performance in pursuing organisational objectives.

extranets A form of intranet, accessible by specified individuals who may be outside a particular organisation, for example as customers or suppliers.

‘For-profit’ (commercial) organisations Commercial organisations whose primary purpose is to earn profit for the owner/s.

Glossary

39 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

income statement An accounting report summarising revenues earned, expenditure incurred and any surplus/deficit of revenue over expenditure during a certain period.

Investment centre. A type of profit centre for which the manager also has significant influence over the amount of capital investment and is therefore also responsible for profit in relation to capital employed.

lead time The time between a customer placing an order and the product or service being delivered.

line relationships The vertical relationships (in the organisational hierarchy) between managers and subordinates.

Marketing Concept The combination of factors which marketing managers take into account when marketing a product or service, namely: product, price, promotion and place.

mechanistic structures Tall, hierarchical, bureaucratic organisation structures, with centralisation of authority, formalisation of procedures and high levels of specialisation.

Middle line The group of middle managers whose role is to convert the objectives and broad plans of the Strategic Apex into operational plans that can be carried out by the organisation's workers.

‘Not-for–profit’ organisations Organisations that exist to pursue a particular social objective rather than to earn profit for the owner/s.

online conferencing A computer based communication system which enables collaboration between people in geographically distant locations.

Operating core The people who do the basic work of providing the products or delivering the services.

organic structures Flat organisation structures, with decentralisation of authority and low levels of specialisation.

PEST analysis An analysis of the organisation’s Political/legal, Economic, Social/demographic and Technological environment factors (hence the acronym PEST). This analysis is undertaken as part of the organisation's long- term planning process.

Profit centre. A division or department where local management has responsibility for revenue and costs, and is called to account on the basis of the difference between them (e.g. profit, loss, surplus, deficit).

Purchasing Mix The combination of factors which purchasing managers take into account when procuring goods or services, namely: quantity, quality, price and delivery.

responsibility centres

Glossary

40 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

An organisational segment such as a department or a function which a particular manager is accountable for.

Return on Investment Profit expressed as a percentage of the capital invested in an enterprise.

Return on Sales Profit earned expressed as a percentage of sales revenue.

Revenue centre. An organisational segment for which a particular manager is held accountable in terms of revenue earned.

social and environmental reporting The provision of information about an organisation’s social and environmental policies in its annual financial report.

social class The hierarchical distinction between individuals or groups in society. In contemporary capitalist society, it is common to define class in terms of income, education or profession –or a combination of these.

social responsibility objectives Objectives of an organisation relating to wider needs (for example, protecting the environment, provision of employment) rather than just the needs of the owners/ providers of funds.

staff relationships The horizontal relationship between a manager and another organisational member to/ from whom the manager gives or receives information or advice.

stakeholders Individuals or groups who have an interest in the activities of an organisation (they may be influenced by it) and may also have the power to influence the future course of the organisation (such as shareholders or employees). However, stakeholders will differ greatly in their degree of interest and/or influence.

Strategic apex The highest management level in an organisation, whose purpose is to ensure that the organisation follows its mission and manages its relationship with its environment.

Support staff The administrative personnel whose purpose is to provide services to other parts of the organisation.

Technostructure The group of technical/professional staff concerned with the best way of doing a job, specifying output criteria and ensuring that personnel have appropriate skills.

telecommuting Working from home, facilitated by information technology enabled communication with colleagues.

transaction costs The costs of engaging in economic activity resulting from an organisation’s relationship to the market.

video conferencing People in distant locations conducting conferences, through the use of computer networks to transmit audio and video data.

Glossary

41 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

working capital A measure of a company's liquidity and financial health. It encompasses short term assets (stock, debtors, cash) as well as less short term liabilities (creditors) by which they are financed; often referred to as net current assets. Working capital is generally calculated as: Working capital = current capital - current liabilities.

References Table of statutes Great Britain Companies Act 2006. Elizabeth II. Chapter 46. (2006) London: The Stationery Office. Great Britain. Consumer Credit Act 1974. Elizabeth II. Chapter 39. (1974) London: The Stationery Office. Great Britain. Consumer Credit Act 2006. Elizabeth II. Chapter 14.(2006) London: The Stationery Office. Great Britain. Data Protection Act 1998. Elizabeth II. Chapter 29. (1998) London: The Stationery Office. Great Britain. Sale of Goods Act 1979. Elizabeth II. Chapter 54.(1979) London: The Stationery Office. Publications Anthony, R.N. (1965) Planning and Control Systems: A Framework for Analysis, Boston, MA, Division of Research, Harvard Graduate School of Business. Bentley, T.J. (1998) Managing Information: Avoiding Overload, London, Chartered Institute of Management Accountants, Kogan Page. Chandler, A.D. (1962) Strategy and Structure, Boston, MA, MIT Press. Coates, J.B., Rickwood, C. and Stacey, R.J. (1996) Management Accounting for Strategic and Operational Control, Oxford, Butterworth-Heinemann. Davenport, T.H. and Prusak, L. (1997) Working Knowledge, Boston, MA, Harvard Business School Press. Emmanuel, C., Otley, D. and Merchant, K. (1990) Accounting for Management Control (2nd edn), London, Chapman and Hall. Fayol, H. (1949) General and Industrial Management, London, Pitman. Harrison, G.L. (1978) ‘The role of the management accountant in the marketing function of business: case observations and analyses’, Research paper no. 157, School of Economics and Financial Studies, Macquarie University. Johnson, H.T. and Kaplan, R.S. (1987) Relevance Lost: The Rise and Fall of Management Accounting, Boston, MA, Harvard Business School Press. Kotler, P. (1967) Marketing Management, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, Prentice Hall. Mintzberg, H. (1978) ‘Patterns in Strategy Formation’, Management Science, vol. 24, no. 9, pp. 934–48. Mintzberg, H. (1979) The Structuring of Organisations, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, Prentice Hall. Porter, M.E. (1985) Competitive Advantage: Creating and Sustaining Superior Perfor- mance, New York, Free Press.

References

42 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Rockart, J.F. (1979) ‘Chief executives define their own data needs’, Harvard Business Review, vol. 57, no. 2, pp. 238–41.

Acknowledgements This course was written by Dr Mike Lucas. Except for third party materials and otherwise stated (see terms and conditions), this content is made available under a Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 4.0 Licence. The material acknowledged below is Proprietary and used under licence (not subject to Creative Commons Licence). Grateful acknowledgement is made to the following sources for permission to reproduce material in this course: Course image: Ken Teegardin in Flickr made available under Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 2.0 Licence. Images Figure 1: Mintzberg, H. (1979) ‘Five basic parts of organisations’, The Structure of Organizations, Pearson Education, Inc. Illustrations Section 4.5: © John Morris, www.CartoonStock.com Section 5.2: © Mike Shapiro, www.CartoonStock.com Section 6.4: © Mike Shapiro, www.CartoonStock.com Every effort has been made to contact copyright owners. If any have been inadvertently overlooked, the publishers will be pleased to make the necessary arrangements at the first opportunity. Don't miss out: If reading this text has inspired you to learn more, you may be interested in joining the millions of people who discover our free learning resources and qualifications by visiting The Open University - www.open.edu/openlearn/free-courses

Acknowledgements

43 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Business and Business Environment/Support/Organisations_and_business environment(3).pdf

Organisations and management

accounting

About this free course

This free course is an adapted extract from the Open University course B292 Management accounting http://www.open.ac.uk/courses/modules/b292

This version of the content may include video, images and interactive content that may not be optimised for your device.

You can experience this free course as it was originally designed on OpenLearn, the home of free learning from The Open University: www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content- section-0.

There you’ll also be able to track your progress via your activity record, which you can use to demonstrate your learning.

Copyright © 2016 The Open University

Intellectual property

Unless otherwise stated, this resource is released under the terms of the Creative Commons Licence v4.0 http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/4.0/deed.en_GB. Within that The Open University interprets this licence in the following way: www.open.edu/openlearn/about-openlearn/frequently-asked-questions-on-openlearn. Copyright and rights falling outside the terms of the Creative Commons Licence are retained or controlled by The Open University. Please read the full text before using any of the content.

We believe the primary barrier to accessing high-quality educational experiences is cost, which is why we aim to publish as much free content as possible under an open licence. If it proves difficult to release content under our preferred Creative Commons licence (e.g. because we can’t afford or gain the clearances or find suitable alternatives), we will still release the materials for free under a personal end- user licence.

This is because the learning experience will always be the same high quality offering and that should always be seen as positive – even if at times the licensing is different to Creative Commons.

When using the content you must attribute us (The Open University) (the OU) and any identified author in accordance with the terms of the Creative Commons Licence.

The Acknowledgements section is used to list, amongst other things, third party (Proprietary), licensed content which is not subject to Creative Commons licensing. Proprietary content must be used (retained) intact and in context to the content at all times.

The Acknowledgements section is also used to bring to your attention any other Special Restrictions which may apply to the content. For example there may be times when the Creative Commons Non- Commercial Sharealike licence does not apply to any of the content even if owned by us (The Open University). In these instances, unless stated otherwise, the content may be used for personal and non- commercial use.

We have also identified as Proprietary other material included in the content which is not subject to Creative Commons Licence. These are OU logos, trading names and may extend to certain photographic and video images and sound recordings and any other material as may be brought to your attention.

Unauthorised use of any of the content may constitute a breach of the terms and conditions and/or intellectual property laws.

We reserve the right to alter, amend or bring to an end any terms and conditions provided here without notice.

All rights falling outside the terms of the Creative Commons licence are retained or controlled by The Open University.

Head of Intellectual Property, The Open University

2 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Contents Introduction 5 Learning Outcomes 6 1 What is an organisation? 7

1.1 Mintzberg’s five components of organisation 7 1.2 Why do organisations exist? 8 1.3 What types of organisation are there? 9

2 What is organisational structure? 11 2.1 Principles of organisational structure 12 2.2 Tall versus flat organisations 14

3 Forms of organisational structure 16 3.1 Functional structure 16 3.2 Product or service structure 17 3.3 Geographical structure 17 3.4 Matrix structure 18 3.5 Project teams 19 3.6 Hybrid structure 20 3.7 Recent trends in organisational design 21

4 Organisational departments and functions 22 4.1 Typical business organisation departments and functions 22 4.2 The Production function 22 4.3 The Research and Development function 23 4.4 The Purchasing function 24 4.5 The Marketing function 24 4.6 The Human Resources function 26 4.7 The Accounting and Finance function 27

5 Decentralisation and centralisation 27 5.1 Advantages of decentralisation 27 5.2 Disadvantages of decentralisation 28 5.3 Responsibility centres 29 5.4 The divisionalised organisation 31 5.5 Line and staff relationships 31

6 The organisational environment 32 6.1 Political and legal environment 32 6.2 Economic environment 33 6.3 Demographic and social trends impacting on organisations 33 6.4 Sociological factors 34 6.5 Technology and its impact 36

Conclusion 37 Keep on learning 37 Glossary 38

3 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

References 42 Acknowledgements 43

4 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Introduction Management accounting is concerned with providing information and analysis to managers to help them plan, evaluate and control activities, in order to achieve an organisation’s objectives. Whereas financial accounting is concerned with reporting on the past financial performance of an organisation, management accounting is essentially concerned with improving its future performance. In order to understand the concepts and principles of management accounting it is necessary first to have some appreciation of what managers do! This, in turn, requires an understanding of the organisations in which managers work – and of the external environment in which these organisations exist and operate. This OpenLearn free course, therefore, looks at the nature of organisations, specifically their objectives and structure. Organisational objectives and structure are key elements of organisations and they determine management functions and responsibilities within the organisation. The course also considers the main environmental factors (economic, social, political, legal and technological) that impact on organisational behaviour. This OpenLearn course is an adapted extract from the Open University course B292 Management accounting. Tell us what you think! We’d love to hear from you to help us improve our free learning offering through OpenLearn by filling out this short survey.

Introduction

5 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Learning Outcomes After studying this course, you should be able to: l understand the nature and purpose of different types of organisations (commercial, voluntary, public sector and

so on) l describe the different ways in which organisations may be structured l understand basic concepts of organisational structure l describe the main departments or functions of a business organisation l explain the advantages and disadvantages of centralised and decentralised organisations.

1 What is an organisation? An ‘organisation’ is a group of individuals working together to achieve one or more objectives. Although organisations have been defined differently by different theorists, virtually all definitions refer to five common features:

1 they are composed of individuals and groups of individuals 2 they are oriented towards achieving collective goals 3 they consist of different functions 4 the functions need to be coordinated 5 they exist independently of individual members who may come and go.

1.1 Mintzberg’s five components of organisation Mintzberg (1979, p. 24) suggested that all organisations consist of five components, as shown in Figure 1.

Figure 1 Mintzberg’s five parts of the organisation

At the top of the organisation is a Strategic apex the purpose of which is to ensure the organisation follows its mission and manages its relationship with its environment. The

1 What is an organisation?

7 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

individuals comprising the apex, for example, the Chief Executive Officer (CEO), are responsible to owners, government agencies, unions, communities and so on. Below the apex is the Middle line, a group of managers who are concerned with converting the objectives and broad plans of the Strategic apex into operational plans that can be carried out by the workers. As organisations grow and become more complex, they usually develop a separate group of people who are concerned with the best way of doing a job, specifying output criteria (e.g., quality standards) and ensuring that personnel have appropriate skills (e.g., by organising training programmes). This group of analysts is referred to by Mintzberg as the Technostructure. The organisation also adds other administrative functions that provide services to itself, for example legal advice, public relations, mailroom, cafeteria and so on. These are the Support staff. Finally, at the bottom of the organisation, is the Operating core. These are the people who do the basic work of producing the products or delivering the services. Mintzberg’s generic organisational model also illustrates an important principle of organisation structure: the separation of direction and management, whereby those people who decide the mission and general direction of the organisation are different (other than in a very small organisation) from those who handle the implementation of plans and subsequent controlling of operations to ensure that objectives are met. Senior managers (the Strategic apex) will establish long-term organisational objectives and policies through which goals are to be achieved. Middle managers (the Middle line) will be responsible for translating the necessarily broad and general strategic plans into detailed action plans, specifying managerial responsibilities for particular tasks and how resources are to be allocated. These middle managers will also be responsible for monitoring activities and taking action to ensure that resources are being used efficiently and effectively to achieve organisational objectives.

Efficiency refers to the relationship between inputs and outputs. An activity or process is efficient, if it produces a given output with the minimum of inputs necessary. Effectiveness refers to the extent to which goals/objectives are actually achieved.

Other important principles of organisational structure are discussed later in Sections 2 and 3.

1.2 Why do organisations exist? Organisations exist because groups of people working together can achieve more than the sum of the achievements which the individuals in the organisation could produce when working separately. For example, one person might struggle all day to carry a piano upstairs, whereas a team of four people, each taking one corner, may need to put in much less than a quarter of the effort of one person to complete the task (Coates et al., 1996, p. 19). Although such cooperation is beneficial, if individuals pull in different directions, the result is counter-productive. Thus coordination is necessary and this is a fundamental role of management, as will be discussed in a later section of this session. It can also be argued that organisations exist as a result of the impact of transaction costs, because they can arrange transactions between their different parts at a lower total cost than that available in the open market. In crude terms, it may be cheaper to make or do something ‘in house’ because this cuts out the time consuming process of negotiating

1 What is an organisation?

8 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

terms – and renegotiating them every time your requirements change. Before the Industrial Age, it was common for artisans/craftsmen to work individually from home, producing various products, which merchants would purchase from these individuals and sell to consumers. All transactions were conducted through market exchange without the need for formal organisations. As economic development gained pace, however, it became clear that it was more efficient to organise production internally within a firm rather than undertake each transaction externally through the market. The latter process involved substantial costs in terms of time that had to be spent investigating suppliers, detailing specifications, negotiating/renegotiating contracts, checking that agreed terms had been met and so on.

1.3 What types of organisation are there? Organisations can be classified in different ways. One way is according to their over- arching purpose, or primary objective. Broadly, organisations may be classified as ‘for- profit’ (i.e., commercial) or ‘not-for-profit’ entities. ‘For-profit’ (commercial) organisa- tions may have several different objectives. For a very long time, it was generally accepted that maximising the wealth of the owners and continuing in existence were the primary objectives of profit seeking organisations. However, as organisations also aim, for example, to provide goods and services to customers and employment to employees, it is perhaps more reasonable to suggest that increasing, rather than maximising the wealth of owners, is a more fitting objective. ‘Not-for–profit’ organisations comprise a large variety of organisations including charities, clubs, cooperative firms/social enterprises and public sector organisations. Public sector organisations are owned, funded and run by central or local government. They include:

l public hospitals l the armed forces (military) l most schools and universities l government departments.

These organisations exist to provide services which, for various reasons, it is considered impractical or undesirable for the commercial sector to provide. Whereas commercial organisations, charities and social enterprises must generate sufficient funds from their activities to sustain themselves on a continuing basis, public sector organisations are funded by government. Nevertheless, constraints on government expenditure mean that resources are limited. Consequently, economic scarcity requires that virtually all organisations be run effectively and efficiently. As a result, many of the management principles employed by the commercial sector are also employed in the not- for-profit sector, requiring extensive use of management accounting in all sectors. A traditional view of differences between sectors is illustrated in Figure 2. However, these distinctions are becoming blurred, as indicated by the overlapping circles. Commercial organisations are increasingly pursuing social responsibility objectives, while not-for- profit organisations are increasingly adopting commercial criteria to ensure the sound financial management of scarce resources.

Maximisation of shareholder value has long been the publicly stated objective of most business enterprises. It is likely, however, partly as a result of the global financial crises

1 What is an organisation?

9 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

that began in 2008, that the publicly stated objectives will be expanded to embrace more stakeholders, such as employees and the local community.

Figure 2 Organisations highlighting differences between sectors

Activity 1 Think of an organisation that you know well.

l In which sector or sectors from Figure 2 do you feel your organisation most comfortably fits?

l Which factors (profit, accountability, commitment) exert pressure on it or influence its objectives?

1 What is an organisation?

10 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Provide your answer...

Discussion You may have decided that your organisation sits clearly inside one of the circles or, more likely, you will have sited it in an intermediate position – operating for commercial purposes, but anxious to satisfy other criteria such as accountability to a wider public. For example, there has been a rise in the number of investment companies which use not only financial but also ethical criteria to decide in which organisations to invest. Such criteria could include the environmental impact of the production processes used by the companies in question, or the working conditions and wages of their employees. Another example of the mixture of the pressures that can affect organisations could be taken from the social care sector: a organisation in this sector might be keen to provide an excellent service to local people, but it could also have to operate on commercial principles in managing costs in order to compete with more cost effective providers.

2 What is organisational structure? The term organisational structure refers to the relationships between the various functions and positions in an organisation. Structure determines authority and responsibility for particular tasks/activities. It also specifies the routes of communication between different parts of the organisation. Organisational structure therefore has important implications for the design of management accounting systems. For example, some organisations are highly decentralised, with decision making authority delegated to relatively junior managers at lower levels in the organisational hierarchy. In this case, a major role of the organisation’s management accounting system will be to monitor the outcomes and provide feedback to senior managers about the performance of those who have the decision making authority. Such a role will not be necessary in a highly centralised organisation, where senior managers make all the important decisions.

Theories of organisational structure With the emergence of large industrial enterprises in the nineteenth century, management theorists began to consider how organisations should be designed and managed. As you will read later in this session, early organisational theorists such as Henri Fayol (1949) attempted to derive universal prescriptions for the optimal design of organisations. More recently, theorists have emphasised the contingent nature of optimal organisational design – depending on variables such as size, production technology, degree of stability in the organisation’s business environment, nature of competition in the industry and so on. These factors are assumed to influence, for example, whether organisations are ‘tall’ or ‘flat’, centralised or decentralised in terms of decision making and so on. (These terms are discussed later.)

Ultimately, organisational structure is a means of influencing and controlling the behaviour of the individuals who work in the organisation. Structure is used to assign authority and responsibility to individuals and hold them accountable for the achievement of specific tasks or objectives (Emmanuel et al., 1990, p. 38). Management accounting is an

2 What is organisational structure?

11 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

important part of this process as it provides managers with the information to carry out the various activities for which they are responsible. It also measures and monitors their performance to ensure that the organisation achieves its objectives.

A good example of a management accounting technique employed widely for organisational planning and control purposes is budgeting.

The sort of information managers need to undertake various activities and the way their performance is measured/monitored will depend on the way in which the organisation is structured.

2.1 Principles of organisational structure Certain principles are basic to the operation of any organisation:

Specialisation The work of the organisation is divided up into separate activities or tasks and particular individuals concentrate on specific tasks or activities. This enables the application of specialised knowledge and so improves organisational efficiency and effectiveness.

Coordination If an organisation’s activities are to be separated into different areas or operations, it will be necessary to ensure that the various actions are coordinated, that is, consistent with each other and working towards the same organisational objectives. This is a very important task of management. The management hierarchy or ‘chain of command’ facilitates the coordination of various departments and their activities.

Management principles of the hierarchy of authority Management theorists (notably Henri Fayol, 1949) have, over the years, developed several principles relating to the hierarchy of authority for coordinating activities. Some of the most important are:

l Unity of Command. Every person should receive orders and be accountable to one and only one superior. If people receive orders from more than one superior, conflict and confusion may well result.

l The Scalar Chain. There should be a clear line of authority from top to bottom, linking all managers at all levels.

l The Responsibility and Authority Principle. If an organisational member is allocated responsibility, then that person should also be given the necessary authority to carry out the tasks necessary – including the right to ask other people to undertake particular tasks. A manager should not be given responsibility without the necessary authority, but conversely delegation of authority implies responsibility and the need for accountability.

2 What is organisational structure?

12 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Span of control refers to the number of subordinates directly reporting to a manager or supervisor.

l Span of Control. There is a limit to the number of activities or people that can be supervised effectively by one person. What constitutes an effective span of control will be determined by a number of factors, including:

l the similarity of tasks/functions undertaken (the more similar, the greater the potential effective span of control)

l the proximity of the tasks to each other and to the supervisor (the closer the proximity, the greater the potential effective span of control)

l the complexity of the tasks (the more complex, the smaller the potential effective span of control)

l the direction and control needed by subordinates (the more direction and control needed, the smaller the potential effective span of control).

Activity 2 Consider the organisation where you (or a close friend or relative) work or have worked.

l What is the span of control of your immediate manager? l What is the span of control of her or his manager? l Do you think they are appropriate, bearing in mind the ability of either person to

monitor what is going on in the organisation?

Provide your answer...

Discussion The appropriateness of a span of control may depend on the extent of the delegation that can be exercised by managers (i.e., entrusting the responsibility for tasks to someone else) and also on reporting mechanisms within the organisation. Many organisations have introduced systems of regular meetings between managers and staff at which SMART objectives are set and monitored. SMART objectives are:

l Specific l Measurable l Achievable l Realistic l Time-bound (i.e., have a defined time scale associated with their achievement).

If objectives are SMART, managers should be able to tell whether or not they have been achieved. The appropriateness of the span of control will then be related to the number of people who can realistically be monitored in this way and the frequency with which monitoring takes place.

2 What is organisational structure?

13 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

2.2 Tall versus flat organisations Where there is a large number of levels in the management hierarchy, the organisation is said to be ‘tall’. This will tend to result in narrow spans of control. Where there is a small number of levels in the hierarchy, the organisation is said to be ‘flat’. Flat organisations will tend to have wide spans of control. Figure 3 shows a comparison of tall and flat organisation structures.

Figure 3 Tall and flat organisations

In recent years, there has been a trend towards delayering, whereby tall organisations have tended to become flat organisations by the removal of various levels in the hierarchy. This has been facilitated by:

(a) Information technology, which has reduced the need for many middle management jobs, which were largely concerned with processing information to facilitate control within the organisational hierarchy.

(b) The management philosophy of empowerment, whereby people at lower levels have been delegated authority to take actions and make decisions which would previously have been the domain of middle managers

Changes in organisation structures have led to changes in approach to management and vice versa.

The advantages of delayering are:

(a) A significant reduction in costs as middle managers’ salary costs are removed. (b) Increased motivation as people at lower levels are given power/discretion to make

decisions. Improved performance is likely to be a consequence of increased motivation.

2 What is organisational structure?

14 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

(c) Improved, faster communication between senior management and operational levels – increasingly important in a faster changing, more uncertain and increasingly competitive external environment.

There are also disadvantages to delayering, the principal one being a possible loss of control. Middle managers are often necessary to translate the inevitably broad and general plans of senior management into operational plans and actions that can be implemented. Senior managers may have only a hazy understanding of what is going on at the operational level and much is thereby entrusted to relatively junior people (Coates et al., 1996, p. 116).

Activity 3

l How will a tall organisational structure, in contrast with a flat one, impact on the span of control and the speed of information flows through the organisation?

l What do you think are the advantages and disadvantages of flat organisations?

Provide your answer...

Discussion In tall organisations, managers have smaller spans of control (i.e., fewer people reporting directly to them). This reduces the number of people they have to manage, but means it takes longer for information to travel through the layers of the organisation. In flat organisations, the opposite is true: communication can be quicker because of fewer layers, but the spans of control are larger. In recent years, tall organisations have tended to be associated with large bureaucracies. Communication will be formal and middle managers may be in a position to use information as a device to retain control. On the other hand, smaller spans of control may mean that managers have more time to manage. Furthermore, there are more explicit career paths, with opportunities for promotion. In flat organisations, the opposite is true: communication can be quicker because of fewer layers, but the spans of control are larger. In recent years, tall organisations have tended to be associated with large bureaucracies. Communication will be formal and middle managers may be in a position to use information as a device to retain control. On the other hand, smaller spans of control may mean that managers have more time to manage. Furthermore, there are more explicit career paths, with opportunities for promotion. Flat organisations have developed because there is a belief that communication is impaired by additional levels of management. Flatter organisations are thought to be able to react to change more quickly. Managers may be forced to delegate if their span of control is enlarged. This can be motivating for those to whom work is delegated. On the other hand, career paths are less explicit: employees may have to look sideways or even outside the organisation for career development opportunities.

2 What is organisational structure?

15 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

3 Forms of organisational structure It is no easy task to design and develop a structure. Many organisations continuously debate whether to structure around products, geography, common tasks or information. It is, however, possible to distinguish six important forms of organisational structure:

1 functional structure 2 product or service structure 3 geographical structure 4 matrix structure 5 project team 6 hybrid structure

Each of these forms is now explained in turn.

3.1 Functional structure As you can see from Figure 4, in a functional structure people are grouped according to the type of job they do.

Figure 4 A functional structure

This structure may be appropriate when people within functional departments need to communicate regularly with each other. For example, in a marketing department, the marketing director will coordinate the activities of marketing specialists in fields such as promotion, advertising, product design, market research, and packaging. Although there is a need for communication with all the other parts of the company, the bulk of the information exchange and communication is likely to be within the functional areas, so it makes sense to group these people together. Functional structures, however, can have disadvantages.

l Career paths tend to develop through functions and this can reduce managers’ awareness of other issues facing the organisation. The organisation will not develop many generalists this way (e.g., people who know about marketing and operations or finance and HR). This will expose the organisation to significant risks, as managers will not have an overview of its operations.

l Staff may work for the benefit of their department and not the organisation as a whole.

3 Forms of organisational structure

16 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l Many members of staff may never meet an external customer and may not therefore have a customer service orientation.

3.2 Product or service structure

Figure 5 Product and service structures

At first glance this looks similar to the functional structure, but here staff members are grouped together on product or service lines. This very often happens in larger organisations. For example, a big accountancy firm may group staff by the industry served or a public education department may group staff around different areas of work (e.g., pre- school children, primary, secondary and special needs). Each product or service group will have its own production and service people and also its own accounting and personnel staff. A product or service structure can be more responsive to customer needs and better at motivating staff. However, there is a danger of creating independent units, which can be difficult to manage as they assume the attitude, ‘we know what the customer wants, so stop interfering!’. It can also mean that professional expertise becomes fragmented. For example, if each product line has its own small accounting team (perhaps just one person) this may reduce career opportunities for specialists.

3.3 Geographical structure

3 Forms of organisational structure

17 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 6 A geographical structure

A variation on the product or service structure is to group staff by physical location – for example, by region, country or continent. This has advantages for international organisations because there are likely to be big differences in markets, languages and cultures. National issues are usually best identified locally. However, there are several disadvantages to structuring by location:

l information flows between staff in different locations can be costly and problematic l there may be duplication of activities, typically, support functions such as accounting,

human resources and information technology l it may be difficult to achieve integrated strategies across a number of different

countries.

3.4 Matrix structure We have seen that functional, product or service, and geographical structures all have disadvantages. In a matrix structure, each person has two reporting lines: (i) to the functional head; and (ii) to a project, product, service or region manager. These dual reporting lines are permanent. Advocates of matrix structures believe that they combine the advantages of both functional and product or service structures. Figure 7 is an example of a matrix structure.

Figure 7 An example of how a matrix structure might work

In Figure 7, there is a Finance function and everyone in it will report to the Finance Director. However, each product (1, 2, 3, 4) will have its own independent finance team who also will report to the relevant product or service manager. Hence each group has two people to whom they report – a functional manager and a product/service manager. There are, however, problems associated with a matrix structure. First, heads of reporting lines may need to meet regularly to decide how to apportion each person’s time. What

3 Forms of organisational structure

18 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

happens if the Finance Director and the Service 1 manager disagree about what the Service 1 finance team should be doing? Staff may feel uncomfortable with the change and uncertainty implicit in a matrix structure. In practice, matrix structures can be very difficult to manage. Dual reporting can lead to conflict, confusion, and overlapping responsibilities. This can then result in loss of accountability. There could be a number of people who are responsible if Service 1 budgets are delivered late. The person responsible could be the Finance Director who changed the format, or the Service 1 manager who would not agree a sales budget, or the Service 1 finance team who took advantage of the conflict between the Finance Director and the Service 1 manager to get more time to do the task. Matrix structures can suffer from low responsiveness, slow decision making and high levels of internal political conflict. On the other hand, they can offer a way of forcing people to work flexibly across functional boundaries (which can result in some productivity benefits for the organisation and outweigh the potential disadvantages). Organisations such as Texas Instruments, Shell, NASA, NCR, ITT and Monsanto Chemical have attributed some of their success to the matrix structure, which, in their opinion, helped them respond rapidly to customers’ needs.

3.5 Project teams Some organisations carry out the bulk of their work through project teams, which are often set up to react to changing circumstances and allow the organisation to respond quickly. They are an example of what are called organic structures, as distinct from the mechanistic structures that have been described so far. Project teams draw staff from across the organisation, seconded on a full or part time basis. The latter can be very stressful for the individual, who effectively gets two jobs usually for the life of the project. An example of how this might work can be seen in Figure 8. This looks very like the matrix structure you have just looked at – and in a way it is. Clearly, those serving on project teams also have two reporting lines: to their functional head and to the project manager. The main difference is that the project teams are not permanent groupings like the Service 1, 2, 3, 4 groupings we saw in the matrix structure in Figure 7. Instead, these project teams only last as long as the projects on which they are working. This can lead to problems of control but, on the other hand, it can generate a tremendous sense of excitement as project goals are achieved. Also, fast moving changes can be implemented as a result of the flexibility and speed of response that this sort of structure can give an organisation.

3 Forms of organisational structure

19 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 8 An example of project teams working across a functionally structured organisation

3.6 Hybrid structure In practice, organisations evolve and changes to their structure should occur as and when necessary. This evolutionary process can produce structures that are well adapted to meeting the particular needs of the moment. A hybrid (mixture) of functional and product or service structures is common, and Figure 9 illustrates how this might look. Here we see that the sales function is structured along product lines.

3 Forms of organisational structure

20 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 9 The organisational structure of a department store as a typical hybrid of product and function.

A hybrid structure might include functional departments, the work of which is primarily internal (e.g., finance and HR), with the rest of the company organised on a product, service, geographic or project basis, as required to meet best the needs of the customer (as in Figure 9).

3.7 Recent trends in organisational design In response to a dynamic, fast changing and competitive environment, flexibility and speed of decision making have become increasingly important in modern organisations. This has led to a number of trends in recent years:

1 The flattening of structures to remove levels in the organisational hierarchy. This shortens the chain of command and thereby increases the speed of decision making.

2 The establishment of multi-functional project teams and an empowered, multi-skilled workforce to increase flexibility.

3 A customer service orientation rather than an inward, internal process orientation. 4 The emergence of the ‘flexible firm’. In an increasingly competitive environment,

continuous reduction of costs is essential. Organisations have responded by replacing full time, permanent, salaried staff with temporary and part time contract labour. This allows greater flexibility, as labour can be readily taken on/laid off as demand conditions fluctuate. It also provides substantial savings in pension, health insurance and holiday pay costs. Such organisations consist of a small core of permanent full time salaried professional staff, who organise and direct the

3 Forms of organisational structure

21 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

organisation’s affairs, supplemented by various levels of contract staff. Some of these will be professionals contracted for particular projects, but the majority are likely to be the flexible workforce that carries out the routine operations of the organisation.

4 Organisational departments and functions Business organisations typically consist of a number of departments or functions and it is important to have an appreciation of the purpose and activities of these departments/ functions in order to understand the role of management accounting in the organisation. After all, management accounting is concerned with providing managers at all levels with information to help them undertake their various activities and to monitor/report on the impact of these activities on the organisation. A well designed management accounting system must be based on an understanding of what various managers actually do.

Management accountants are increasingly acting as ‘business partners’ to teams in other functional areas of the organisation. If they are to be accepted within these decision making teams, it is essential they understand the operations and technology of the organisation.

4.1 Typical business organisation departments and functions A typical business organisation may consist of the following main departments or functions:

l Production l Research and Development (often abbreviated to R&D) l Purchasing l Marketing (including the selling function) l Human Resource Management l Accounting and Finance.

4.2 The Production function The Production function undertakes the activities necessary to provide the organisation’s products or services. Its main responsibilities are:

l production planning and scheduling l control and supervision of the production workforce

4 Organisational departments and functions

22 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l managing product quality (including process control and monitoring l maintenance of plant and equipment l control of inventory l deciding the best production methods and factory layout.

Close collaboration will usually be necessary between Production and various other functions within the organisation, for example:

l Research and Development, concerning the implications of product design for production methods and cost

l Marketing, concerning desired product functionality, appearance, quality, durability and so on

l Finance, concerning the availability of funds for purchase of new equipment and the acceptability of inventory levels.

l Human Resource Management, concerning staff motivation implications of job design and production methods.

Service organisations Although many of the principles of good management in a manufacturing environment also apply in organisations that provide services (rather than manufacture products), service businesses, such as banking and professional firms of accountants and solicitors, do have a number of distinctive features which have implications for how they are managed.

1 Services are less easily standardised than manufactured products and so service quality tends to be more variable. This makes human resource management and motivation more critical.

2 Services are often ‘intangible’ (i.e., something that cannot be precisely measured or assessed) and multi-dimensional – what exactly is the ‘service’ being offered by a bank, a private hospital or educational establishment? This can make attracting customers more difficult as it often depends on promoting an intangible item.

3 Unlike manufactured products, services cannot be stored, but must be consumed as they are produced or they are wasted. This creates additional problems matching productive capacity with customer demand. This is reflected in, for example, the common practice of commercial airlines offering very cheap flights based on marginal cost to fill empty seats – a plane flying empty to New York is a service provided but wasted!

4 Ascertaining the cost of individual services is often also problematic, as the cost structure of many service businesses is such that costs are often shared among different services. This makes, among other things, pricing and the analysis of profitability of different services more difficult than with most manufactured goods.

4.3 The Research and Development function The Research and Development (R&D) function is concerned with developing new products or processes and improving existing products/processes. R&D activities must be

4 Organisational departments and functions

23 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

closely coordinated with the organisation’s marketing activities to ensure that the organisation is providing exactly what its customers want in the most efficient, effective and economical way.

4.4 The Purchasing function The Purchasing function is concerned with acquiring goods and services for use by the organisation. These will include, for example, raw materials and components for manufacturing and also production equipment. The responsibilities of this function usually extend to buying goods and services for the entire organisation (not just the Production function), including, for example, office equipment, furniture, computer equipment and stationery. In buying goods and services, purchasing managers must take into account a number of factors – collectively referred to as ‘the Purchasing Mix’, namely, Quantity, Quality, Price and Delivery.

l Quantity. Buying in large quantities can attract price discounts and prevent inventory running out. On the other hand, there are substantial costs involved in carrying a high level of inventory.

l Quality. There will usually be a trade-off between price and quality in acquiring goods and services. Consequently, Production, R&D and Marketing Functions will need to be consulted to determine an acceptable level of quality which will depend on how important quality is as an attribute of the final product or service of the organisation.

l Price. Other things being equal, the purchasing manager will look for the best price deal when procuring goods and services, although price must be considered in conjunction with quality and supplier reliability, in order to achieve best value, rather than lowest price only.

l Delivery. The time between placing an order and receiving the goods or services, the lead time, can be critical for production planning and scheduling and also has implications for inventory control. Suppliers must therefore be evaluated in terms of their reliability and capability for on time delivery.

In short, the ‘purchasing mix’ can be considered as making sure that the organisation has the right amount, of the right quality, at the right price, in the right place at the right time!

4.5 The Marketing function Marketing is concerned with identifying and satisfying customers needs at the right price. Marketing involves researching what customers want and analysing how the organisation can satisfy these wants. Marketing activities range from the ‘strategic’, concerned with the choice of product markets (and how to compete in them, for example, on price or product differentiation) to the operational, arranging sales promotions (e.g., offering a 25 per cent discount), producing literature such as product catalogues and brochures, placing advertisements in the appropriate media and so on. A fundamental activity in marketing is managing the Marketing Mix consisting of the ‘4Ps’: Product, Price, Promotion and Place.

l Product. Having the right product in terms of benefits that customers value. l Price. Setting the right price which is consistent with potential customers’ perception

of the value offered by the product.

4 Organisational departments and functions

24 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l Promotion. Promoting the product in a way which creates maximum customer awareness and persuades potential customers to make the decision to purchase the product.

l Place. Making the product available in the right place at the right time – including choosing appropriate distribution channels.

In order to be successful, a business enterprise must either have a lower price than its competitors, or a product that is in some way superior – or both! A competitive strategy based on low price is known as a cost leadership strategy. A competitive strategy based on developing a superior product is known as a differentiation strategy.

The historical evolution of marketing Several writers (e.g., Harrison, 1978) have argued (and it is now widely accepted among management theorists and practitioners) that there have been three distinct eras in the history of advanced capitalist countries, such as the UK, which have affected the status, role and responsibilities of the Marketing function. These were:

1 The Production Era (pre–1930). This refers to a period of time during which products (and services) were relatively scarce (thereby constraining consumer choice) and the most important function of business was that of production. Marketing, in so far as it existed, was considered the least important function.

2 The Sales Era (1930–50). This refers to an era characterised by a shift in emphasis of business management from the production function to that of selling. With continued industrial development and innovations, many new consumer oriented products became available and a much more competitive selling environment resulted. This made it necessary to seek out customers and make significant use of advertising, promotion and personal selling.

3 The Marketing Era (1950–present). This period marked another significant change in the attitude of senior management towards the status and responsibilities of marketing. This change, referred to by many writers as the Marketing Concept (Kotler, 1967), meant a departure from the previous concept of marketing as being the sales function of a business, to one where marketing had a much greater responsibility in total company policy formation and operation. Under the Marketing Concept, marketing was placed at the beginning of the process of determining the products (services) which were needed by the market, the price at which they should be sold and the way in which they were to be distributed.

4 Organisational departments and functions

25 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 10 ‘We produce an inferior line of goods. That’s why we’re looking for a real first class marketing man.’

4.6 The Human Resources function The Human Resources function is concerned with the following:

l Recruitment and selection. Ensuring that the right people are recruited to the right jobs.

l Training and development. Enabling employees to carry out their responsibilities effectively and make use of their potential.

l Employee relations. Including negotiations over pay and conditions. l Grievance procedures and disciplinary matters. Dealing with complaints from

employees or from the employer. l Health and Safety matters Making sure employees work in a healthy and safe

environment. l Redundancy procedures Administering a proper system that is seen to be fair to all

concerned when deciding on redundancies and agreeing redundancy payments.

Organisations are dependent on their employees. Consequently, their recruitment and selection require careful management.

In recent years, the Human Resources function has attained a more important status as there has developed an increasing need (especially in service organisations) to ‘get the most’ from employees, in terms of customer service, for the benefit of the organisation.

4 Organisational departments and functions

26 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

4.7 The Accounting and Finance function The Accounting and Finance function is concerned with the following:

l Financial record keeping of transactions involving monetary inflows or outflows. l Preparing financial statements (the income statement, balance sheet and cash

flow statement) for reporting to external parties such as shareholders. The financial statements are also the starting point for calculating any tax due on business profits.

l Payroll administration Paying wages and salaries and maintaining appropriate income tax and national insurance records.

l Preparing management accounting information and analysis to help managers to plan, control and make decisions.

5 Decentralisation and centralisation Centralisation describes a situation where decision making authority is held predomi- nantly by senior managers within an organisation. Such a situation is common within smaller businesses where the owner/manager takes all the important decisions. Centralisation, however, is not only found in such organisations, as a number of very large organisations, such as banks and some large retailers, are also highly centralised. Little, if any, discretion is given to branch managers, who must simply run their branches in accordance with the procedures established by Head Office. Decentralisation describes the situation where the authority to make decisions is delegated to people at lower levels of the organisation. This often occurs where growth in size and increased complexity make the delegation of significant decision making authority necessary. Decentralisation is a matter of degree and is usually present to varying degrees in most organisations.

Effective delegation has benefits for managers, staff and the organisation as a whole.

5.1 Advantages of decentralisation Coates et al. (1996, pp. 115–6) identify the advantages of decentralisation as follows:

l Specialisation. Managers can develop more detailed and specialised knowledge by concentrating on a limited aspect of the organisation’s operations. This should result in better quality decisions.

l Timeliness. Quicker decisions are possible if it is not necessary to pass decisions up through the hierarchical chain of command. In addition, senior managers’ time is then available for more important decisions affecting the future of the whole organisation.

l Motivation. Having authority to make decisions usually results in greater motivation and commitment and hence improved performance.

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

27 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l Human resource development. Less experienced managers can ‘learn their trade’ without their mistakes jeopardising the entire organisation. The impact of mistakes/ misjudgements is likely to be confined to a limited aspect of the organisation’s operations.

l Organisational segment performance comparison. By dividing the organisation into separate segments, it is possible to evaluate which aspects of operations are performing well and which are not – something not usually possible when the inputs/ outputs are at a more aggregate level.

5.2 Disadvantages of decentralisation Coates et al. (1996, pp. 115–6) also identify the disadvantages of decentralisation as follows:

l Dysfunctional decision making. This occurs where managers take actions which improve the measured performance of their organisational segment, but damage the organisation as a whole. For example, a manager in one department may keep costs down in his/her own department in ways which have an impact on the quality of service provided to other departments.

l Loss of control. There is a danger that senior management may lose control of the organisation, as they become far removed from the detail of underlying operations and unaware of the decisions being made by lower level managers.

l Increased cost of control. Costly management information systems may be necessary to monitor the performance of lower management levels to ensure that delegated decision making authority is being used in the best interests of the organisation.

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

28 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 11 ‘In the interest of overcoming my reluctance to delegate, starting Monday I want you to do all of my worrying for me.’

5.3 Responsibility centres Decentralisation results in the creation of separate responsibility centres – aspects/ areas of the organisation’s operations for which a particular manager is responsible. The main types of responsibility centre in common use are as follows. Cost centre. The manager is assumed to be able to influence significantly the level of cost incurred and will be judged according to how well costs are controlled. There may or may not be revenues associated with the particular aspect of operations concerned, but if there are, the manager is assumed to have no control over these. Managers of cost centres will need regular information to be provided by the accounting system, concerning how individual cost items compare with budget – that is, budget variance and, of course, budgetary planning information, for example, cost targets to be achieved. Revenue centre. The manager is assumed to be able to influence significantly the level of revenue earned and will be judged on the basis of this. Revenue centres are principally intended to be applied to sales operations, where the manager’s responsibilities relate to the generation of income, whether or not there are attributable costs. Managers will need information concerning targets for individual revenue generating units (e.g., products), and also regular feedback information on actual versus budgeted revenues. Profit centre. The manager is assumed to be able to influence significantly both costs and revenues and is judged on the basis of the level of profit generated by the particular aspect of operations concerned. The term profit centre is usually limited to the situation where the manager does not have responsibility for the level of investment in the centre (this decision being made by more senior management). Managers need information concerning both revenues and costs, for example, which products/services are profitable.

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

29 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Investment centre. This is a type of profit centre, but one for which the manager also has significant influence over investment decisions. In such cases, it would be expected that, in addition to the normal profit centre measures (e.g., Return on Sales), profit would be related to the capital invested (e.g., Return on Investment). Managers need the same information as for profit centres and in addition, detailed appraisals of potential investments and control information concerning the level of investment (e.g., working capital levels, namely, inventory, receivables and payables) at any particular point in time.

Activity 4 What do you think would be the appropriate type of responsibility centre for each of the following functions/departments?

l A marketing department l A research and development department l A machinery service and repair department of a factory l The German manufacturing and distribution division of a large multinational

company l A regional sales office of a US company

How would you measure the performance of the manager/s of each centre?

Provide your answer...

Discussion In some organisations, which are departmentalised on the basis of product groups, each product group department will have its own marketing activities. Where, however, an organisation is departmentalised on a functional basis and has a separate marketing department serving all its product groups, this department will incur expenditure on behalf of the whole organisation, but will not have its own revenues. It is likely then to be a cost centre. The same is true of a research and development and a service and repairs department. Research and development is difficult to measure, but this is attempted in many firms by use of such measures as number of patents registered, percentage of sales from recently introduced products and so on. The German manufacturing division of a large multinational company is likely to earn revenues (the level of which it can presumably influence) and incur costs (the level of which it can also influence). It is likely to be a profit centre, or even an investment centre. A regional sales office is likely to be able to influence the level of revenue generated, but the main elements of cost (e.g., sales personnel salaries) are likely to be the result of decisions made by more senior (Head Office) managers. It is likely to be a revenue centre. Responsibility centres should be evaluated according to financial performance (comparison of budgeted and actual costs, revenues and profits as appropriate). It will probably be desirable also to measure various non-financial indicators that are important for each centre achieving its goals – for example, in the case of the service and repairs department, average response time for machine breakdowns, and in the

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

30 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

case of the research and development department, the number of new product or process innovations, and so on.

5.4 The divisionalised organisation The ultimate form of decentralisation occurs when an organisation is separated into a number of investment centres that operate almost as independent businesses, each with its own profit responsibility. The basis of divisionalisation may be according to product (or service), geographical area and so on. Such a divisional structure is illustrated by the common legal form of groups with subsidiary companies. Each division in the organisation will typically have its own functional structure.

5.5 Line and staff relationships The existence of an organisational structure implies that authority and control are exercised from above and pass down through the hierarchy. The relationships that result are known as line relationships. In any organisation, there should be a clear line of authority and responsibility from the top to the bottom of the hierarchy: the ‘scalar chain’ which indicates the line relationships. By contrast, staff relationships exist when a manager gives/receives advice from another organisational member. For example, the Accounting and Finance manager will provide information and analysis to help the Marketing and Production managers make decisions and control their respective operations.

Activity 5 This activity draws together some important ideas you have considered concerning organisation structure. Consider the organisation in which you work, or one with which you are familiar. (Focus on the part of the organisation with which you are most familiar.)

l What is the span of control? l How many layers or levels of management are there? Is your organisation tall or

flat? l Is authority centralised or decentralised? l How clear is the definition of jobs? Do some of them overlap? l To how many people do employees report? Are there single or dual lines of

control?

You may find it difficult to answer these questions, especially if there are dual responsibilities or reporting lines in some areas.

Provide your answer...

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

31 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

6 The organisational environment Organisations exist in an environment – everything that surrounds the organisation physically and socially. The constituents of the organisation’s environment are likely to have an important impact on the management of the organisation. An organisation’s management must systematically analyse its environment in formulating plans to achieve organisational objectives. The major environmental factors impacting on an organisation can be grouped under four headings: political/legal, economic, social/demographic and technological (reflected in the acronym: PEST analysis).

6.1 Political and legal environment Clearly, there are laws that must be complied with, emanating from a number of sources, of which the organisation must be aware. These cover areas such as:

l ways of doing business (e.g., included within contract law); professional negligence (included within the law of tort)

l protection of consumers (e.g., Sale of Goods Act 1979, Consumer Credit Act 1974, 2006)

l safe working environment for employees (health and safety legislation) l confidentiality and use of information held concerning customers or employees (Data

Protection Act 1998) l duties of directors and financial reporting requirements (company law, in particular,

the Companies Act 2006) l minimum wage, equal opportunities and unfair dismissal rules (employment law)

pollution, waste disposal (environmental legislation) l tax liabilities (tax law).

In recent years, the European Union (EU) has become increasingly important for member states in terms of international trade rules. In addition to requiring the removal of trade barriers, the EU requires that:

l there be free movement of capital between countries l governments do not discriminate between companies in different EU countries in

awarding government contracts l financial services can be provided in any EU country l telecommunications organisations be opened up to greater competition l qualifications awarded in one country are recognised in the others.

In addition to the legal framework, government impacts directly on many organisations in a number of ways:

l via taxes or subsidies to discourage/encourage particular activities (e.g., alcohol consumption)

6 The organisational environment

32 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l national and, in particular, European, regulations have impacted on organisations in ways such as product standardisation, anti-discrimination legislation, workers’ rights, etc.

l location incentives (often funded by the European Union) to encourage businesses to locate in particular areas

l by providing barriers to entry (e.g., the requirement to obtain a license to operate) and thus restricting competition in a particular field

l the government may be a major customer l anti-monopoly, competition legislation l as a supplier of infrastructure (e.g., roads), government can influence competition

(e.g., road versus rail freight).

Political change, for example, wars, expropriation or nationalisation, political instability and so on, can also present a major threat to organisational plans.

6.2 Economic environment Economic variables such as inflation, interest rates, savings patterns, economic growth, exchange rates, the levels of taxation and government spending all influence the amount of money people have to spend. This is likely to have an impact on most organisations. Businesses will experience, for example, varying levels of demand for their products or services and charities will experience varying levels of donations, as the amount of money people have to spend fluctuates in response to variations in major economic variables.

6.3 Demographic and social trends impacting on organisations Demography is concerned with the study of data relating to the population and groups within it – births, deaths, diseases and so on – as indicators of the conditions of life in communities. Recent trends in the UK include a fall in the number of young people entering the labour market and an increase in the number of retired people. Such data are used by organisations, especially in the identification of consumer markets, but they are also important for human resource management too. Organisations must monitor demographic changes in their HR planning, especially with regard to recruitment. These changes must be taken into account in considering the best ways to tap into the future talent pool. It will be necessary to assess the current and future labour requirements in terms of both the level and the type of labour. The area from which the labour force is to be drawn must be identified. Once the labour force recruitment area is identified, the size and composition of the available labour force can be determined. The next step then involves a comparison of need as opposed to supply. In view of recent demographic changes, it is likely to be necessary to tap into currently under-utilised labour resources such as older workers and women returning to work after long periods spent bringing up children. HR policies need to be geared towards these requirements, for example, by providing training (e.g., in IT skills), part time working and child care facilities.

6 The organisational environment

33 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

6.4 Sociological factors A number of factors concerning the way society is structured will also be of relevance to many organisations.

Social class An important component of social structure is social class. Social class refers to the hierarchical distinction between individuals or groups in society. The factors that determine class vary from one society to another. The most obvious meaning of this term used to be in relation to the stratum of society into which one was born (aristocratic, middle class, working class) and class still means this to many people. In contemporary capitalist societies, it is common to define class in terms of income, status, education or profession, or a combination of these. An important implication of the existence of such a class structure is that social class can create different customer groups. It is therefore a tool for market segmentation. The social classes are widely used to profile and predict different customer behaviour. Identifying a segment, in which customers share certain characteristics, such as level of income, is useful when developing products for those customers.

Culture Culture refers to a set of shared attitudes, values, goals and practices that characterise a society or a social group within it. Cultural factors also have a significant impact on customer behaviour as culture is the most fundamental influence on a person’s wants and behaviour. As with social class, culture can create customer groups and is therefore important for marketing. For example, there has been a cultural shift towards greater concern about health and fitness, which has created opportunities for serving customers who wish to buy:

l low calorie foods l health club memberships l exercise equipment l activity- or health-related holidays.

Similarly, the increased desire for leisure time has resulted in increased demand for convenience products and services such as microwave ovens, ready meals and direct marketing service businesses such as telephone banking and insurance. Each culture contains sub-cultures – particular groups of people with shared values. Sub- cultures can include nationalities, religions, and racial groups of people sharing the same geographical location. Sometimes a sub-culture will create a substantial and distinctive market segment of its own. For example, the ‘youth culture’ or ‘club culture’ has quite distinct values and buying characteristics from the much older ‘grey generation’.

6 The organisational environment

34 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 12 ‘This looks good. It’s a six hour special on how society is becoming too sedentary.’

Cultural shifts also impact on other functions within an organisation. For example, there has been a dramatic increase in the number of women participating in the workforce and this raises a number of potential (and actual) discrimination issues, for instance, in terms of promotion and seniority and sexual harassment. HR policies must attempt to guard against these. Many organisations are responding by, for example:

l introducing flexible working hours to help women cope with the demands of career and family responsibilities

l providing education and training for managers and the workforce to encourage equal opportunities and discourage discrimination.

Another important cultural shift is the increasing concern for the physical environment among organisations’ various stakeholders (employees, customers, investors, local community and so on). Organisations are responding in a number of ways:

l by introducing ‘green products’ to exploit the opportunity, for example, environmen- tally friendly deodorants, washing powder and cleaning agents

l by exercising greater care in disposing of industrial waste l by reducing their carbon footprint by, for example, sourcing raw materials locally,

not using air freight, using video conferencing instead of executive travel, using energy efficient appliances, etc.

l by social and environmental reporting. Increasingly, large companies are providing information (which is not currently required by law or accounting regulations) on environmental policies in their annual financial reports.

Many companies now present a corporate social responsibility report, although the content varies greatly between companies. This report is usually posted on the company’s website.

6 The organisational environment

35 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

In addition to such voluntary responses based on enlightened self-interest, organisations are increasingly needing to familiarise themselves with environmental legislation and direct government action, for example:

l the congestion charge in inner London l fines for breaching pollution guidelines l the landfill tax on hazardous waste.

6.5 Technology and its impact In recent years, information systems (IS) and information technology (IT) have had a profound impact on most organisations. So pervasive is IT that IT skills are now essential for employees in virtually all organisations. IT has:

l facilitated flatter organisations and wider spans of control l made possible faster, more accurate processing of larger volumes of data l provided access to more – and more up to date – information for managers l provided computer modelling (e.g., simulations) which can improve the quality of

planning and decision making l made possible the provision of control information to senior managers in real time l improved customer service by provision of electronic data interchange (EDI)

between organisations, customer databases, extranets and so on.

Perhaps even more dramatic than the improvements in information processing are the improvements in communications that IT has provided. E-mail provides instant worldwide messaging; online conferencing enables collaboration between people in geographi- cally distant locations; voice mail allows communication between people whose working time schedules do not coincide; video conferencing allows face to face meetings without the need for expensive travel. IT has also changed the relationship between employers and employees and the nature of work, for example in terms of:

l home working (telecommuting) is commonplace, providing more flexible working arrangements and reducing the time and cost of travelling to work

l greater visibility provided to management, allowing increased monitoring and control.

Activity 6

(a) Explain (spend no more than about ten minutes on this) why it is necessary for an organisation to undertake a PEST analysis.

(b) Give three examples of actions that might result from such an analysis.

Provide your answer...

Discussion Environmental changes may have a significant impact on the organisation’s ability to achieve its objectives, including, possibly, survival. Major environmental changes,

6 The organisational environment

36 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

however, can often be anticipated if the environment is systematically monitored and analysed, and appropriate action can be taken to safeguard against threats and/or exploit opportunities arising. Examples of possible actions in response to an environmental analysis include:

l developing a new product range based on emerging technology ahead of the competition

l developing staff education and training programmes in anticipation of future skills shortages in the local labour market

l planning a programme of redundancies based on anticipation of a serious economic downturn.

Conclusion This course has provided an introduction to the nature of organisations. You should now have an appreciation of the way in which different organisations are structured and of the different components within an organisation. You should also have an understanding of the main environmental factors that impact on organisations, including political/legal, economic, social/demographic and technological factors.

Keep on learning

Conclusion

37 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Study another free course There are more than 800 courses on OpenLearn for you to choose from on a range of subjects. Find out more about all our free courses.

Take your studies further Find out more about studying with The Open University by visiting our online prospectus. If you are new to university study, you may be interested in our Access Courses or Certificates.

What’s new from OpenLearn? Sign up to our newsletter or view a sample.

For reference, full URLs to pages listed above:

OpenLearn – www.open.edu/openlearn/free-courses

Visiting our online prospectus – www.open.ac.uk/courses

Access Courses – www.open.ac.uk/courses/do-it/access

Certificates – www.open.ac.uk/courses/certificates-he

Newsletter – www.open.edu/openlearn/about-openlearn/subscribe-the-openlearn-newsletter

Glossary anti-monopoly, competition legislation Laws which seek to maintain the benefits of competition (in order to protect con- sumers), by preventing the emergence of monopolies in a particular market.

balance sheet An accounting report summarising an organisation’s assets and liabilities.

barriers to entry Factors that prevent competitors from entering a particular market.

carbon footprint The total amount of carbon emissions (greenhouse gasses), that result from an organisation’s activities.

cash flow statement

Glossary

38 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

An accounting report showing the principal types of cash inflows and outflows during a period and any cash surplus or deficit arising.

cooperative firms/social enterprises Organisations which are typically engaged in commercial activity, but whose primary purpose is social (for example, to provide employment) rather than earning profit for the owner/s. Such organisations are typically owned by their employees and/or customers.

Cost centre. A production or service location, function, activity or item of equipment for which costs are accumulated.A responsibility centre (e.g. division, department) where local man- agement has responsibility for and is called to account on the basis of costs (or expenses) only.

Culture The set of shared attitudes, values, goals and practices that characterise a society or social groups within it. Culture is a term which describes the psychology, attitudes, experiences, beliefs and values of an organisation. It has also been defined as the specific collection of values and norms that are shared by people and groups in an organization and that control the way they interact with each other and with stake- holders outside the organisation.

databases A computer-based store of organised data, structured so that it can be used to deliver information to more than one application.

delayering The process of removing layers in the management hierarchy, so that ‘tall’ organisations become flatter, with fewer hierarchical levels.

Demography The study of data relating to the population, for example, birth and death rates and population age profiles.

divisionalisation The process of dividing an organisation into a number of separate investment centres/ business segments (divisions) that operate almost as independent businesses.

effectively Achieving the specified outcomes; the extent to which specified outcomes are achieved.

efficiently Achieving specified outputs with the minimum necessary inputs (for a given quality specification).

electronic data interchange (EDI) The exchange of information directly between separate information systems (usually in different organisations). It is the basis of electronic commerce.

empowerment Giving employees power, in order to increase their self-confidence and motivation in order to improve their performance in pursuing organisational objectives.

extranets A form of intranet, accessible by specified individuals who may be outside a particular organisation, for example as customers or suppliers.

‘For-profit’ (commercial) organisations Commercial organisations whose primary purpose is to earn profit for the owner/s.

Glossary

39 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

income statement An accounting report summarising revenues earned, expenditure incurred and any surplus/deficit of revenue over expenditure during a certain period.

Investment centre. A type of profit centre for which the manager also has significant influence over the amount of capital investment and is therefore also responsible for profit in relation to capital employed.

lead time The time between a customer placing an order and the product or service being delivered.

line relationships The vertical relationships (in the organisational hierarchy) between managers and subordinates.

Marketing Concept The combination of factors which marketing managers take into account when marketing a product or service, namely: product, price, promotion and place.

mechanistic structures Tall, hierarchical, bureaucratic organisation structures, with centralisation of authority, formalisation of procedures and high levels of specialisation.

Middle line The group of middle managers whose role is to convert the objectives and broad plans of the Strategic Apex into operational plans that can be carried out by the organisation's workers.

‘Not-for–profit’ organisations Organisations that exist to pursue a particular social objective rather than to earn profit for the owner/s.

online conferencing A computer based communication system which enables collaboration between people in geographically distant locations.

Operating core The people who do the basic work of providing the products or delivering the services.

organic structures Flat organisation structures, with decentralisation of authority and low levels of specialisation.

PEST analysis An analysis of the organisation’s Political/legal, Economic, Social/demographic and Technological environment factors (hence the acronym PEST). This analysis is undertaken as part of the organisation's long- term planning process.

Profit centre. A division or department where local management has responsibility for revenue and costs, and is called to account on the basis of the difference between them (e.g. profit, loss, surplus, deficit).

Purchasing Mix The combination of factors which purchasing managers take into account when procuring goods or services, namely: quantity, quality, price and delivery.

responsibility centres

Glossary

40 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

An organisational segment such as a department or a function which a particular manager is accountable for.

Return on Investment Profit expressed as a percentage of the capital invested in an enterprise.

Return on Sales Profit earned expressed as a percentage of sales revenue.

Revenue centre. An organisational segment for which a particular manager is held accountable in terms of revenue earned.

social and environmental reporting The provision of information about an organisation’s social and environmental policies in its annual financial report.

social class The hierarchical distinction between individuals or groups in society. In contemporary capitalist society, it is common to define class in terms of income, education or profession –or a combination of these.

social responsibility objectives Objectives of an organisation relating to wider needs (for example, protecting the environment, provision of employment) rather than just the needs of the owners/ providers of funds.

staff relationships The horizontal relationship between a manager and another organisational member to/ from whom the manager gives or receives information or advice.

stakeholders Individuals or groups who have an interest in the activities of an organisation (they may be influenced by it) and may also have the power to influence the future course of the organisation (such as shareholders or employees). However, stakeholders will differ greatly in their degree of interest and/or influence.

Strategic apex The highest management level in an organisation, whose purpose is to ensure that the organisation follows its mission and manages its relationship with its environment.

Support staff The administrative personnel whose purpose is to provide services to other parts of the organisation.

Technostructure The group of technical/professional staff concerned with the best way of doing a job, specifying output criteria and ensuring that personnel have appropriate skills.

telecommuting Working from home, facilitated by information technology enabled communication with colleagues.

transaction costs The costs of engaging in economic activity resulting from an organisation’s relationship to the market.

video conferencing People in distant locations conducting conferences, through the use of computer networks to transmit audio and video data.

Glossary

41 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

working capital A measure of a company's liquidity and financial health. It encompasses short term assets (stock, debtors, cash) as well as less short term liabilities (creditors) by which they are financed; often referred to as net current assets. Working capital is generally calculated as: Working capital = current capital - current liabilities.

References Table of statutes Great Britain Companies Act 2006. Elizabeth II. Chapter 46. (2006) London: The Stationery Office. Great Britain. Consumer Credit Act 1974. Elizabeth II. Chapter 39. (1974) London: The Stationery Office. Great Britain. Consumer Credit Act 2006. Elizabeth II. Chapter 14.(2006) London: The Stationery Office. Great Britain. Data Protection Act 1998. Elizabeth II. Chapter 29. (1998) London: The Stationery Office. Great Britain. Sale of Goods Act 1979. Elizabeth II. Chapter 54.(1979) London: The Stationery Office. Publications Anthony, R.N. (1965) Planning and Control Systems: A Framework for Analysis, Boston, MA, Division of Research, Harvard Graduate School of Business. Bentley, T.J. (1998) Managing Information: Avoiding Overload, London, Chartered Institute of Management Accountants, Kogan Page. Chandler, A.D. (1962) Strategy and Structure, Boston, MA, MIT Press. Coates, J.B., Rickwood, C. and Stacey, R.J. (1996) Management Accounting for Strategic and Operational Control, Oxford, Butterworth-Heinemann. Davenport, T.H. and Prusak, L. (1997) Working Knowledge, Boston, MA, Harvard Business School Press. Emmanuel, C., Otley, D. and Merchant, K. (1990) Accounting for Management Control (2nd edn), London, Chapman and Hall. Fayol, H. (1949) General and Industrial Management, London, Pitman. Harrison, G.L. (1978) ‘The role of the management accountant in the marketing function of business: case observations and analyses’, Research paper no. 157, School of Economics and Financial Studies, Macquarie University. Johnson, H.T. and Kaplan, R.S. (1987) Relevance Lost: The Rise and Fall of Management Accounting, Boston, MA, Harvard Business School Press. Kotler, P. (1967) Marketing Management, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, Prentice Hall. Mintzberg, H. (1978) ‘Patterns in Strategy Formation’, Management Science, vol. 24, no. 9, pp. 934–48. Mintzberg, H. (1979) The Structuring of Organisations, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, Prentice Hall. Porter, M.E. (1985) Competitive Advantage: Creating and Sustaining Superior Perfor- mance, New York, Free Press.

References

42 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Rockart, J.F. (1979) ‘Chief executives define their own data needs’, Harvard Business Review, vol. 57, no. 2, pp. 238–41.

Acknowledgements This course was written by Dr Mike Lucas. Except for third party materials and otherwise stated (see terms and conditions), this content is made available under a Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 4.0 Licence. The material acknowledged below is Proprietary and used under licence (not subject to Creative Commons Licence). Grateful acknowledgement is made to the following sources for permission to reproduce material in this course: Course image: Ken Teegardin in Flickr made available under Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 2.0 Licence. Images Figure 1: Mintzberg, H. (1979) ‘Five basic parts of organisations’, The Structure of Organizations, Pearson Education, Inc. Illustrations Section 4.5: © John Morris, www.CartoonStock.com Section 5.2: © Mike Shapiro, www.CartoonStock.com Section 6.4: © Mike Shapiro, www.CartoonStock.com Every effort has been made to contact copyright owners. If any have been inadvertently overlooked, the publishers will be pleased to make the necessary arrangements at the first opportunity. Don't miss out: If reading this text has inspired you to learn more, you may be interested in joining the millions of people who discover our free learning resources and qualifications by visiting The Open University - www.open.edu/openlearn/free-courses

Acknowledgements

43 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Business and Business Environment/Support/Organisations_and_business environment(4).pdf

Organisations and management

accounting

About this free course

This free course is an adapted extract from the Open University course B292 Management accounting http://www.open.ac.uk/courses/modules/b292

This version of the content may include video, images and interactive content that may not be optimised for your device.

You can experience this free course as it was originally designed on OpenLearn, the home of free learning from The Open University: www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content- section-0.

There you’ll also be able to track your progress via your activity record, which you can use to demonstrate your learning.

Copyright © 2016 The Open University

Intellectual property

Unless otherwise stated, this resource is released under the terms of the Creative Commons Licence v4.0 http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/4.0/deed.en_GB. Within that The Open University interprets this licence in the following way: www.open.edu/openlearn/about-openlearn/frequently-asked-questions-on-openlearn. Copyright and rights falling outside the terms of the Creative Commons Licence are retained or controlled by The Open University. Please read the full text before using any of the content.

We believe the primary barrier to accessing high-quality educational experiences is cost, which is why we aim to publish as much free content as possible under an open licence. If it proves difficult to release content under our preferred Creative Commons licence (e.g. because we can’t afford or gain the clearances or find suitable alternatives), we will still release the materials for free under a personal end- user licence.

This is because the learning experience will always be the same high quality offering and that should always be seen as positive – even if at times the licensing is different to Creative Commons.

When using the content you must attribute us (The Open University) (the OU) and any identified author in accordance with the terms of the Creative Commons Licence.

The Acknowledgements section is used to list, amongst other things, third party (Proprietary), licensed content which is not subject to Creative Commons licensing. Proprietary content must be used (retained) intact and in context to the content at all times.

The Acknowledgements section is also used to bring to your attention any other Special Restrictions which may apply to the content. For example there may be times when the Creative Commons Non- Commercial Sharealike licence does not apply to any of the content even if owned by us (The Open University). In these instances, unless stated otherwise, the content may be used for personal and non- commercial use.

We have also identified as Proprietary other material included in the content which is not subject to Creative Commons Licence. These are OU logos, trading names and may extend to certain photographic and video images and sound recordings and any other material as may be brought to your attention.

Unauthorised use of any of the content may constitute a breach of the terms and conditions and/or intellectual property laws.

We reserve the right to alter, amend or bring to an end any terms and conditions provided here without notice.

All rights falling outside the terms of the Creative Commons licence are retained or controlled by The Open University.

Head of Intellectual Property, The Open University

2 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Contents Introduction 5 Learning Outcomes 6 1 What is an organisation? 7

1.1 Mintzberg’s five components of organisation 7 1.2 Why do organisations exist? 8 1.3 What types of organisation are there? 9

2 What is organisational structure? 11 2.1 Principles of organisational structure 12 2.2 Tall versus flat organisations 14

3 Forms of organisational structure 16 3.1 Functional structure 16 3.2 Product or service structure 17 3.3 Geographical structure 17 3.4 Matrix structure 18 3.5 Project teams 19 3.6 Hybrid structure 20 3.7 Recent trends in organisational design 21

4 Organisational departments and functions 22 4.1 Typical business organisation departments and functions 22 4.2 The Production function 22 4.3 The Research and Development function 23 4.4 The Purchasing function 24 4.5 The Marketing function 24 4.6 The Human Resources function 26 4.7 The Accounting and Finance function 27

5 Decentralisation and centralisation 27 5.1 Advantages of decentralisation 27 5.2 Disadvantages of decentralisation 28 5.3 Responsibility centres 29 5.4 The divisionalised organisation 31 5.5 Line and staff relationships 31

6 The organisational environment 32 6.1 Political and legal environment 32 6.2 Economic environment 33 6.3 Demographic and social trends impacting on organisations 33 6.4 Sociological factors 34 6.5 Technology and its impact 36

Conclusion 37 Keep on learning 37 Glossary 38

3 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

References 42 Acknowledgements 43

4 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Introduction Management accounting is concerned with providing information and analysis to managers to help them plan, evaluate and control activities, in order to achieve an organisation’s objectives. Whereas financial accounting is concerned with reporting on the past financial performance of an organisation, management accounting is essentially concerned with improving its future performance. In order to understand the concepts and principles of management accounting it is necessary first to have some appreciation of what managers do! This, in turn, requires an understanding of the organisations in which managers work – and of the external environment in which these organisations exist and operate. This OpenLearn free course, therefore, looks at the nature of organisations, specifically their objectives and structure. Organisational objectives and structure are key elements of organisations and they determine management functions and responsibilities within the organisation. The course also considers the main environmental factors (economic, social, political, legal and technological) that impact on organisational behaviour. This OpenLearn course is an adapted extract from the Open University course B292 Management accounting. Tell us what you think! We’d love to hear from you to help us improve our free learning offering through OpenLearn by filling out this short survey.

Introduction

5 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Learning Outcomes After studying this course, you should be able to: l understand the nature and purpose of different types of organisations (commercial, voluntary, public sector and

so on) l describe the different ways in which organisations may be structured l understand basic concepts of organisational structure l describe the main departments or functions of a business organisation l explain the advantages and disadvantages of centralised and decentralised organisations.

1 What is an organisation? An ‘organisation’ is a group of individuals working together to achieve one or more objectives. Although organisations have been defined differently by different theorists, virtually all definitions refer to five common features:

1 they are composed of individuals and groups of individuals 2 they are oriented towards achieving collective goals 3 they consist of different functions 4 the functions need to be coordinated 5 they exist independently of individual members who may come and go.

1.1 Mintzberg’s five components of organisation Mintzberg (1979, p. 24) suggested that all organisations consist of five components, as shown in Figure 1.

Figure 1 Mintzberg’s five parts of the organisation

At the top of the organisation is a Strategic apex the purpose of which is to ensure the organisation follows its mission and manages its relationship with its environment. The

1 What is an organisation?

7 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

individuals comprising the apex, for example, the Chief Executive Officer (CEO), are responsible to owners, government agencies, unions, communities and so on. Below the apex is the Middle line, a group of managers who are concerned with converting the objectives and broad plans of the Strategic apex into operational plans that can be carried out by the workers. As organisations grow and become more complex, they usually develop a separate group of people who are concerned with the best way of doing a job, specifying output criteria (e.g., quality standards) and ensuring that personnel have appropriate skills (e.g., by organising training programmes). This group of analysts is referred to by Mintzberg as the Technostructure. The organisation also adds other administrative functions that provide services to itself, for example legal advice, public relations, mailroom, cafeteria and so on. These are the Support staff. Finally, at the bottom of the organisation, is the Operating core. These are the people who do the basic work of producing the products or delivering the services. Mintzberg’s generic organisational model also illustrates an important principle of organisation structure: the separation of direction and management, whereby those people who decide the mission and general direction of the organisation are different (other than in a very small organisation) from those who handle the implementation of plans and subsequent controlling of operations to ensure that objectives are met. Senior managers (the Strategic apex) will establish long-term organisational objectives and policies through which goals are to be achieved. Middle managers (the Middle line) will be responsible for translating the necessarily broad and general strategic plans into detailed action plans, specifying managerial responsibilities for particular tasks and how resources are to be allocated. These middle managers will also be responsible for monitoring activities and taking action to ensure that resources are being used efficiently and effectively to achieve organisational objectives.

Efficiency refers to the relationship between inputs and outputs. An activity or process is efficient, if it produces a given output with the minimum of inputs necessary. Effectiveness refers to the extent to which goals/objectives are actually achieved.

Other important principles of organisational structure are discussed later in Sections 2 and 3.

1.2 Why do organisations exist? Organisations exist because groups of people working together can achieve more than the sum of the achievements which the individuals in the organisation could produce when working separately. For example, one person might struggle all day to carry a piano upstairs, whereas a team of four people, each taking one corner, may need to put in much less than a quarter of the effort of one person to complete the task (Coates et al., 1996, p. 19). Although such cooperation is beneficial, if individuals pull in different directions, the result is counter-productive. Thus coordination is necessary and this is a fundamental role of management, as will be discussed in a later section of this session. It can also be argued that organisations exist as a result of the impact of transaction costs, because they can arrange transactions between their different parts at a lower total cost than that available in the open market. In crude terms, it may be cheaper to make or do something ‘in house’ because this cuts out the time consuming process of negotiating

1 What is an organisation?

8 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

terms – and renegotiating them every time your requirements change. Before the Industrial Age, it was common for artisans/craftsmen to work individually from home, producing various products, which merchants would purchase from these individuals and sell to consumers. All transactions were conducted through market exchange without the need for formal organisations. As economic development gained pace, however, it became clear that it was more efficient to organise production internally within a firm rather than undertake each transaction externally through the market. The latter process involved substantial costs in terms of time that had to be spent investigating suppliers, detailing specifications, negotiating/renegotiating contracts, checking that agreed terms had been met and so on.

1.3 What types of organisation are there? Organisations can be classified in different ways. One way is according to their over- arching purpose, or primary objective. Broadly, organisations may be classified as ‘for- profit’ (i.e., commercial) or ‘not-for-profit’ entities. ‘For-profit’ (commercial) organisa- tions may have several different objectives. For a very long time, it was generally accepted that maximising the wealth of the owners and continuing in existence were the primary objectives of profit seeking organisations. However, as organisations also aim, for example, to provide goods and services to customers and employment to employees, it is perhaps more reasonable to suggest that increasing, rather than maximising the wealth of owners, is a more fitting objective. ‘Not-for–profit’ organisations comprise a large variety of organisations including charities, clubs, cooperative firms/social enterprises and public sector organisations. Public sector organisations are owned, funded and run by central or local government. They include:

l public hospitals l the armed forces (military) l most schools and universities l government departments.

These organisations exist to provide services which, for various reasons, it is considered impractical or undesirable for the commercial sector to provide. Whereas commercial organisations, charities and social enterprises must generate sufficient funds from their activities to sustain themselves on a continuing basis, public sector organisations are funded by government. Nevertheless, constraints on government expenditure mean that resources are limited. Consequently, economic scarcity requires that virtually all organisations be run effectively and efficiently. As a result, many of the management principles employed by the commercial sector are also employed in the not- for-profit sector, requiring extensive use of management accounting in all sectors. A traditional view of differences between sectors is illustrated in Figure 2. However, these distinctions are becoming blurred, as indicated by the overlapping circles. Commercial organisations are increasingly pursuing social responsibility objectives, while not-for- profit organisations are increasingly adopting commercial criteria to ensure the sound financial management of scarce resources.

Maximisation of shareholder value has long been the publicly stated objective of most business enterprises. It is likely, however, partly as a result of the global financial crises

1 What is an organisation?

9 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

that began in 2008, that the publicly stated objectives will be expanded to embrace more stakeholders, such as employees and the local community.

Figure 2 Organisations highlighting differences between sectors

Activity 1 Think of an organisation that you know well.

l In which sector or sectors from Figure 2 do you feel your organisation most comfortably fits?

l Which factors (profit, accountability, commitment) exert pressure on it or influence its objectives?

1 What is an organisation?

10 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Provide your answer...

Discussion You may have decided that your organisation sits clearly inside one of the circles or, more likely, you will have sited it in an intermediate position – operating for commercial purposes, but anxious to satisfy other criteria such as accountability to a wider public. For example, there has been a rise in the number of investment companies which use not only financial but also ethical criteria to decide in which organisations to invest. Such criteria could include the environmental impact of the production processes used by the companies in question, or the working conditions and wages of their employees. Another example of the mixture of the pressures that can affect organisations could be taken from the social care sector: a organisation in this sector might be keen to provide an excellent service to local people, but it could also have to operate on commercial principles in managing costs in order to compete with more cost effective providers.

2 What is organisational structure? The term organisational structure refers to the relationships between the various functions and positions in an organisation. Structure determines authority and responsibility for particular tasks/activities. It also specifies the routes of communication between different parts of the organisation. Organisational structure therefore has important implications for the design of management accounting systems. For example, some organisations are highly decentralised, with decision making authority delegated to relatively junior managers at lower levels in the organisational hierarchy. In this case, a major role of the organisation’s management accounting system will be to monitor the outcomes and provide feedback to senior managers about the performance of those who have the decision making authority. Such a role will not be necessary in a highly centralised organisation, where senior managers make all the important decisions.

Theories of organisational structure With the emergence of large industrial enterprises in the nineteenth century, management theorists began to consider how organisations should be designed and managed. As you will read later in this session, early organisational theorists such as Henri Fayol (1949) attempted to derive universal prescriptions for the optimal design of organisations. More recently, theorists have emphasised the contingent nature of optimal organisational design – depending on variables such as size, production technology, degree of stability in the organisation’s business environment, nature of competition in the industry and so on. These factors are assumed to influence, for example, whether organisations are ‘tall’ or ‘flat’, centralised or decentralised in terms of decision making and so on. (These terms are discussed later.)

Ultimately, organisational structure is a means of influencing and controlling the behaviour of the individuals who work in the organisation. Structure is used to assign authority and responsibility to individuals and hold them accountable for the achievement of specific tasks or objectives (Emmanuel et al., 1990, p. 38). Management accounting is an

2 What is organisational structure?

11 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

important part of this process as it provides managers with the information to carry out the various activities for which they are responsible. It also measures and monitors their performance to ensure that the organisation achieves its objectives.

A good example of a management accounting technique employed widely for organisational planning and control purposes is budgeting.

The sort of information managers need to undertake various activities and the way their performance is measured/monitored will depend on the way in which the organisation is structured.

2.1 Principles of organisational structure Certain principles are basic to the operation of any organisation:

Specialisation The work of the organisation is divided up into separate activities or tasks and particular individuals concentrate on specific tasks or activities. This enables the application of specialised knowledge and so improves organisational efficiency and effectiveness.

Coordination If an organisation’s activities are to be separated into different areas or operations, it will be necessary to ensure that the various actions are coordinated, that is, consistent with each other and working towards the same organisational objectives. This is a very important task of management. The management hierarchy or ‘chain of command’ facilitates the coordination of various departments and their activities.

Management principles of the hierarchy of authority Management theorists (notably Henri Fayol, 1949) have, over the years, developed several principles relating to the hierarchy of authority for coordinating activities. Some of the most important are:

l Unity of Command. Every person should receive orders and be accountable to one and only one superior. If people receive orders from more than one superior, conflict and confusion may well result.

l The Scalar Chain. There should be a clear line of authority from top to bottom, linking all managers at all levels.

l The Responsibility and Authority Principle. If an organisational member is allocated responsibility, then that person should also be given the necessary authority to carry out the tasks necessary – including the right to ask other people to undertake particular tasks. A manager should not be given responsibility without the necessary authority, but conversely delegation of authority implies responsibility and the need for accountability.

2 What is organisational structure?

12 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Span of control refers to the number of subordinates directly reporting to a manager or supervisor.

l Span of Control. There is a limit to the number of activities or people that can be supervised effectively by one person. What constitutes an effective span of control will be determined by a number of factors, including:

l the similarity of tasks/functions undertaken (the more similar, the greater the potential effective span of control)

l the proximity of the tasks to each other and to the supervisor (the closer the proximity, the greater the potential effective span of control)

l the complexity of the tasks (the more complex, the smaller the potential effective span of control)

l the direction and control needed by subordinates (the more direction and control needed, the smaller the potential effective span of control).

Activity 2 Consider the organisation where you (or a close friend or relative) work or have worked.

l What is the span of control of your immediate manager? l What is the span of control of her or his manager? l Do you think they are appropriate, bearing in mind the ability of either person to

monitor what is going on in the organisation?

Provide your answer...

Discussion The appropriateness of a span of control may depend on the extent of the delegation that can be exercised by managers (i.e., entrusting the responsibility for tasks to someone else) and also on reporting mechanisms within the organisation. Many organisations have introduced systems of regular meetings between managers and staff at which SMART objectives are set and monitored. SMART objectives are:

l Specific l Measurable l Achievable l Realistic l Time-bound (i.e., have a defined time scale associated with their achievement).

If objectives are SMART, managers should be able to tell whether or not they have been achieved. The appropriateness of the span of control will then be related to the number of people who can realistically be monitored in this way and the frequency with which monitoring takes place.

2 What is organisational structure?

13 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

2.2 Tall versus flat organisations Where there is a large number of levels in the management hierarchy, the organisation is said to be ‘tall’. This will tend to result in narrow spans of control. Where there is a small number of levels in the hierarchy, the organisation is said to be ‘flat’. Flat organisations will tend to have wide spans of control. Figure 3 shows a comparison of tall and flat organisation structures.

Figure 3 Tall and flat organisations

In recent years, there has been a trend towards delayering, whereby tall organisations have tended to become flat organisations by the removal of various levels in the hierarchy. This has been facilitated by:

(a) Information technology, which has reduced the need for many middle management jobs, which were largely concerned with processing information to facilitate control within the organisational hierarchy.

(b) The management philosophy of empowerment, whereby people at lower levels have been delegated authority to take actions and make decisions which would previously have been the domain of middle managers

Changes in organisation structures have led to changes in approach to management and vice versa.

The advantages of delayering are:

(a) A significant reduction in costs as middle managers’ salary costs are removed. (b) Increased motivation as people at lower levels are given power/discretion to make

decisions. Improved performance is likely to be a consequence of increased motivation.

2 What is organisational structure?

14 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

(c) Improved, faster communication between senior management and operational levels – increasingly important in a faster changing, more uncertain and increasingly competitive external environment.

There are also disadvantages to delayering, the principal one being a possible loss of control. Middle managers are often necessary to translate the inevitably broad and general plans of senior management into operational plans and actions that can be implemented. Senior managers may have only a hazy understanding of what is going on at the operational level and much is thereby entrusted to relatively junior people (Coates et al., 1996, p. 116).

Activity 3

l How will a tall organisational structure, in contrast with a flat one, impact on the span of control and the speed of information flows through the organisation?

l What do you think are the advantages and disadvantages of flat organisations?

Provide your answer...

Discussion In tall organisations, managers have smaller spans of control (i.e., fewer people reporting directly to them). This reduces the number of people they have to manage, but means it takes longer for information to travel through the layers of the organisation. In flat organisations, the opposite is true: communication can be quicker because of fewer layers, but the spans of control are larger. In recent years, tall organisations have tended to be associated with large bureaucracies. Communication will be formal and middle managers may be in a position to use information as a device to retain control. On the other hand, smaller spans of control may mean that managers have more time to manage. Furthermore, there are more explicit career paths, with opportunities for promotion. In flat organisations, the opposite is true: communication can be quicker because of fewer layers, but the spans of control are larger. In recent years, tall organisations have tended to be associated with large bureaucracies. Communication will be formal and middle managers may be in a position to use information as a device to retain control. On the other hand, smaller spans of control may mean that managers have more time to manage. Furthermore, there are more explicit career paths, with opportunities for promotion. Flat organisations have developed because there is a belief that communication is impaired by additional levels of management. Flatter organisations are thought to be able to react to change more quickly. Managers may be forced to delegate if their span of control is enlarged. This can be motivating for those to whom work is delegated. On the other hand, career paths are less explicit: employees may have to look sideways or even outside the organisation for career development opportunities.

2 What is organisational structure?

15 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

3 Forms of organisational structure It is no easy task to design and develop a structure. Many organisations continuously debate whether to structure around products, geography, common tasks or information. It is, however, possible to distinguish six important forms of organisational structure:

1 functional structure 2 product or service structure 3 geographical structure 4 matrix structure 5 project team 6 hybrid structure

Each of these forms is now explained in turn.

3.1 Functional structure As you can see from Figure 4, in a functional structure people are grouped according to the type of job they do.

Figure 4 A functional structure

This structure may be appropriate when people within functional departments need to communicate regularly with each other. For example, in a marketing department, the marketing director will coordinate the activities of marketing specialists in fields such as promotion, advertising, product design, market research, and packaging. Although there is a need for communication with all the other parts of the company, the bulk of the information exchange and communication is likely to be within the functional areas, so it makes sense to group these people together. Functional structures, however, can have disadvantages.

l Career paths tend to develop through functions and this can reduce managers’ awareness of other issues facing the organisation. The organisation will not develop many generalists this way (e.g., people who know about marketing and operations or finance and HR). This will expose the organisation to significant risks, as managers will not have an overview of its operations.

l Staff may work for the benefit of their department and not the organisation as a whole.

3 Forms of organisational structure

16 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l Many members of staff may never meet an external customer and may not therefore have a customer service orientation.

3.2 Product or service structure

Figure 5 Product and service structures

At first glance this looks similar to the functional structure, but here staff members are grouped together on product or service lines. This very often happens in larger organisations. For example, a big accountancy firm may group staff by the industry served or a public education department may group staff around different areas of work (e.g., pre- school children, primary, secondary and special needs). Each product or service group will have its own production and service people and also its own accounting and personnel staff. A product or service structure can be more responsive to customer needs and better at motivating staff. However, there is a danger of creating independent units, which can be difficult to manage as they assume the attitude, ‘we know what the customer wants, so stop interfering!’. It can also mean that professional expertise becomes fragmented. For example, if each product line has its own small accounting team (perhaps just one person) this may reduce career opportunities for specialists.

3.3 Geographical structure

3 Forms of organisational structure

17 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 6 A geographical structure

A variation on the product or service structure is to group staff by physical location – for example, by region, country or continent. This has advantages for international organisations because there are likely to be big differences in markets, languages and cultures. National issues are usually best identified locally. However, there are several disadvantages to structuring by location:

l information flows between staff in different locations can be costly and problematic l there may be duplication of activities, typically, support functions such as accounting,

human resources and information technology l it may be difficult to achieve integrated strategies across a number of different

countries.

3.4 Matrix structure We have seen that functional, product or service, and geographical structures all have disadvantages. In a matrix structure, each person has two reporting lines: (i) to the functional head; and (ii) to a project, product, service or region manager. These dual reporting lines are permanent. Advocates of matrix structures believe that they combine the advantages of both functional and product or service structures. Figure 7 is an example of a matrix structure.

Figure 7 An example of how a matrix structure might work

In Figure 7, there is a Finance function and everyone in it will report to the Finance Director. However, each product (1, 2, 3, 4) will have its own independent finance team who also will report to the relevant product or service manager. Hence each group has two people to whom they report – a functional manager and a product/service manager. There are, however, problems associated with a matrix structure. First, heads of reporting lines may need to meet regularly to decide how to apportion each person’s time. What

3 Forms of organisational structure

18 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

happens if the Finance Director and the Service 1 manager disagree about what the Service 1 finance team should be doing? Staff may feel uncomfortable with the change and uncertainty implicit in a matrix structure. In practice, matrix structures can be very difficult to manage. Dual reporting can lead to conflict, confusion, and overlapping responsibilities. This can then result in loss of accountability. There could be a number of people who are responsible if Service 1 budgets are delivered late. The person responsible could be the Finance Director who changed the format, or the Service 1 manager who would not agree a sales budget, or the Service 1 finance team who took advantage of the conflict between the Finance Director and the Service 1 manager to get more time to do the task. Matrix structures can suffer from low responsiveness, slow decision making and high levels of internal political conflict. On the other hand, they can offer a way of forcing people to work flexibly across functional boundaries (which can result in some productivity benefits for the organisation and outweigh the potential disadvantages). Organisations such as Texas Instruments, Shell, NASA, NCR, ITT and Monsanto Chemical have attributed some of their success to the matrix structure, which, in their opinion, helped them respond rapidly to customers’ needs.

3.5 Project teams Some organisations carry out the bulk of their work through project teams, which are often set up to react to changing circumstances and allow the organisation to respond quickly. They are an example of what are called organic structures, as distinct from the mechanistic structures that have been described so far. Project teams draw staff from across the organisation, seconded on a full or part time basis. The latter can be very stressful for the individual, who effectively gets two jobs usually for the life of the project. An example of how this might work can be seen in Figure 8. This looks very like the matrix structure you have just looked at – and in a way it is. Clearly, those serving on project teams also have two reporting lines: to their functional head and to the project manager. The main difference is that the project teams are not permanent groupings like the Service 1, 2, 3, 4 groupings we saw in the matrix structure in Figure 7. Instead, these project teams only last as long as the projects on which they are working. This can lead to problems of control but, on the other hand, it can generate a tremendous sense of excitement as project goals are achieved. Also, fast moving changes can be implemented as a result of the flexibility and speed of response that this sort of structure can give an organisation.

3 Forms of organisational structure

19 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 8 An example of project teams working across a functionally structured organisation

3.6 Hybrid structure In practice, organisations evolve and changes to their structure should occur as and when necessary. This evolutionary process can produce structures that are well adapted to meeting the particular needs of the moment. A hybrid (mixture) of functional and product or service structures is common, and Figure 9 illustrates how this might look. Here we see that the sales function is structured along product lines.

3 Forms of organisational structure

20 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 9 The organisational structure of a department store as a typical hybrid of product and function.

A hybrid structure might include functional departments, the work of which is primarily internal (e.g., finance and HR), with the rest of the company organised on a product, service, geographic or project basis, as required to meet best the needs of the customer (as in Figure 9).

3.7 Recent trends in organisational design In response to a dynamic, fast changing and competitive environment, flexibility and speed of decision making have become increasingly important in modern organisations. This has led to a number of trends in recent years:

1 The flattening of structures to remove levels in the organisational hierarchy. This shortens the chain of command and thereby increases the speed of decision making.

2 The establishment of multi-functional project teams and an empowered, multi-skilled workforce to increase flexibility.

3 A customer service orientation rather than an inward, internal process orientation. 4 The emergence of the ‘flexible firm’. In an increasingly competitive environment,

continuous reduction of costs is essential. Organisations have responded by replacing full time, permanent, salaried staff with temporary and part time contract labour. This allows greater flexibility, as labour can be readily taken on/laid off as demand conditions fluctuate. It also provides substantial savings in pension, health insurance and holiday pay costs. Such organisations consist of a small core of permanent full time salaried professional staff, who organise and direct the

3 Forms of organisational structure

21 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

organisation’s affairs, supplemented by various levels of contract staff. Some of these will be professionals contracted for particular projects, but the majority are likely to be the flexible workforce that carries out the routine operations of the organisation.

4 Organisational departments and functions Business organisations typically consist of a number of departments or functions and it is important to have an appreciation of the purpose and activities of these departments/ functions in order to understand the role of management accounting in the organisation. After all, management accounting is concerned with providing managers at all levels with information to help them undertake their various activities and to monitor/report on the impact of these activities on the organisation. A well designed management accounting system must be based on an understanding of what various managers actually do.

Management accountants are increasingly acting as ‘business partners’ to teams in other functional areas of the organisation. If they are to be accepted within these decision making teams, it is essential they understand the operations and technology of the organisation.

4.1 Typical business organisation departments and functions A typical business organisation may consist of the following main departments or functions:

l Production l Research and Development (often abbreviated to R&D) l Purchasing l Marketing (including the selling function) l Human Resource Management l Accounting and Finance.

4.2 The Production function The Production function undertakes the activities necessary to provide the organisation’s products or services. Its main responsibilities are:

l production planning and scheduling l control and supervision of the production workforce

4 Organisational departments and functions

22 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l managing product quality (including process control and monitoring l maintenance of plant and equipment l control of inventory l deciding the best production methods and factory layout.

Close collaboration will usually be necessary between Production and various other functions within the organisation, for example:

l Research and Development, concerning the implications of product design for production methods and cost

l Marketing, concerning desired product functionality, appearance, quality, durability and so on

l Finance, concerning the availability of funds for purchase of new equipment and the acceptability of inventory levels.

l Human Resource Management, concerning staff motivation implications of job design and production methods.

Service organisations Although many of the principles of good management in a manufacturing environment also apply in organisations that provide services (rather than manufacture products), service businesses, such as banking and professional firms of accountants and solicitors, do have a number of distinctive features which have implications for how they are managed.

1 Services are less easily standardised than manufactured products and so service quality tends to be more variable. This makes human resource management and motivation more critical.

2 Services are often ‘intangible’ (i.e., something that cannot be precisely measured or assessed) and multi-dimensional – what exactly is the ‘service’ being offered by a bank, a private hospital or educational establishment? This can make attracting customers more difficult as it often depends on promoting an intangible item.

3 Unlike manufactured products, services cannot be stored, but must be consumed as they are produced or they are wasted. This creates additional problems matching productive capacity with customer demand. This is reflected in, for example, the common practice of commercial airlines offering very cheap flights based on marginal cost to fill empty seats – a plane flying empty to New York is a service provided but wasted!

4 Ascertaining the cost of individual services is often also problematic, as the cost structure of many service businesses is such that costs are often shared among different services. This makes, among other things, pricing and the analysis of profitability of different services more difficult than with most manufactured goods.

4.3 The Research and Development function The Research and Development (R&D) function is concerned with developing new products or processes and improving existing products/processes. R&D activities must be

4 Organisational departments and functions

23 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

closely coordinated with the organisation’s marketing activities to ensure that the organisation is providing exactly what its customers want in the most efficient, effective and economical way.

4.4 The Purchasing function The Purchasing function is concerned with acquiring goods and services for use by the organisation. These will include, for example, raw materials and components for manufacturing and also production equipment. The responsibilities of this function usually extend to buying goods and services for the entire organisation (not just the Production function), including, for example, office equipment, furniture, computer equipment and stationery. In buying goods and services, purchasing managers must take into account a number of factors – collectively referred to as ‘the Purchasing Mix’, namely, Quantity, Quality, Price and Delivery.

l Quantity. Buying in large quantities can attract price discounts and prevent inventory running out. On the other hand, there are substantial costs involved in carrying a high level of inventory.

l Quality. There will usually be a trade-off between price and quality in acquiring goods and services. Consequently, Production, R&D and Marketing Functions will need to be consulted to determine an acceptable level of quality which will depend on how important quality is as an attribute of the final product or service of the organisation.

l Price. Other things being equal, the purchasing manager will look for the best price deal when procuring goods and services, although price must be considered in conjunction with quality and supplier reliability, in order to achieve best value, rather than lowest price only.

l Delivery. The time between placing an order and receiving the goods or services, the lead time, can be critical for production planning and scheduling and also has implications for inventory control. Suppliers must therefore be evaluated in terms of their reliability and capability for on time delivery.

In short, the ‘purchasing mix’ can be considered as making sure that the organisation has the right amount, of the right quality, at the right price, in the right place at the right time!

4.5 The Marketing function Marketing is concerned with identifying and satisfying customers needs at the right price. Marketing involves researching what customers want and analysing how the organisation can satisfy these wants. Marketing activities range from the ‘strategic’, concerned with the choice of product markets (and how to compete in them, for example, on price or product differentiation) to the operational, arranging sales promotions (e.g., offering a 25 per cent discount), producing literature such as product catalogues and brochures, placing advertisements in the appropriate media and so on. A fundamental activity in marketing is managing the Marketing Mix consisting of the ‘4Ps’: Product, Price, Promotion and Place.

l Product. Having the right product in terms of benefits that customers value. l Price. Setting the right price which is consistent with potential customers’ perception

of the value offered by the product.

4 Organisational departments and functions

24 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l Promotion. Promoting the product in a way which creates maximum customer awareness and persuades potential customers to make the decision to purchase the product.

l Place. Making the product available in the right place at the right time – including choosing appropriate distribution channels.

In order to be successful, a business enterprise must either have a lower price than its competitors, or a product that is in some way superior – or both! A competitive strategy based on low price is known as a cost leadership strategy. A competitive strategy based on developing a superior product is known as a differentiation strategy.

The historical evolution of marketing Several writers (e.g., Harrison, 1978) have argued (and it is now widely accepted among management theorists and practitioners) that there have been three distinct eras in the history of advanced capitalist countries, such as the UK, which have affected the status, role and responsibilities of the Marketing function. These were:

1 The Production Era (pre–1930). This refers to a period of time during which products (and services) were relatively scarce (thereby constraining consumer choice) and the most important function of business was that of production. Marketing, in so far as it existed, was considered the least important function.

2 The Sales Era (1930–50). This refers to an era characterised by a shift in emphasis of business management from the production function to that of selling. With continued industrial development and innovations, many new consumer oriented products became available and a much more competitive selling environment resulted. This made it necessary to seek out customers and make significant use of advertising, promotion and personal selling.

3 The Marketing Era (1950–present). This period marked another significant change in the attitude of senior management towards the status and responsibilities of marketing. This change, referred to by many writers as the Marketing Concept (Kotler, 1967), meant a departure from the previous concept of marketing as being the sales function of a business, to one where marketing had a much greater responsibility in total company policy formation and operation. Under the Marketing Concept, marketing was placed at the beginning of the process of determining the products (services) which were needed by the market, the price at which they should be sold and the way in which they were to be distributed.

4 Organisational departments and functions

25 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 10 ‘We produce an inferior line of goods. That’s why we’re looking for a real first class marketing man.’

4.6 The Human Resources function The Human Resources function is concerned with the following:

l Recruitment and selection. Ensuring that the right people are recruited to the right jobs.

l Training and development. Enabling employees to carry out their responsibilities effectively and make use of their potential.

l Employee relations. Including negotiations over pay and conditions. l Grievance procedures and disciplinary matters. Dealing with complaints from

employees or from the employer. l Health and Safety matters Making sure employees work in a healthy and safe

environment. l Redundancy procedures Administering a proper system that is seen to be fair to all

concerned when deciding on redundancies and agreeing redundancy payments.

Organisations are dependent on their employees. Consequently, their recruitment and selection require careful management.

In recent years, the Human Resources function has attained a more important status as there has developed an increasing need (especially in service organisations) to ‘get the most’ from employees, in terms of customer service, for the benefit of the organisation.

4 Organisational departments and functions

26 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

4.7 The Accounting and Finance function The Accounting and Finance function is concerned with the following:

l Financial record keeping of transactions involving monetary inflows or outflows. l Preparing financial statements (the income statement, balance sheet and cash

flow statement) for reporting to external parties such as shareholders. The financial statements are also the starting point for calculating any tax due on business profits.

l Payroll administration Paying wages and salaries and maintaining appropriate income tax and national insurance records.

l Preparing management accounting information and analysis to help managers to plan, control and make decisions.

5 Decentralisation and centralisation Centralisation describes a situation where decision making authority is held predomi- nantly by senior managers within an organisation. Such a situation is common within smaller businesses where the owner/manager takes all the important decisions. Centralisation, however, is not only found in such organisations, as a number of very large organisations, such as banks and some large retailers, are also highly centralised. Little, if any, discretion is given to branch managers, who must simply run their branches in accordance with the procedures established by Head Office. Decentralisation describes the situation where the authority to make decisions is delegated to people at lower levels of the organisation. This often occurs where growth in size and increased complexity make the delegation of significant decision making authority necessary. Decentralisation is a matter of degree and is usually present to varying degrees in most organisations.

Effective delegation has benefits for managers, staff and the organisation as a whole.

5.1 Advantages of decentralisation Coates et al. (1996, pp. 115–6) identify the advantages of decentralisation as follows:

l Specialisation. Managers can develop more detailed and specialised knowledge by concentrating on a limited aspect of the organisation’s operations. This should result in better quality decisions.

l Timeliness. Quicker decisions are possible if it is not necessary to pass decisions up through the hierarchical chain of command. In addition, senior managers’ time is then available for more important decisions affecting the future of the whole organisation.

l Motivation. Having authority to make decisions usually results in greater motivation and commitment and hence improved performance.

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

27 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l Human resource development. Less experienced managers can ‘learn their trade’ without their mistakes jeopardising the entire organisation. The impact of mistakes/ misjudgements is likely to be confined to a limited aspect of the organisation’s operations.

l Organisational segment performance comparison. By dividing the organisation into separate segments, it is possible to evaluate which aspects of operations are performing well and which are not – something not usually possible when the inputs/ outputs are at a more aggregate level.

5.2 Disadvantages of decentralisation Coates et al. (1996, pp. 115–6) also identify the disadvantages of decentralisation as follows:

l Dysfunctional decision making. This occurs where managers take actions which improve the measured performance of their organisational segment, but damage the organisation as a whole. For example, a manager in one department may keep costs down in his/her own department in ways which have an impact on the quality of service provided to other departments.

l Loss of control. There is a danger that senior management may lose control of the organisation, as they become far removed from the detail of underlying operations and unaware of the decisions being made by lower level managers.

l Increased cost of control. Costly management information systems may be necessary to monitor the performance of lower management levels to ensure that delegated decision making authority is being used in the best interests of the organisation.

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

28 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 11 ‘In the interest of overcoming my reluctance to delegate, starting Monday I want you to do all of my worrying for me.’

5.3 Responsibility centres Decentralisation results in the creation of separate responsibility centres – aspects/ areas of the organisation’s operations for which a particular manager is responsible. The main types of responsibility centre in common use are as follows. Cost centre. The manager is assumed to be able to influence significantly the level of cost incurred and will be judged according to how well costs are controlled. There may or may not be revenues associated with the particular aspect of operations concerned, but if there are, the manager is assumed to have no control over these. Managers of cost centres will need regular information to be provided by the accounting system, concerning how individual cost items compare with budget – that is, budget variance and, of course, budgetary planning information, for example, cost targets to be achieved. Revenue centre. The manager is assumed to be able to influence significantly the level of revenue earned and will be judged on the basis of this. Revenue centres are principally intended to be applied to sales operations, where the manager’s responsibilities relate to the generation of income, whether or not there are attributable costs. Managers will need information concerning targets for individual revenue generating units (e.g., products), and also regular feedback information on actual versus budgeted revenues. Profit centre. The manager is assumed to be able to influence significantly both costs and revenues and is judged on the basis of the level of profit generated by the particular aspect of operations concerned. The term profit centre is usually limited to the situation where the manager does not have responsibility for the level of investment in the centre (this decision being made by more senior management). Managers need information concerning both revenues and costs, for example, which products/services are profitable.

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

29 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Investment centre. This is a type of profit centre, but one for which the manager also has significant influence over investment decisions. In such cases, it would be expected that, in addition to the normal profit centre measures (e.g., Return on Sales), profit would be related to the capital invested (e.g., Return on Investment). Managers need the same information as for profit centres and in addition, detailed appraisals of potential investments and control information concerning the level of investment (e.g., working capital levels, namely, inventory, receivables and payables) at any particular point in time.

Activity 4 What do you think would be the appropriate type of responsibility centre for each of the following functions/departments?

l A marketing department l A research and development department l A machinery service and repair department of a factory l The German manufacturing and distribution division of a large multinational

company l A regional sales office of a US company

How would you measure the performance of the manager/s of each centre?

Provide your answer...

Discussion In some organisations, which are departmentalised on the basis of product groups, each product group department will have its own marketing activities. Where, however, an organisation is departmentalised on a functional basis and has a separate marketing department serving all its product groups, this department will incur expenditure on behalf of the whole organisation, but will not have its own revenues. It is likely then to be a cost centre. The same is true of a research and development and a service and repairs department. Research and development is difficult to measure, but this is attempted in many firms by use of such measures as number of patents registered, percentage of sales from recently introduced products and so on. The German manufacturing division of a large multinational company is likely to earn revenues (the level of which it can presumably influence) and incur costs (the level of which it can also influence). It is likely to be a profit centre, or even an investment centre. A regional sales office is likely to be able to influence the level of revenue generated, but the main elements of cost (e.g., sales personnel salaries) are likely to be the result of decisions made by more senior (Head Office) managers. It is likely to be a revenue centre. Responsibility centres should be evaluated according to financial performance (comparison of budgeted and actual costs, revenues and profits as appropriate). It will probably be desirable also to measure various non-financial indicators that are important for each centre achieving its goals – for example, in the case of the service and repairs department, average response time for machine breakdowns, and in the

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

30 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

case of the research and development department, the number of new product or process innovations, and so on.

5.4 The divisionalised organisation The ultimate form of decentralisation occurs when an organisation is separated into a number of investment centres that operate almost as independent businesses, each with its own profit responsibility. The basis of divisionalisation may be according to product (or service), geographical area and so on. Such a divisional structure is illustrated by the common legal form of groups with subsidiary companies. Each division in the organisation will typically have its own functional structure.

5.5 Line and staff relationships The existence of an organisational structure implies that authority and control are exercised from above and pass down through the hierarchy. The relationships that result are known as line relationships. In any organisation, there should be a clear line of authority and responsibility from the top to the bottom of the hierarchy: the ‘scalar chain’ which indicates the line relationships. By contrast, staff relationships exist when a manager gives/receives advice from another organisational member. For example, the Accounting and Finance manager will provide information and analysis to help the Marketing and Production managers make decisions and control their respective operations.

Activity 5 This activity draws together some important ideas you have considered concerning organisation structure. Consider the organisation in which you work, or one with which you are familiar. (Focus on the part of the organisation with which you are most familiar.)

l What is the span of control? l How many layers or levels of management are there? Is your organisation tall or

flat? l Is authority centralised or decentralised? l How clear is the definition of jobs? Do some of them overlap? l To how many people do employees report? Are there single or dual lines of

control?

You may find it difficult to answer these questions, especially if there are dual responsibilities or reporting lines in some areas.

Provide your answer...

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

31 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

6 The organisational environment Organisations exist in an environment – everything that surrounds the organisation physically and socially. The constituents of the organisation’s environment are likely to have an important impact on the management of the organisation. An organisation’s management must systematically analyse its environment in formulating plans to achieve organisational objectives. The major environmental factors impacting on an organisation can be grouped under four headings: political/legal, economic, social/demographic and technological (reflected in the acronym: PEST analysis).

6.1 Political and legal environment Clearly, there are laws that must be complied with, emanating from a number of sources, of which the organisation must be aware. These cover areas such as:

l ways of doing business (e.g., included within contract law); professional negligence (included within the law of tort)

l protection of consumers (e.g., Sale of Goods Act 1979, Consumer Credit Act 1974, 2006)

l safe working environment for employees (health and safety legislation) l confidentiality and use of information held concerning customers or employees (Data

Protection Act 1998) l duties of directors and financial reporting requirements (company law, in particular,

the Companies Act 2006) l minimum wage, equal opportunities and unfair dismissal rules (employment law)

pollution, waste disposal (environmental legislation) l tax liabilities (tax law).

In recent years, the European Union (EU) has become increasingly important for member states in terms of international trade rules. In addition to requiring the removal of trade barriers, the EU requires that:

l there be free movement of capital between countries l governments do not discriminate between companies in different EU countries in

awarding government contracts l financial services can be provided in any EU country l telecommunications organisations be opened up to greater competition l qualifications awarded in one country are recognised in the others.

In addition to the legal framework, government impacts directly on many organisations in a number of ways:

l via taxes or subsidies to discourage/encourage particular activities (e.g., alcohol consumption)

6 The organisational environment

32 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l national and, in particular, European, regulations have impacted on organisations in ways such as product standardisation, anti-discrimination legislation, workers’ rights, etc.

l location incentives (often funded by the European Union) to encourage businesses to locate in particular areas

l by providing barriers to entry (e.g., the requirement to obtain a license to operate) and thus restricting competition in a particular field

l the government may be a major customer l anti-monopoly, competition legislation l as a supplier of infrastructure (e.g., roads), government can influence competition

(e.g., road versus rail freight).

Political change, for example, wars, expropriation or nationalisation, political instability and so on, can also present a major threat to organisational plans.

6.2 Economic environment Economic variables such as inflation, interest rates, savings patterns, economic growth, exchange rates, the levels of taxation and government spending all influence the amount of money people have to spend. This is likely to have an impact on most organisations. Businesses will experience, for example, varying levels of demand for their products or services and charities will experience varying levels of donations, as the amount of money people have to spend fluctuates in response to variations in major economic variables.

6.3 Demographic and social trends impacting on organisations Demography is concerned with the study of data relating to the population and groups within it – births, deaths, diseases and so on – as indicators of the conditions of life in communities. Recent trends in the UK include a fall in the number of young people entering the labour market and an increase in the number of retired people. Such data are used by organisations, especially in the identification of consumer markets, but they are also important for human resource management too. Organisations must monitor demographic changes in their HR planning, especially with regard to recruitment. These changes must be taken into account in considering the best ways to tap into the future talent pool. It will be necessary to assess the current and future labour requirements in terms of both the level and the type of labour. The area from which the labour force is to be drawn must be identified. Once the labour force recruitment area is identified, the size and composition of the available labour force can be determined. The next step then involves a comparison of need as opposed to supply. In view of recent demographic changes, it is likely to be necessary to tap into currently under-utilised labour resources such as older workers and women returning to work after long periods spent bringing up children. HR policies need to be geared towards these requirements, for example, by providing training (e.g., in IT skills), part time working and child care facilities.

6 The organisational environment

33 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

6.4 Sociological factors A number of factors concerning the way society is structured will also be of relevance to many organisations.

Social class An important component of social structure is social class. Social class refers to the hierarchical distinction between individuals or groups in society. The factors that determine class vary from one society to another. The most obvious meaning of this term used to be in relation to the stratum of society into which one was born (aristocratic, middle class, working class) and class still means this to many people. In contemporary capitalist societies, it is common to define class in terms of income, status, education or profession, or a combination of these. An important implication of the existence of such a class structure is that social class can create different customer groups. It is therefore a tool for market segmentation. The social classes are widely used to profile and predict different customer behaviour. Identifying a segment, in which customers share certain characteristics, such as level of income, is useful when developing products for those customers.

Culture Culture refers to a set of shared attitudes, values, goals and practices that characterise a society or a social group within it. Cultural factors also have a significant impact on customer behaviour as culture is the most fundamental influence on a person’s wants and behaviour. As with social class, culture can create customer groups and is therefore important for marketing. For example, there has been a cultural shift towards greater concern about health and fitness, which has created opportunities for serving customers who wish to buy:

l low calorie foods l health club memberships l exercise equipment l activity- or health-related holidays.

Similarly, the increased desire for leisure time has resulted in increased demand for convenience products and services such as microwave ovens, ready meals and direct marketing service businesses such as telephone banking and insurance. Each culture contains sub-cultures – particular groups of people with shared values. Sub- cultures can include nationalities, religions, and racial groups of people sharing the same geographical location. Sometimes a sub-culture will create a substantial and distinctive market segment of its own. For example, the ‘youth culture’ or ‘club culture’ has quite distinct values and buying characteristics from the much older ‘grey generation’.

6 The organisational environment

34 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 12 ‘This looks good. It’s a six hour special on how society is becoming too sedentary.’

Cultural shifts also impact on other functions within an organisation. For example, there has been a dramatic increase in the number of women participating in the workforce and this raises a number of potential (and actual) discrimination issues, for instance, in terms of promotion and seniority and sexual harassment. HR policies must attempt to guard against these. Many organisations are responding by, for example:

l introducing flexible working hours to help women cope with the demands of career and family responsibilities

l providing education and training for managers and the workforce to encourage equal opportunities and discourage discrimination.

Another important cultural shift is the increasing concern for the physical environment among organisations’ various stakeholders (employees, customers, investors, local community and so on). Organisations are responding in a number of ways:

l by introducing ‘green products’ to exploit the opportunity, for example, environmen- tally friendly deodorants, washing powder and cleaning agents

l by exercising greater care in disposing of industrial waste l by reducing their carbon footprint by, for example, sourcing raw materials locally,

not using air freight, using video conferencing instead of executive travel, using energy efficient appliances, etc.

l by social and environmental reporting. Increasingly, large companies are providing information (which is not currently required by law or accounting regulations) on environmental policies in their annual financial reports.

Many companies now present a corporate social responsibility report, although the content varies greatly between companies. This report is usually posted on the company’s website.

6 The organisational environment

35 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

In addition to such voluntary responses based on enlightened self-interest, organisations are increasingly needing to familiarise themselves with environmental legislation and direct government action, for example:

l the congestion charge in inner London l fines for breaching pollution guidelines l the landfill tax on hazardous waste.

6.5 Technology and its impact In recent years, information systems (IS) and information technology (IT) have had a profound impact on most organisations. So pervasive is IT that IT skills are now essential for employees in virtually all organisations. IT has:

l facilitated flatter organisations and wider spans of control l made possible faster, more accurate processing of larger volumes of data l provided access to more – and more up to date – information for managers l provided computer modelling (e.g., simulations) which can improve the quality of

planning and decision making l made possible the provision of control information to senior managers in real time l improved customer service by provision of electronic data interchange (EDI)

between organisations, customer databases, extranets and so on.

Perhaps even more dramatic than the improvements in information processing are the improvements in communications that IT has provided. E-mail provides instant worldwide messaging; online conferencing enables collaboration between people in geographi- cally distant locations; voice mail allows communication between people whose working time schedules do not coincide; video conferencing allows face to face meetings without the need for expensive travel. IT has also changed the relationship between employers and employees and the nature of work, for example in terms of:

l home working (telecommuting) is commonplace, providing more flexible working arrangements and reducing the time and cost of travelling to work

l greater visibility provided to management, allowing increased monitoring and control.

Activity 6

(a) Explain (spend no more than about ten minutes on this) why it is necessary for an organisation to undertake a PEST analysis.

(b) Give three examples of actions that might result from such an analysis.

Provide your answer...

Discussion Environmental changes may have a significant impact on the organisation’s ability to achieve its objectives, including, possibly, survival. Major environmental changes,

6 The organisational environment

36 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

however, can often be anticipated if the environment is systematically monitored and analysed, and appropriate action can be taken to safeguard against threats and/or exploit opportunities arising. Examples of possible actions in response to an environmental analysis include:

l developing a new product range based on emerging technology ahead of the competition

l developing staff education and training programmes in anticipation of future skills shortages in the local labour market

l planning a programme of redundancies based on anticipation of a serious economic downturn.

Conclusion This course has provided an introduction to the nature of organisations. You should now have an appreciation of the way in which different organisations are structured and of the different components within an organisation. You should also have an understanding of the main environmental factors that impact on organisations, including political/legal, economic, social/demographic and technological factors.

Keep on learning

Conclusion

37 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Study another free course There are more than 800 courses on OpenLearn for you to choose from on a range of subjects. Find out more about all our free courses.

Take your studies further Find out more about studying with The Open University by visiting our online prospectus. If you are new to university study, you may be interested in our Access Courses or Certificates.

What’s new from OpenLearn? Sign up to our newsletter or view a sample.

For reference, full URLs to pages listed above:

OpenLearn – www.open.edu/openlearn/free-courses

Visiting our online prospectus – www.open.ac.uk/courses

Access Courses – www.open.ac.uk/courses/do-it/access

Certificates – www.open.ac.uk/courses/certificates-he

Newsletter – www.open.edu/openlearn/about-openlearn/subscribe-the-openlearn-newsletter

Glossary anti-monopoly, competition legislation Laws which seek to maintain the benefits of competition (in order to protect con- sumers), by preventing the emergence of monopolies in a particular market.

balance sheet An accounting report summarising an organisation’s assets and liabilities.

barriers to entry Factors that prevent competitors from entering a particular market.

carbon footprint The total amount of carbon emissions (greenhouse gasses), that result from an organisation’s activities.

cash flow statement

Glossary

38 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

An accounting report showing the principal types of cash inflows and outflows during a period and any cash surplus or deficit arising.

cooperative firms/social enterprises Organisations which are typically engaged in commercial activity, but whose primary purpose is social (for example, to provide employment) rather than earning profit for the owner/s. Such organisations are typically owned by their employees and/or customers.

Cost centre. A production or service location, function, activity or item of equipment for which costs are accumulated.A responsibility centre (e.g. division, department) where local man- agement has responsibility for and is called to account on the basis of costs (or expenses) only.

Culture The set of shared attitudes, values, goals and practices that characterise a society or social groups within it. Culture is a term which describes the psychology, attitudes, experiences, beliefs and values of an organisation. It has also been defined as the specific collection of values and norms that are shared by people and groups in an organization and that control the way they interact with each other and with stake- holders outside the organisation.

databases A computer-based store of organised data, structured so that it can be used to deliver information to more than one application.

delayering The process of removing layers in the management hierarchy, so that ‘tall’ organisations become flatter, with fewer hierarchical levels.

Demography The study of data relating to the population, for example, birth and death rates and population age profiles.

divisionalisation The process of dividing an organisation into a number of separate investment centres/ business segments (divisions) that operate almost as independent businesses.

effectively Achieving the specified outcomes; the extent to which specified outcomes are achieved.

efficiently Achieving specified outputs with the minimum necessary inputs (for a given quality specification).

electronic data interchange (EDI) The exchange of information directly between separate information systems (usually in different organisations). It is the basis of electronic commerce.

empowerment Giving employees power, in order to increase their self-confidence and motivation in order to improve their performance in pursuing organisational objectives.

extranets A form of intranet, accessible by specified individuals who may be outside a particular organisation, for example as customers or suppliers.

‘For-profit’ (commercial) organisations Commercial organisations whose primary purpose is to earn profit for the owner/s.

Glossary

39 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

income statement An accounting report summarising revenues earned, expenditure incurred and any surplus/deficit of revenue over expenditure during a certain period.

Investment centre. A type of profit centre for which the manager also has significant influence over the amount of capital investment and is therefore also responsible for profit in relation to capital employed.

lead time The time between a customer placing an order and the product or service being delivered.

line relationships The vertical relationships (in the organisational hierarchy) between managers and subordinates.

Marketing Concept The combination of factors which marketing managers take into account when marketing a product or service, namely: product, price, promotion and place.

mechanistic structures Tall, hierarchical, bureaucratic organisation structures, with centralisation of authority, formalisation of procedures and high levels of specialisation.

Middle line The group of middle managers whose role is to convert the objectives and broad plans of the Strategic Apex into operational plans that can be carried out by the organisation's workers.

‘Not-for–profit’ organisations Organisations that exist to pursue a particular social objective rather than to earn profit for the owner/s.

online conferencing A computer based communication system which enables collaboration between people in geographically distant locations.

Operating core The people who do the basic work of providing the products or delivering the services.

organic structures Flat organisation structures, with decentralisation of authority and low levels of specialisation.

PEST analysis An analysis of the organisation’s Political/legal, Economic, Social/demographic and Technological environment factors (hence the acronym PEST). This analysis is undertaken as part of the organisation's long- term planning process.

Profit centre. A division or department where local management has responsibility for revenue and costs, and is called to account on the basis of the difference between them (e.g. profit, loss, surplus, deficit).

Purchasing Mix The combination of factors which purchasing managers take into account when procuring goods or services, namely: quantity, quality, price and delivery.

responsibility centres

Glossary

40 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

An organisational segment such as a department or a function which a particular manager is accountable for.

Return on Investment Profit expressed as a percentage of the capital invested in an enterprise.

Return on Sales Profit earned expressed as a percentage of sales revenue.

Revenue centre. An organisational segment for which a particular manager is held accountable in terms of revenue earned.

social and environmental reporting The provision of information about an organisation’s social and environmental policies in its annual financial report.

social class The hierarchical distinction between individuals or groups in society. In contemporary capitalist society, it is common to define class in terms of income, education or profession –or a combination of these.

social responsibility objectives Objectives of an organisation relating to wider needs (for example, protecting the environment, provision of employment) rather than just the needs of the owners/ providers of funds.

staff relationships The horizontal relationship between a manager and another organisational member to/ from whom the manager gives or receives information or advice.

stakeholders Individuals or groups who have an interest in the activities of an organisation (they may be influenced by it) and may also have the power to influence the future course of the organisation (such as shareholders or employees). However, stakeholders will differ greatly in their degree of interest and/or influence.

Strategic apex The highest management level in an organisation, whose purpose is to ensure that the organisation follows its mission and manages its relationship with its environment.

Support staff The administrative personnel whose purpose is to provide services to other parts of the organisation.

Technostructure The group of technical/professional staff concerned with the best way of doing a job, specifying output criteria and ensuring that personnel have appropriate skills.

telecommuting Working from home, facilitated by information technology enabled communication with colleagues.

transaction costs The costs of engaging in economic activity resulting from an organisation’s relationship to the market.

video conferencing People in distant locations conducting conferences, through the use of computer networks to transmit audio and video data.

Glossary

41 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

working capital A measure of a company's liquidity and financial health. It encompasses short term assets (stock, debtors, cash) as well as less short term liabilities (creditors) by which they are financed; often referred to as net current assets. Working capital is generally calculated as: Working capital = current capital - current liabilities.

References Table of statutes Great Britain Companies Act 2006. Elizabeth II. Chapter 46. (2006) London: The Stationery Office. Great Britain. Consumer Credit Act 1974. Elizabeth II. Chapter 39. (1974) London: The Stationery Office. Great Britain. Consumer Credit Act 2006. Elizabeth II. Chapter 14.(2006) London: The Stationery Office. Great Britain. Data Protection Act 1998. Elizabeth II. Chapter 29. (1998) London: The Stationery Office. Great Britain. Sale of Goods Act 1979. Elizabeth II. Chapter 54.(1979) London: The Stationery Office. Publications Anthony, R.N. (1965) Planning and Control Systems: A Framework for Analysis, Boston, MA, Division of Research, Harvard Graduate School of Business. Bentley, T.J. (1998) Managing Information: Avoiding Overload, London, Chartered Institute of Management Accountants, Kogan Page. Chandler, A.D. (1962) Strategy and Structure, Boston, MA, MIT Press. Coates, J.B., Rickwood, C. and Stacey, R.J. (1996) Management Accounting for Strategic and Operational Control, Oxford, Butterworth-Heinemann. Davenport, T.H. and Prusak, L. (1997) Working Knowledge, Boston, MA, Harvard Business School Press. Emmanuel, C., Otley, D. and Merchant, K. (1990) Accounting for Management Control (2nd edn), London, Chapman and Hall. Fayol, H. (1949) General and Industrial Management, London, Pitman. Harrison, G.L. (1978) ‘The role of the management accountant in the marketing function of business: case observations and analyses’, Research paper no. 157, School of Economics and Financial Studies, Macquarie University. Johnson, H.T. and Kaplan, R.S. (1987) Relevance Lost: The Rise and Fall of Management Accounting, Boston, MA, Harvard Business School Press. Kotler, P. (1967) Marketing Management, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, Prentice Hall. Mintzberg, H. (1978) ‘Patterns in Strategy Formation’, Management Science, vol. 24, no. 9, pp. 934–48. Mintzberg, H. (1979) The Structuring of Organisations, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, Prentice Hall. Porter, M.E. (1985) Competitive Advantage: Creating and Sustaining Superior Perfor- mance, New York, Free Press.

References

42 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Rockart, J.F. (1979) ‘Chief executives define their own data needs’, Harvard Business Review, vol. 57, no. 2, pp. 238–41.

Acknowledgements This course was written by Dr Mike Lucas. Except for third party materials and otherwise stated (see terms and conditions), this content is made available under a Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 4.0 Licence. The material acknowledged below is Proprietary and used under licence (not subject to Creative Commons Licence). Grateful acknowledgement is made to the following sources for permission to reproduce material in this course: Course image: Ken Teegardin in Flickr made available under Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 2.0 Licence. Images Figure 1: Mintzberg, H. (1979) ‘Five basic parts of organisations’, The Structure of Organizations, Pearson Education, Inc. Illustrations Section 4.5: © John Morris, www.CartoonStock.com Section 5.2: © Mike Shapiro, www.CartoonStock.com Section 6.4: © Mike Shapiro, www.CartoonStock.com Every effort has been made to contact copyright owners. If any have been inadvertently overlooked, the publishers will be pleased to make the necessary arrangements at the first opportunity. Don't miss out: If reading this text has inspired you to learn more, you may be interested in joining the millions of people who discover our free learning resources and qualifications by visiting The Open University - www.open.edu/openlearn/free-courses

Acknowledgements

43 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Business and Business Environment/Support/Organisations_and_business environment(5).pdf

Organisations and management

accounting

About this free course

This free course is an adapted extract from the Open University course B292 Management accounting http://www.open.ac.uk/courses/modules/b292

This version of the content may include video, images and interactive content that may not be optimised for your device.

You can experience this free course as it was originally designed on OpenLearn, the home of free learning from The Open University: www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content- section-0.

There you’ll also be able to track your progress via your activity record, which you can use to demonstrate your learning.

Copyright © 2016 The Open University

Intellectual property

Unless otherwise stated, this resource is released under the terms of the Creative Commons Licence v4.0 http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/4.0/deed.en_GB. Within that The Open University interprets this licence in the following way: www.open.edu/openlearn/about-openlearn/frequently-asked-questions-on-openlearn. Copyright and rights falling outside the terms of the Creative Commons Licence are retained or controlled by The Open University. Please read the full text before using any of the content.

We believe the primary barrier to accessing high-quality educational experiences is cost, which is why we aim to publish as much free content as possible under an open licence. If it proves difficult to release content under our preferred Creative Commons licence (e.g. because we can’t afford or gain the clearances or find suitable alternatives), we will still release the materials for free under a personal end- user licence.

This is because the learning experience will always be the same high quality offering and that should always be seen as positive – even if at times the licensing is different to Creative Commons.

When using the content you must attribute us (The Open University) (the OU) and any identified author in accordance with the terms of the Creative Commons Licence.

The Acknowledgements section is used to list, amongst other things, third party (Proprietary), licensed content which is not subject to Creative Commons licensing. Proprietary content must be used (retained) intact and in context to the content at all times.

The Acknowledgements section is also used to bring to your attention any other Special Restrictions which may apply to the content. For example there may be times when the Creative Commons Non- Commercial Sharealike licence does not apply to any of the content even if owned by us (The Open University). In these instances, unless stated otherwise, the content may be used for personal and non- commercial use.

We have also identified as Proprietary other material included in the content which is not subject to Creative Commons Licence. These are OU logos, trading names and may extend to certain photographic and video images and sound recordings and any other material as may be brought to your attention.

Unauthorised use of any of the content may constitute a breach of the terms and conditions and/or intellectual property laws.

We reserve the right to alter, amend or bring to an end any terms and conditions provided here without notice.

All rights falling outside the terms of the Creative Commons licence are retained or controlled by The Open University.

Head of Intellectual Property, The Open University

2 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Contents Introduction 5 Learning Outcomes 6 1 What is an organisation? 7

1.1 Mintzberg’s five components of organisation 7 1.2 Why do organisations exist? 8 1.3 What types of organisation are there? 9

2 What is organisational structure? 11 2.1 Principles of organisational structure 12 2.2 Tall versus flat organisations 14

3 Forms of organisational structure 16 3.1 Functional structure 16 3.2 Product or service structure 17 3.3 Geographical structure 17 3.4 Matrix structure 18 3.5 Project teams 19 3.6 Hybrid structure 20 3.7 Recent trends in organisational design 21

4 Organisational departments and functions 22 4.1 Typical business organisation departments and functions 22 4.2 The Production function 22 4.3 The Research and Development function 23 4.4 The Purchasing function 24 4.5 The Marketing function 24 4.6 The Human Resources function 26 4.7 The Accounting and Finance function 27

5 Decentralisation and centralisation 27 5.1 Advantages of decentralisation 27 5.2 Disadvantages of decentralisation 28 5.3 Responsibility centres 29 5.4 The divisionalised organisation 31 5.5 Line and staff relationships 31

6 The organisational environment 32 6.1 Political and legal environment 32 6.2 Economic environment 33 6.3 Demographic and social trends impacting on organisations 33 6.4 Sociological factors 34 6.5 Technology and its impact 36

Conclusion 37 Keep on learning 37 Glossary 38

3 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

References 42 Acknowledgements 43

4 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Introduction Management accounting is concerned with providing information and analysis to managers to help them plan, evaluate and control activities, in order to achieve an organisation’s objectives. Whereas financial accounting is concerned with reporting on the past financial performance of an organisation, management accounting is essentially concerned with improving its future performance. In order to understand the concepts and principles of management accounting it is necessary first to have some appreciation of what managers do! This, in turn, requires an understanding of the organisations in which managers work – and of the external environment in which these organisations exist and operate. This OpenLearn free course, therefore, looks at the nature of organisations, specifically their objectives and structure. Organisational objectives and structure are key elements of organisations and they determine management functions and responsibilities within the organisation. The course also considers the main environmental factors (economic, social, political, legal and technological) that impact on organisational behaviour. This OpenLearn course is an adapted extract from the Open University course B292 Management accounting. Tell us what you think! We’d love to hear from you to help us improve our free learning offering through OpenLearn by filling out this short survey.

Introduction

5 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Learning Outcomes After studying this course, you should be able to: l understand the nature and purpose of different types of organisations (commercial, voluntary, public sector and

so on) l describe the different ways in which organisations may be structured l understand basic concepts of organisational structure l describe the main departments or functions of a business organisation l explain the advantages and disadvantages of centralised and decentralised organisations.

1 What is an organisation? An ‘organisation’ is a group of individuals working together to achieve one or more objectives. Although organisations have been defined differently by different theorists, virtually all definitions refer to five common features:

1 they are composed of individuals and groups of individuals 2 they are oriented towards achieving collective goals 3 they consist of different functions 4 the functions need to be coordinated 5 they exist independently of individual members who may come and go.

1.1 Mintzberg’s five components of organisation Mintzberg (1979, p. 24) suggested that all organisations consist of five components, as shown in Figure 1.

Figure 1 Mintzberg’s five parts of the organisation

At the top of the organisation is a Strategic apex the purpose of which is to ensure the organisation follows its mission and manages its relationship with its environment. The

1 What is an organisation?

7 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

individuals comprising the apex, for example, the Chief Executive Officer (CEO), are responsible to owners, government agencies, unions, communities and so on. Below the apex is the Middle line, a group of managers who are concerned with converting the objectives and broad plans of the Strategic apex into operational plans that can be carried out by the workers. As organisations grow and become more complex, they usually develop a separate group of people who are concerned with the best way of doing a job, specifying output criteria (e.g., quality standards) and ensuring that personnel have appropriate skills (e.g., by organising training programmes). This group of analysts is referred to by Mintzberg as the Technostructure. The organisation also adds other administrative functions that provide services to itself, for example legal advice, public relations, mailroom, cafeteria and so on. These are the Support staff. Finally, at the bottom of the organisation, is the Operating core. These are the people who do the basic work of producing the products or delivering the services. Mintzberg’s generic organisational model also illustrates an important principle of organisation structure: the separation of direction and management, whereby those people who decide the mission and general direction of the organisation are different (other than in a very small organisation) from those who handle the implementation of plans and subsequent controlling of operations to ensure that objectives are met. Senior managers (the Strategic apex) will establish long-term organisational objectives and policies through which goals are to be achieved. Middle managers (the Middle line) will be responsible for translating the necessarily broad and general strategic plans into detailed action plans, specifying managerial responsibilities for particular tasks and how resources are to be allocated. These middle managers will also be responsible for monitoring activities and taking action to ensure that resources are being used efficiently and effectively to achieve organisational objectives.

Efficiency refers to the relationship between inputs and outputs. An activity or process is efficient, if it produces a given output with the minimum of inputs necessary. Effectiveness refers to the extent to which goals/objectives are actually achieved.

Other important principles of organisational structure are discussed later in Sections 2 and 3.

1.2 Why do organisations exist? Organisations exist because groups of people working together can achieve more than the sum of the achievements which the individuals in the organisation could produce when working separately. For example, one person might struggle all day to carry a piano upstairs, whereas a team of four people, each taking one corner, may need to put in much less than a quarter of the effort of one person to complete the task (Coates et al., 1996, p. 19). Although such cooperation is beneficial, if individuals pull in different directions, the result is counter-productive. Thus coordination is necessary and this is a fundamental role of management, as will be discussed in a later section of this session. It can also be argued that organisations exist as a result of the impact of transaction costs, because they can arrange transactions between their different parts at a lower total cost than that available in the open market. In crude terms, it may be cheaper to make or do something ‘in house’ because this cuts out the time consuming process of negotiating

1 What is an organisation?

8 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

terms – and renegotiating them every time your requirements change. Before the Industrial Age, it was common for artisans/craftsmen to work individually from home, producing various products, which merchants would purchase from these individuals and sell to consumers. All transactions were conducted through market exchange without the need for formal organisations. As economic development gained pace, however, it became clear that it was more efficient to organise production internally within a firm rather than undertake each transaction externally through the market. The latter process involved substantial costs in terms of time that had to be spent investigating suppliers, detailing specifications, negotiating/renegotiating contracts, checking that agreed terms had been met and so on.

1.3 What types of organisation are there? Organisations can be classified in different ways. One way is according to their over- arching purpose, or primary objective. Broadly, organisations may be classified as ‘for- profit’ (i.e., commercial) or ‘not-for-profit’ entities. ‘For-profit’ (commercial) organisa- tions may have several different objectives. For a very long time, it was generally accepted that maximising the wealth of the owners and continuing in existence were the primary objectives of profit seeking organisations. However, as organisations also aim, for example, to provide goods and services to customers and employment to employees, it is perhaps more reasonable to suggest that increasing, rather than maximising the wealth of owners, is a more fitting objective. ‘Not-for–profit’ organisations comprise a large variety of organisations including charities, clubs, cooperative firms/social enterprises and public sector organisations. Public sector organisations are owned, funded and run by central or local government. They include:

l public hospitals l the armed forces (military) l most schools and universities l government departments.

These organisations exist to provide services which, for various reasons, it is considered impractical or undesirable for the commercial sector to provide. Whereas commercial organisations, charities and social enterprises must generate sufficient funds from their activities to sustain themselves on a continuing basis, public sector organisations are funded by government. Nevertheless, constraints on government expenditure mean that resources are limited. Consequently, economic scarcity requires that virtually all organisations be run effectively and efficiently. As a result, many of the management principles employed by the commercial sector are also employed in the not- for-profit sector, requiring extensive use of management accounting in all sectors. A traditional view of differences between sectors is illustrated in Figure 2. However, these distinctions are becoming blurred, as indicated by the overlapping circles. Commercial organisations are increasingly pursuing social responsibility objectives, while not-for- profit organisations are increasingly adopting commercial criteria to ensure the sound financial management of scarce resources.

Maximisation of shareholder value has long been the publicly stated objective of most business enterprises. It is likely, however, partly as a result of the global financial crises

1 What is an organisation?

9 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

that began in 2008, that the publicly stated objectives will be expanded to embrace more stakeholders, such as employees and the local community.

Figure 2 Organisations highlighting differences between sectors

Activity 1 Think of an organisation that you know well.

l In which sector or sectors from Figure 2 do you feel your organisation most comfortably fits?

l Which factors (profit, accountability, commitment) exert pressure on it or influence its objectives?

1 What is an organisation?

10 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Provide your answer...

Discussion You may have decided that your organisation sits clearly inside one of the circles or, more likely, you will have sited it in an intermediate position – operating for commercial purposes, but anxious to satisfy other criteria such as accountability to a wider public. For example, there has been a rise in the number of investment companies which use not only financial but also ethical criteria to decide in which organisations to invest. Such criteria could include the environmental impact of the production processes used by the companies in question, or the working conditions and wages of their employees. Another example of the mixture of the pressures that can affect organisations could be taken from the social care sector: a organisation in this sector might be keen to provide an excellent service to local people, but it could also have to operate on commercial principles in managing costs in order to compete with more cost effective providers.

2 What is organisational structure? The term organisational structure refers to the relationships between the various functions and positions in an organisation. Structure determines authority and responsibility for particular tasks/activities. It also specifies the routes of communication between different parts of the organisation. Organisational structure therefore has important implications for the design of management accounting systems. For example, some organisations are highly decentralised, with decision making authority delegated to relatively junior managers at lower levels in the organisational hierarchy. In this case, a major role of the organisation’s management accounting system will be to monitor the outcomes and provide feedback to senior managers about the performance of those who have the decision making authority. Such a role will not be necessary in a highly centralised organisation, where senior managers make all the important decisions.

Theories of organisational structure With the emergence of large industrial enterprises in the nineteenth century, management theorists began to consider how organisations should be designed and managed. As you will read later in this session, early organisational theorists such as Henri Fayol (1949) attempted to derive universal prescriptions for the optimal design of organisations. More recently, theorists have emphasised the contingent nature of optimal organisational design – depending on variables such as size, production technology, degree of stability in the organisation’s business environment, nature of competition in the industry and so on. These factors are assumed to influence, for example, whether organisations are ‘tall’ or ‘flat’, centralised or decentralised in terms of decision making and so on. (These terms are discussed later.)

Ultimately, organisational structure is a means of influencing and controlling the behaviour of the individuals who work in the organisation. Structure is used to assign authority and responsibility to individuals and hold them accountable for the achievement of specific tasks or objectives (Emmanuel et al., 1990, p. 38). Management accounting is an

2 What is organisational structure?

11 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

important part of this process as it provides managers with the information to carry out the various activities for which they are responsible. It also measures and monitors their performance to ensure that the organisation achieves its objectives.

A good example of a management accounting technique employed widely for organisational planning and control purposes is budgeting.

The sort of information managers need to undertake various activities and the way their performance is measured/monitored will depend on the way in which the organisation is structured.

2.1 Principles of organisational structure Certain principles are basic to the operation of any organisation:

Specialisation The work of the organisation is divided up into separate activities or tasks and particular individuals concentrate on specific tasks or activities. This enables the application of specialised knowledge and so improves organisational efficiency and effectiveness.

Coordination If an organisation’s activities are to be separated into different areas or operations, it will be necessary to ensure that the various actions are coordinated, that is, consistent with each other and working towards the same organisational objectives. This is a very important task of management. The management hierarchy or ‘chain of command’ facilitates the coordination of various departments and their activities.

Management principles of the hierarchy of authority Management theorists (notably Henri Fayol, 1949) have, over the years, developed several principles relating to the hierarchy of authority for coordinating activities. Some of the most important are:

l Unity of Command. Every person should receive orders and be accountable to one and only one superior. If people receive orders from more than one superior, conflict and confusion may well result.

l The Scalar Chain. There should be a clear line of authority from top to bottom, linking all managers at all levels.

l The Responsibility and Authority Principle. If an organisational member is allocated responsibility, then that person should also be given the necessary authority to carry out the tasks necessary – including the right to ask other people to undertake particular tasks. A manager should not be given responsibility without the necessary authority, but conversely delegation of authority implies responsibility and the need for accountability.

2 What is organisational structure?

12 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Span of control refers to the number of subordinates directly reporting to a manager or supervisor.

l Span of Control. There is a limit to the number of activities or people that can be supervised effectively by one person. What constitutes an effective span of control will be determined by a number of factors, including:

l the similarity of tasks/functions undertaken (the more similar, the greater the potential effective span of control)

l the proximity of the tasks to each other and to the supervisor (the closer the proximity, the greater the potential effective span of control)

l the complexity of the tasks (the more complex, the smaller the potential effective span of control)

l the direction and control needed by subordinates (the more direction and control needed, the smaller the potential effective span of control).

Activity 2 Consider the organisation where you (or a close friend or relative) work or have worked.

l What is the span of control of your immediate manager? l What is the span of control of her or his manager? l Do you think they are appropriate, bearing in mind the ability of either person to

monitor what is going on in the organisation?

Provide your answer...

Discussion The appropriateness of a span of control may depend on the extent of the delegation that can be exercised by managers (i.e., entrusting the responsibility for tasks to someone else) and also on reporting mechanisms within the organisation. Many organisations have introduced systems of regular meetings between managers and staff at which SMART objectives are set and monitored. SMART objectives are:

l Specific l Measurable l Achievable l Realistic l Time-bound (i.e., have a defined time scale associated with their achievement).

If objectives are SMART, managers should be able to tell whether or not they have been achieved. The appropriateness of the span of control will then be related to the number of people who can realistically be monitored in this way and the frequency with which monitoring takes place.

2 What is organisational structure?

13 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

2.2 Tall versus flat organisations Where there is a large number of levels in the management hierarchy, the organisation is said to be ‘tall’. This will tend to result in narrow spans of control. Where there is a small number of levels in the hierarchy, the organisation is said to be ‘flat’. Flat organisations will tend to have wide spans of control. Figure 3 shows a comparison of tall and flat organisation structures.

Figure 3 Tall and flat organisations

In recent years, there has been a trend towards delayering, whereby tall organisations have tended to become flat organisations by the removal of various levels in the hierarchy. This has been facilitated by:

(a) Information technology, which has reduced the need for many middle management jobs, which were largely concerned with processing information to facilitate control within the organisational hierarchy.

(b) The management philosophy of empowerment, whereby people at lower levels have been delegated authority to take actions and make decisions which would previously have been the domain of middle managers

Changes in organisation structures have led to changes in approach to management and vice versa.

The advantages of delayering are:

(a) A significant reduction in costs as middle managers’ salary costs are removed. (b) Increased motivation as people at lower levels are given power/discretion to make

decisions. Improved performance is likely to be a consequence of increased motivation.

2 What is organisational structure?

14 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

(c) Improved, faster communication between senior management and operational levels – increasingly important in a faster changing, more uncertain and increasingly competitive external environment.

There are also disadvantages to delayering, the principal one being a possible loss of control. Middle managers are often necessary to translate the inevitably broad and general plans of senior management into operational plans and actions that can be implemented. Senior managers may have only a hazy understanding of what is going on at the operational level and much is thereby entrusted to relatively junior people (Coates et al., 1996, p. 116).

Activity 3

l How will a tall organisational structure, in contrast with a flat one, impact on the span of control and the speed of information flows through the organisation?

l What do you think are the advantages and disadvantages of flat organisations?

Provide your answer...

Discussion In tall organisations, managers have smaller spans of control (i.e., fewer people reporting directly to them). This reduces the number of people they have to manage, but means it takes longer for information to travel through the layers of the organisation. In flat organisations, the opposite is true: communication can be quicker because of fewer layers, but the spans of control are larger. In recent years, tall organisations have tended to be associated with large bureaucracies. Communication will be formal and middle managers may be in a position to use information as a device to retain control. On the other hand, smaller spans of control may mean that managers have more time to manage. Furthermore, there are more explicit career paths, with opportunities for promotion. In flat organisations, the opposite is true: communication can be quicker because of fewer layers, but the spans of control are larger. In recent years, tall organisations have tended to be associated with large bureaucracies. Communication will be formal and middle managers may be in a position to use information as a device to retain control. On the other hand, smaller spans of control may mean that managers have more time to manage. Furthermore, there are more explicit career paths, with opportunities for promotion. Flat organisations have developed because there is a belief that communication is impaired by additional levels of management. Flatter organisations are thought to be able to react to change more quickly. Managers may be forced to delegate if their span of control is enlarged. This can be motivating for those to whom work is delegated. On the other hand, career paths are less explicit: employees may have to look sideways or even outside the organisation for career development opportunities.

2 What is organisational structure?

15 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

3 Forms of organisational structure It is no easy task to design and develop a structure. Many organisations continuously debate whether to structure around products, geography, common tasks or information. It is, however, possible to distinguish six important forms of organisational structure:

1 functional structure 2 product or service structure 3 geographical structure 4 matrix structure 5 project team 6 hybrid structure

Each of these forms is now explained in turn.

3.1 Functional structure As you can see from Figure 4, in a functional structure people are grouped according to the type of job they do.

Figure 4 A functional structure

This structure may be appropriate when people within functional departments need to communicate regularly with each other. For example, in a marketing department, the marketing director will coordinate the activities of marketing specialists in fields such as promotion, advertising, product design, market research, and packaging. Although there is a need for communication with all the other parts of the company, the bulk of the information exchange and communication is likely to be within the functional areas, so it makes sense to group these people together. Functional structures, however, can have disadvantages.

l Career paths tend to develop through functions and this can reduce managers’ awareness of other issues facing the organisation. The organisation will not develop many generalists this way (e.g., people who know about marketing and operations or finance and HR). This will expose the organisation to significant risks, as managers will not have an overview of its operations.

l Staff may work for the benefit of their department and not the organisation as a whole.

3 Forms of organisational structure

16 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l Many members of staff may never meet an external customer and may not therefore have a customer service orientation.

3.2 Product or service structure

Figure 5 Product and service structures

At first glance this looks similar to the functional structure, but here staff members are grouped together on product or service lines. This very often happens in larger organisations. For example, a big accountancy firm may group staff by the industry served or a public education department may group staff around different areas of work (e.g., pre- school children, primary, secondary and special needs). Each product or service group will have its own production and service people and also its own accounting and personnel staff. A product or service structure can be more responsive to customer needs and better at motivating staff. However, there is a danger of creating independent units, which can be difficult to manage as they assume the attitude, ‘we know what the customer wants, so stop interfering!’. It can also mean that professional expertise becomes fragmented. For example, if each product line has its own small accounting team (perhaps just one person) this may reduce career opportunities for specialists.

3.3 Geographical structure

3 Forms of organisational structure

17 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 6 A geographical structure

A variation on the product or service structure is to group staff by physical location – for example, by region, country or continent. This has advantages for international organisations because there are likely to be big differences in markets, languages and cultures. National issues are usually best identified locally. However, there are several disadvantages to structuring by location:

l information flows between staff in different locations can be costly and problematic l there may be duplication of activities, typically, support functions such as accounting,

human resources and information technology l it may be difficult to achieve integrated strategies across a number of different

countries.

3.4 Matrix structure We have seen that functional, product or service, and geographical structures all have disadvantages. In a matrix structure, each person has two reporting lines: (i) to the functional head; and (ii) to a project, product, service or region manager. These dual reporting lines are permanent. Advocates of matrix structures believe that they combine the advantages of both functional and product or service structures. Figure 7 is an example of a matrix structure.

Figure 7 An example of how a matrix structure might work

In Figure 7, there is a Finance function and everyone in it will report to the Finance Director. However, each product (1, 2, 3, 4) will have its own independent finance team who also will report to the relevant product or service manager. Hence each group has two people to whom they report – a functional manager and a product/service manager. There are, however, problems associated with a matrix structure. First, heads of reporting lines may need to meet regularly to decide how to apportion each person’s time. What

3 Forms of organisational structure

18 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

happens if the Finance Director and the Service 1 manager disagree about what the Service 1 finance team should be doing? Staff may feel uncomfortable with the change and uncertainty implicit in a matrix structure. In practice, matrix structures can be very difficult to manage. Dual reporting can lead to conflict, confusion, and overlapping responsibilities. This can then result in loss of accountability. There could be a number of people who are responsible if Service 1 budgets are delivered late. The person responsible could be the Finance Director who changed the format, or the Service 1 manager who would not agree a sales budget, or the Service 1 finance team who took advantage of the conflict between the Finance Director and the Service 1 manager to get more time to do the task. Matrix structures can suffer from low responsiveness, slow decision making and high levels of internal political conflict. On the other hand, they can offer a way of forcing people to work flexibly across functional boundaries (which can result in some productivity benefits for the organisation and outweigh the potential disadvantages). Organisations such as Texas Instruments, Shell, NASA, NCR, ITT and Monsanto Chemical have attributed some of their success to the matrix structure, which, in their opinion, helped them respond rapidly to customers’ needs.

3.5 Project teams Some organisations carry out the bulk of their work through project teams, which are often set up to react to changing circumstances and allow the organisation to respond quickly. They are an example of what are called organic structures, as distinct from the mechanistic structures that have been described so far. Project teams draw staff from across the organisation, seconded on a full or part time basis. The latter can be very stressful for the individual, who effectively gets two jobs usually for the life of the project. An example of how this might work can be seen in Figure 8. This looks very like the matrix structure you have just looked at – and in a way it is. Clearly, those serving on project teams also have two reporting lines: to their functional head and to the project manager. The main difference is that the project teams are not permanent groupings like the Service 1, 2, 3, 4 groupings we saw in the matrix structure in Figure 7. Instead, these project teams only last as long as the projects on which they are working. This can lead to problems of control but, on the other hand, it can generate a tremendous sense of excitement as project goals are achieved. Also, fast moving changes can be implemented as a result of the flexibility and speed of response that this sort of structure can give an organisation.

3 Forms of organisational structure

19 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 8 An example of project teams working across a functionally structured organisation

3.6 Hybrid structure In practice, organisations evolve and changes to their structure should occur as and when necessary. This evolutionary process can produce structures that are well adapted to meeting the particular needs of the moment. A hybrid (mixture) of functional and product or service structures is common, and Figure 9 illustrates how this might look. Here we see that the sales function is structured along product lines.

3 Forms of organisational structure

20 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 9 The organisational structure of a department store as a typical hybrid of product and function.

A hybrid structure might include functional departments, the work of which is primarily internal (e.g., finance and HR), with the rest of the company organised on a product, service, geographic or project basis, as required to meet best the needs of the customer (as in Figure 9).

3.7 Recent trends in organisational design In response to a dynamic, fast changing and competitive environment, flexibility and speed of decision making have become increasingly important in modern organisations. This has led to a number of trends in recent years:

1 The flattening of structures to remove levels in the organisational hierarchy. This shortens the chain of command and thereby increases the speed of decision making.

2 The establishment of multi-functional project teams and an empowered, multi-skilled workforce to increase flexibility.

3 A customer service orientation rather than an inward, internal process orientation. 4 The emergence of the ‘flexible firm’. In an increasingly competitive environment,

continuous reduction of costs is essential. Organisations have responded by replacing full time, permanent, salaried staff with temporary and part time contract labour. This allows greater flexibility, as labour can be readily taken on/laid off as demand conditions fluctuate. It also provides substantial savings in pension, health insurance and holiday pay costs. Such organisations consist of a small core of permanent full time salaried professional staff, who organise and direct the

3 Forms of organisational structure

21 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

organisation’s affairs, supplemented by various levels of contract staff. Some of these will be professionals contracted for particular projects, but the majority are likely to be the flexible workforce that carries out the routine operations of the organisation.

4 Organisational departments and functions Business organisations typically consist of a number of departments or functions and it is important to have an appreciation of the purpose and activities of these departments/ functions in order to understand the role of management accounting in the organisation. After all, management accounting is concerned with providing managers at all levels with information to help them undertake their various activities and to monitor/report on the impact of these activities on the organisation. A well designed management accounting system must be based on an understanding of what various managers actually do.

Management accountants are increasingly acting as ‘business partners’ to teams in other functional areas of the organisation. If they are to be accepted within these decision making teams, it is essential they understand the operations and technology of the organisation.

4.1 Typical business organisation departments and functions A typical business organisation may consist of the following main departments or functions:

l Production l Research and Development (often abbreviated to R&D) l Purchasing l Marketing (including the selling function) l Human Resource Management l Accounting and Finance.

4.2 The Production function The Production function undertakes the activities necessary to provide the organisation’s products or services. Its main responsibilities are:

l production planning and scheduling l control and supervision of the production workforce

4 Organisational departments and functions

22 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l managing product quality (including process control and monitoring l maintenance of plant and equipment l control of inventory l deciding the best production methods and factory layout.

Close collaboration will usually be necessary between Production and various other functions within the organisation, for example:

l Research and Development, concerning the implications of product design for production methods and cost

l Marketing, concerning desired product functionality, appearance, quality, durability and so on

l Finance, concerning the availability of funds for purchase of new equipment and the acceptability of inventory levels.

l Human Resource Management, concerning staff motivation implications of job design and production methods.

Service organisations Although many of the principles of good management in a manufacturing environment also apply in organisations that provide services (rather than manufacture products), service businesses, such as banking and professional firms of accountants and solicitors, do have a number of distinctive features which have implications for how they are managed.

1 Services are less easily standardised than manufactured products and so service quality tends to be more variable. This makes human resource management and motivation more critical.

2 Services are often ‘intangible’ (i.e., something that cannot be precisely measured or assessed) and multi-dimensional – what exactly is the ‘service’ being offered by a bank, a private hospital or educational establishment? This can make attracting customers more difficult as it often depends on promoting an intangible item.

3 Unlike manufactured products, services cannot be stored, but must be consumed as they are produced or they are wasted. This creates additional problems matching productive capacity with customer demand. This is reflected in, for example, the common practice of commercial airlines offering very cheap flights based on marginal cost to fill empty seats – a plane flying empty to New York is a service provided but wasted!

4 Ascertaining the cost of individual services is often also problematic, as the cost structure of many service businesses is such that costs are often shared among different services. This makes, among other things, pricing and the analysis of profitability of different services more difficult than with most manufactured goods.

4.3 The Research and Development function The Research and Development (R&D) function is concerned with developing new products or processes and improving existing products/processes. R&D activities must be

4 Organisational departments and functions

23 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

closely coordinated with the organisation’s marketing activities to ensure that the organisation is providing exactly what its customers want in the most efficient, effective and economical way.

4.4 The Purchasing function The Purchasing function is concerned with acquiring goods and services for use by the organisation. These will include, for example, raw materials and components for manufacturing and also production equipment. The responsibilities of this function usually extend to buying goods and services for the entire organisation (not just the Production function), including, for example, office equipment, furniture, computer equipment and stationery. In buying goods and services, purchasing managers must take into account a number of factors – collectively referred to as ‘the Purchasing Mix’, namely, Quantity, Quality, Price and Delivery.

l Quantity. Buying in large quantities can attract price discounts and prevent inventory running out. On the other hand, there are substantial costs involved in carrying a high level of inventory.

l Quality. There will usually be a trade-off between price and quality in acquiring goods and services. Consequently, Production, R&D and Marketing Functions will need to be consulted to determine an acceptable level of quality which will depend on how important quality is as an attribute of the final product or service of the organisation.

l Price. Other things being equal, the purchasing manager will look for the best price deal when procuring goods and services, although price must be considered in conjunction with quality and supplier reliability, in order to achieve best value, rather than lowest price only.

l Delivery. The time between placing an order and receiving the goods or services, the lead time, can be critical for production planning and scheduling and also has implications for inventory control. Suppliers must therefore be evaluated in terms of their reliability and capability for on time delivery.

In short, the ‘purchasing mix’ can be considered as making sure that the organisation has the right amount, of the right quality, at the right price, in the right place at the right time!

4.5 The Marketing function Marketing is concerned with identifying and satisfying customers needs at the right price. Marketing involves researching what customers want and analysing how the organisation can satisfy these wants. Marketing activities range from the ‘strategic’, concerned with the choice of product markets (and how to compete in them, for example, on price or product differentiation) to the operational, arranging sales promotions (e.g., offering a 25 per cent discount), producing literature such as product catalogues and brochures, placing advertisements in the appropriate media and so on. A fundamental activity in marketing is managing the Marketing Mix consisting of the ‘4Ps’: Product, Price, Promotion and Place.

l Product. Having the right product in terms of benefits that customers value. l Price. Setting the right price which is consistent with potential customers’ perception

of the value offered by the product.

4 Organisational departments and functions

24 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l Promotion. Promoting the product in a way which creates maximum customer awareness and persuades potential customers to make the decision to purchase the product.

l Place. Making the product available in the right place at the right time – including choosing appropriate distribution channels.

In order to be successful, a business enterprise must either have a lower price than its competitors, or a product that is in some way superior – or both! A competitive strategy based on low price is known as a cost leadership strategy. A competitive strategy based on developing a superior product is known as a differentiation strategy.

The historical evolution of marketing Several writers (e.g., Harrison, 1978) have argued (and it is now widely accepted among management theorists and practitioners) that there have been three distinct eras in the history of advanced capitalist countries, such as the UK, which have affected the status, role and responsibilities of the Marketing function. These were:

1 The Production Era (pre–1930). This refers to a period of time during which products (and services) were relatively scarce (thereby constraining consumer choice) and the most important function of business was that of production. Marketing, in so far as it existed, was considered the least important function.

2 The Sales Era (1930–50). This refers to an era characterised by a shift in emphasis of business management from the production function to that of selling. With continued industrial development and innovations, many new consumer oriented products became available and a much more competitive selling environment resulted. This made it necessary to seek out customers and make significant use of advertising, promotion and personal selling.

3 The Marketing Era (1950–present). This period marked another significant change in the attitude of senior management towards the status and responsibilities of marketing. This change, referred to by many writers as the Marketing Concept (Kotler, 1967), meant a departure from the previous concept of marketing as being the sales function of a business, to one where marketing had a much greater responsibility in total company policy formation and operation. Under the Marketing Concept, marketing was placed at the beginning of the process of determining the products (services) which were needed by the market, the price at which they should be sold and the way in which they were to be distributed.

4 Organisational departments and functions

25 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 10 ‘We produce an inferior line of goods. That’s why we’re looking for a real first class marketing man.’

4.6 The Human Resources function The Human Resources function is concerned with the following:

l Recruitment and selection. Ensuring that the right people are recruited to the right jobs.

l Training and development. Enabling employees to carry out their responsibilities effectively and make use of their potential.

l Employee relations. Including negotiations over pay and conditions. l Grievance procedures and disciplinary matters. Dealing with complaints from

employees or from the employer. l Health and Safety matters Making sure employees work in a healthy and safe

environment. l Redundancy procedures Administering a proper system that is seen to be fair to all

concerned when deciding on redundancies and agreeing redundancy payments.

Organisations are dependent on their employees. Consequently, their recruitment and selection require careful management.

In recent years, the Human Resources function has attained a more important status as there has developed an increasing need (especially in service organisations) to ‘get the most’ from employees, in terms of customer service, for the benefit of the organisation.

4 Organisational departments and functions

26 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

4.7 The Accounting and Finance function The Accounting and Finance function is concerned with the following:

l Financial record keeping of transactions involving monetary inflows or outflows. l Preparing financial statements (the income statement, balance sheet and cash

flow statement) for reporting to external parties such as shareholders. The financial statements are also the starting point for calculating any tax due on business profits.

l Payroll administration Paying wages and salaries and maintaining appropriate income tax and national insurance records.

l Preparing management accounting information and analysis to help managers to plan, control and make decisions.

5 Decentralisation and centralisation Centralisation describes a situation where decision making authority is held predomi- nantly by senior managers within an organisation. Such a situation is common within smaller businesses where the owner/manager takes all the important decisions. Centralisation, however, is not only found in such organisations, as a number of very large organisations, such as banks and some large retailers, are also highly centralised. Little, if any, discretion is given to branch managers, who must simply run their branches in accordance with the procedures established by Head Office. Decentralisation describes the situation where the authority to make decisions is delegated to people at lower levels of the organisation. This often occurs where growth in size and increased complexity make the delegation of significant decision making authority necessary. Decentralisation is a matter of degree and is usually present to varying degrees in most organisations.

Effective delegation has benefits for managers, staff and the organisation as a whole.

5.1 Advantages of decentralisation Coates et al. (1996, pp. 115–6) identify the advantages of decentralisation as follows:

l Specialisation. Managers can develop more detailed and specialised knowledge by concentrating on a limited aspect of the organisation’s operations. This should result in better quality decisions.

l Timeliness. Quicker decisions are possible if it is not necessary to pass decisions up through the hierarchical chain of command. In addition, senior managers’ time is then available for more important decisions affecting the future of the whole organisation.

l Motivation. Having authority to make decisions usually results in greater motivation and commitment and hence improved performance.

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

27 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l Human resource development. Less experienced managers can ‘learn their trade’ without their mistakes jeopardising the entire organisation. The impact of mistakes/ misjudgements is likely to be confined to a limited aspect of the organisation’s operations.

l Organisational segment performance comparison. By dividing the organisation into separate segments, it is possible to evaluate which aspects of operations are performing well and which are not – something not usually possible when the inputs/ outputs are at a more aggregate level.

5.2 Disadvantages of decentralisation Coates et al. (1996, pp. 115–6) also identify the disadvantages of decentralisation as follows:

l Dysfunctional decision making. This occurs where managers take actions which improve the measured performance of their organisational segment, but damage the organisation as a whole. For example, a manager in one department may keep costs down in his/her own department in ways which have an impact on the quality of service provided to other departments.

l Loss of control. There is a danger that senior management may lose control of the organisation, as they become far removed from the detail of underlying operations and unaware of the decisions being made by lower level managers.

l Increased cost of control. Costly management information systems may be necessary to monitor the performance of lower management levels to ensure that delegated decision making authority is being used in the best interests of the organisation.

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

28 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 11 ‘In the interest of overcoming my reluctance to delegate, starting Monday I want you to do all of my worrying for me.’

5.3 Responsibility centres Decentralisation results in the creation of separate responsibility centres – aspects/ areas of the organisation’s operations for which a particular manager is responsible. The main types of responsibility centre in common use are as follows. Cost centre. The manager is assumed to be able to influence significantly the level of cost incurred and will be judged according to how well costs are controlled. There may or may not be revenues associated with the particular aspect of operations concerned, but if there are, the manager is assumed to have no control over these. Managers of cost centres will need regular information to be provided by the accounting system, concerning how individual cost items compare with budget – that is, budget variance and, of course, budgetary planning information, for example, cost targets to be achieved. Revenue centre. The manager is assumed to be able to influence significantly the level of revenue earned and will be judged on the basis of this. Revenue centres are principally intended to be applied to sales operations, where the manager’s responsibilities relate to the generation of income, whether or not there are attributable costs. Managers will need information concerning targets for individual revenue generating units (e.g., products), and also regular feedback information on actual versus budgeted revenues. Profit centre. The manager is assumed to be able to influence significantly both costs and revenues and is judged on the basis of the level of profit generated by the particular aspect of operations concerned. The term profit centre is usually limited to the situation where the manager does not have responsibility for the level of investment in the centre (this decision being made by more senior management). Managers need information concerning both revenues and costs, for example, which products/services are profitable.

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

29 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Investment centre. This is a type of profit centre, but one for which the manager also has significant influence over investment decisions. In such cases, it would be expected that, in addition to the normal profit centre measures (e.g., Return on Sales), profit would be related to the capital invested (e.g., Return on Investment). Managers need the same information as for profit centres and in addition, detailed appraisals of potential investments and control information concerning the level of investment (e.g., working capital levels, namely, inventory, receivables and payables) at any particular point in time.

Activity 4 What do you think would be the appropriate type of responsibility centre for each of the following functions/departments?

l A marketing department l A research and development department l A machinery service and repair department of a factory l The German manufacturing and distribution division of a large multinational

company l A regional sales office of a US company

How would you measure the performance of the manager/s of each centre?

Provide your answer...

Discussion In some organisations, which are departmentalised on the basis of product groups, each product group department will have its own marketing activities. Where, however, an organisation is departmentalised on a functional basis and has a separate marketing department serving all its product groups, this department will incur expenditure on behalf of the whole organisation, but will not have its own revenues. It is likely then to be a cost centre. The same is true of a research and development and a service and repairs department. Research and development is difficult to measure, but this is attempted in many firms by use of such measures as number of patents registered, percentage of sales from recently introduced products and so on. The German manufacturing division of a large multinational company is likely to earn revenues (the level of which it can presumably influence) and incur costs (the level of which it can also influence). It is likely to be a profit centre, or even an investment centre. A regional sales office is likely to be able to influence the level of revenue generated, but the main elements of cost (e.g., sales personnel salaries) are likely to be the result of decisions made by more senior (Head Office) managers. It is likely to be a revenue centre. Responsibility centres should be evaluated according to financial performance (comparison of budgeted and actual costs, revenues and profits as appropriate). It will probably be desirable also to measure various non-financial indicators that are important for each centre achieving its goals – for example, in the case of the service and repairs department, average response time for machine breakdowns, and in the

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

30 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

case of the research and development department, the number of new product or process innovations, and so on.

5.4 The divisionalised organisation The ultimate form of decentralisation occurs when an organisation is separated into a number of investment centres that operate almost as independent businesses, each with its own profit responsibility. The basis of divisionalisation may be according to product (or service), geographical area and so on. Such a divisional structure is illustrated by the common legal form of groups with subsidiary companies. Each division in the organisation will typically have its own functional structure.

5.5 Line and staff relationships The existence of an organisational structure implies that authority and control are exercised from above and pass down through the hierarchy. The relationships that result are known as line relationships. In any organisation, there should be a clear line of authority and responsibility from the top to the bottom of the hierarchy: the ‘scalar chain’ which indicates the line relationships. By contrast, staff relationships exist when a manager gives/receives advice from another organisational member. For example, the Accounting and Finance manager will provide information and analysis to help the Marketing and Production managers make decisions and control their respective operations.

Activity 5 This activity draws together some important ideas you have considered concerning organisation structure. Consider the organisation in which you work, or one with which you are familiar. (Focus on the part of the organisation with which you are most familiar.)

l What is the span of control? l How many layers or levels of management are there? Is your organisation tall or

flat? l Is authority centralised or decentralised? l How clear is the definition of jobs? Do some of them overlap? l To how many people do employees report? Are there single or dual lines of

control?

You may find it difficult to answer these questions, especially if there are dual responsibilities or reporting lines in some areas.

Provide your answer...

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

31 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

6 The organisational environment Organisations exist in an environment – everything that surrounds the organisation physically and socially. The constituents of the organisation’s environment are likely to have an important impact on the management of the organisation. An organisation’s management must systematically analyse its environment in formulating plans to achieve organisational objectives. The major environmental factors impacting on an organisation can be grouped under four headings: political/legal, economic, social/demographic and technological (reflected in the acronym: PEST analysis).

6.1 Political and legal environment Clearly, there are laws that must be complied with, emanating from a number of sources, of which the organisation must be aware. These cover areas such as:

l ways of doing business (e.g., included within contract law); professional negligence (included within the law of tort)

l protection of consumers (e.g., Sale of Goods Act 1979, Consumer Credit Act 1974, 2006)

l safe working environment for employees (health and safety legislation) l confidentiality and use of information held concerning customers or employees (Data

Protection Act 1998) l duties of directors and financial reporting requirements (company law, in particular,

the Companies Act 2006) l minimum wage, equal opportunities and unfair dismissal rules (employment law)

pollution, waste disposal (environmental legislation) l tax liabilities (tax law).

In recent years, the European Union (EU) has become increasingly important for member states in terms of international trade rules. In addition to requiring the removal of trade barriers, the EU requires that:

l there be free movement of capital between countries l governments do not discriminate between companies in different EU countries in

awarding government contracts l financial services can be provided in any EU country l telecommunications organisations be opened up to greater competition l qualifications awarded in one country are recognised in the others.

In addition to the legal framework, government impacts directly on many organisations in a number of ways:

l via taxes or subsidies to discourage/encourage particular activities (e.g., alcohol consumption)

6 The organisational environment

32 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l national and, in particular, European, regulations have impacted on organisations in ways such as product standardisation, anti-discrimination legislation, workers’ rights, etc.

l location incentives (often funded by the European Union) to encourage businesses to locate in particular areas

l by providing barriers to entry (e.g., the requirement to obtain a license to operate) and thus restricting competition in a particular field

l the government may be a major customer l anti-monopoly, competition legislation l as a supplier of infrastructure (e.g., roads), government can influence competition

(e.g., road versus rail freight).

Political change, for example, wars, expropriation or nationalisation, political instability and so on, can also present a major threat to organisational plans.

6.2 Economic environment Economic variables such as inflation, interest rates, savings patterns, economic growth, exchange rates, the levels of taxation and government spending all influence the amount of money people have to spend. This is likely to have an impact on most organisations. Businesses will experience, for example, varying levels of demand for their products or services and charities will experience varying levels of donations, as the amount of money people have to spend fluctuates in response to variations in major economic variables.

6.3 Demographic and social trends impacting on organisations Demography is concerned with the study of data relating to the population and groups within it – births, deaths, diseases and so on – as indicators of the conditions of life in communities. Recent trends in the UK include a fall in the number of young people entering the labour market and an increase in the number of retired people. Such data are used by organisations, especially in the identification of consumer markets, but they are also important for human resource management too. Organisations must monitor demographic changes in their HR planning, especially with regard to recruitment. These changes must be taken into account in considering the best ways to tap into the future talent pool. It will be necessary to assess the current and future labour requirements in terms of both the level and the type of labour. The area from which the labour force is to be drawn must be identified. Once the labour force recruitment area is identified, the size and composition of the available labour force can be determined. The next step then involves a comparison of need as opposed to supply. In view of recent demographic changes, it is likely to be necessary to tap into currently under-utilised labour resources such as older workers and women returning to work after long periods spent bringing up children. HR policies need to be geared towards these requirements, for example, by providing training (e.g., in IT skills), part time working and child care facilities.

6 The organisational environment

33 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

6.4 Sociological factors A number of factors concerning the way society is structured will also be of relevance to many organisations.

Social class An important component of social structure is social class. Social class refers to the hierarchical distinction between individuals or groups in society. The factors that determine class vary from one society to another. The most obvious meaning of this term used to be in relation to the stratum of society into which one was born (aristocratic, middle class, working class) and class still means this to many people. In contemporary capitalist societies, it is common to define class in terms of income, status, education or profession, or a combination of these. An important implication of the existence of such a class structure is that social class can create different customer groups. It is therefore a tool for market segmentation. The social classes are widely used to profile and predict different customer behaviour. Identifying a segment, in which customers share certain characteristics, such as level of income, is useful when developing products for those customers.

Culture Culture refers to a set of shared attitudes, values, goals and practices that characterise a society or a social group within it. Cultural factors also have a significant impact on customer behaviour as culture is the most fundamental influence on a person’s wants and behaviour. As with social class, culture can create customer groups and is therefore important for marketing. For example, there has been a cultural shift towards greater concern about health and fitness, which has created opportunities for serving customers who wish to buy:

l low calorie foods l health club memberships l exercise equipment l activity- or health-related holidays.

Similarly, the increased desire for leisure time has resulted in increased demand for convenience products and services such as microwave ovens, ready meals and direct marketing service businesses such as telephone banking and insurance. Each culture contains sub-cultures – particular groups of people with shared values. Sub- cultures can include nationalities, religions, and racial groups of people sharing the same geographical location. Sometimes a sub-culture will create a substantial and distinctive market segment of its own. For example, the ‘youth culture’ or ‘club culture’ has quite distinct values and buying characteristics from the much older ‘grey generation’.

6 The organisational environment

34 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 12 ‘This looks good. It’s a six hour special on how society is becoming too sedentary.’

Cultural shifts also impact on other functions within an organisation. For example, there has been a dramatic increase in the number of women participating in the workforce and this raises a number of potential (and actual) discrimination issues, for instance, in terms of promotion and seniority and sexual harassment. HR policies must attempt to guard against these. Many organisations are responding by, for example:

l introducing flexible working hours to help women cope with the demands of career and family responsibilities

l providing education and training for managers and the workforce to encourage equal opportunities and discourage discrimination.

Another important cultural shift is the increasing concern for the physical environment among organisations’ various stakeholders (employees, customers, investors, local community and so on). Organisations are responding in a number of ways:

l by introducing ‘green products’ to exploit the opportunity, for example, environmen- tally friendly deodorants, washing powder and cleaning agents

l by exercising greater care in disposing of industrial waste l by reducing their carbon footprint by, for example, sourcing raw materials locally,

not using air freight, using video conferencing instead of executive travel, using energy efficient appliances, etc.

l by social and environmental reporting. Increasingly, large companies are providing information (which is not currently required by law or accounting regulations) on environmental policies in their annual financial reports.

Many companies now present a corporate social responsibility report, although the content varies greatly between companies. This report is usually posted on the company’s website.

6 The organisational environment

35 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

In addition to such voluntary responses based on enlightened self-interest, organisations are increasingly needing to familiarise themselves with environmental legislation and direct government action, for example:

l the congestion charge in inner London l fines for breaching pollution guidelines l the landfill tax on hazardous waste.

6.5 Technology and its impact In recent years, information systems (IS) and information technology (IT) have had a profound impact on most organisations. So pervasive is IT that IT skills are now essential for employees in virtually all organisations. IT has:

l facilitated flatter organisations and wider spans of control l made possible faster, more accurate processing of larger volumes of data l provided access to more – and more up to date – information for managers l provided computer modelling (e.g., simulations) which can improve the quality of

planning and decision making l made possible the provision of control information to senior managers in real time l improved customer service by provision of electronic data interchange (EDI)

between organisations, customer databases, extranets and so on.

Perhaps even more dramatic than the improvements in information processing are the improvements in communications that IT has provided. E-mail provides instant worldwide messaging; online conferencing enables collaboration between people in geographi- cally distant locations; voice mail allows communication between people whose working time schedules do not coincide; video conferencing allows face to face meetings without the need for expensive travel. IT has also changed the relationship between employers and employees and the nature of work, for example in terms of:

l home working (telecommuting) is commonplace, providing more flexible working arrangements and reducing the time and cost of travelling to work

l greater visibility provided to management, allowing increased monitoring and control.

Activity 6

(a) Explain (spend no more than about ten minutes on this) why it is necessary for an organisation to undertake a PEST analysis.

(b) Give three examples of actions that might result from such an analysis.

Provide your answer...

Discussion Environmental changes may have a significant impact on the organisation’s ability to achieve its objectives, including, possibly, survival. Major environmental changes,

6 The organisational environment

36 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

however, can often be anticipated if the environment is systematically monitored and analysed, and appropriate action can be taken to safeguard against threats and/or exploit opportunities arising. Examples of possible actions in response to an environmental analysis include:

l developing a new product range based on emerging technology ahead of the competition

l developing staff education and training programmes in anticipation of future skills shortages in the local labour market

l planning a programme of redundancies based on anticipation of a serious economic downturn.

Conclusion This course has provided an introduction to the nature of organisations. You should now have an appreciation of the way in which different organisations are structured and of the different components within an organisation. You should also have an understanding of the main environmental factors that impact on organisations, including political/legal, economic, social/demographic and technological factors.

Keep on learning

Conclusion

37 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Study another free course There are more than 800 courses on OpenLearn for you to choose from on a range of subjects. Find out more about all our free courses.

Take your studies further Find out more about studying with The Open University by visiting our online prospectus. If you are new to university study, you may be interested in our Access Courses or Certificates.

What’s new from OpenLearn? Sign up to our newsletter or view a sample.

For reference, full URLs to pages listed above:

OpenLearn – www.open.edu/openlearn/free-courses

Visiting our online prospectus – www.open.ac.uk/courses

Access Courses – www.open.ac.uk/courses/do-it/access

Certificates – www.open.ac.uk/courses/certificates-he

Newsletter – www.open.edu/openlearn/about-openlearn/subscribe-the-openlearn-newsletter

Glossary anti-monopoly, competition legislation Laws which seek to maintain the benefits of competition (in order to protect con- sumers), by preventing the emergence of monopolies in a particular market.

balance sheet An accounting report summarising an organisation’s assets and liabilities.

barriers to entry Factors that prevent competitors from entering a particular market.

carbon footprint The total amount of carbon emissions (greenhouse gasses), that result from an organisation’s activities.

cash flow statement

Glossary

38 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

An accounting report showing the principal types of cash inflows and outflows during a period and any cash surplus or deficit arising.

cooperative firms/social enterprises Organisations which are typically engaged in commercial activity, but whose primary purpose is social (for example, to provide employment) rather than earning profit for the owner/s. Such organisations are typically owned by their employees and/or customers.

Cost centre. A production or service location, function, activity or item of equipment for which costs are accumulated.A responsibility centre (e.g. division, department) where local man- agement has responsibility for and is called to account on the basis of costs (or expenses) only.

Culture The set of shared attitudes, values, goals and practices that characterise a society or social groups within it. Culture is a term which describes the psychology, attitudes, experiences, beliefs and values of an organisation. It has also been defined as the specific collection of values and norms that are shared by people and groups in an organization and that control the way they interact with each other and with stake- holders outside the organisation.

databases A computer-based store of organised data, structured so that it can be used to deliver information to more than one application.

delayering The process of removing layers in the management hierarchy, so that ‘tall’ organisations become flatter, with fewer hierarchical levels.

Demography The study of data relating to the population, for example, birth and death rates and population age profiles.

divisionalisation The process of dividing an organisation into a number of separate investment centres/ business segments (divisions) that operate almost as independent businesses.

effectively Achieving the specified outcomes; the extent to which specified outcomes are achieved.

efficiently Achieving specified outputs with the minimum necessary inputs (for a given quality specification).

electronic data interchange (EDI) The exchange of information directly between separate information systems (usually in different organisations). It is the basis of electronic commerce.

empowerment Giving employees power, in order to increase their self-confidence and motivation in order to improve their performance in pursuing organisational objectives.

extranets A form of intranet, accessible by specified individuals who may be outside a particular organisation, for example as customers or suppliers.

‘For-profit’ (commercial) organisations Commercial organisations whose primary purpose is to earn profit for the owner/s.

Glossary

39 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

income statement An accounting report summarising revenues earned, expenditure incurred and any surplus/deficit of revenue over expenditure during a certain period.

Investment centre. A type of profit centre for which the manager also has significant influence over the amount of capital investment and is therefore also responsible for profit in relation to capital employed.

lead time The time between a customer placing an order and the product or service being delivered.

line relationships The vertical relationships (in the organisational hierarchy) between managers and subordinates.

Marketing Concept The combination of factors which marketing managers take into account when marketing a product or service, namely: product, price, promotion and place.

mechanistic structures Tall, hierarchical, bureaucratic organisation structures, with centralisation of authority, formalisation of procedures and high levels of specialisation.

Middle line The group of middle managers whose role is to convert the objectives and broad plans of the Strategic Apex into operational plans that can be carried out by the organisation's workers.

‘Not-for–profit’ organisations Organisations that exist to pursue a particular social objective rather than to earn profit for the owner/s.

online conferencing A computer based communication system which enables collaboration between people in geographically distant locations.

Operating core The people who do the basic work of providing the products or delivering the services.

organic structures Flat organisation structures, with decentralisation of authority and low levels of specialisation.

PEST analysis An analysis of the organisation’s Political/legal, Economic, Social/demographic and Technological environment factors (hence the acronym PEST). This analysis is undertaken as part of the organisation's long- term planning process.

Profit centre. A division or department where local management has responsibility for revenue and costs, and is called to account on the basis of the difference between them (e.g. profit, loss, surplus, deficit).

Purchasing Mix The combination of factors which purchasing managers take into account when procuring goods or services, namely: quantity, quality, price and delivery.

responsibility centres

Glossary

40 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

An organisational segment such as a department or a function which a particular manager is accountable for.

Return on Investment Profit expressed as a percentage of the capital invested in an enterprise.

Return on Sales Profit earned expressed as a percentage of sales revenue.

Revenue centre. An organisational segment for which a particular manager is held accountable in terms of revenue earned.

social and environmental reporting The provision of information about an organisation’s social and environmental policies in its annual financial report.

social class The hierarchical distinction between individuals or groups in society. In contemporary capitalist society, it is common to define class in terms of income, education or profession –or a combination of these.

social responsibility objectives Objectives of an organisation relating to wider needs (for example, protecting the environment, provision of employment) rather than just the needs of the owners/ providers of funds.

staff relationships The horizontal relationship between a manager and another organisational member to/ from whom the manager gives or receives information or advice.

stakeholders Individuals or groups who have an interest in the activities of an organisation (they may be influenced by it) and may also have the power to influence the future course of the organisation (such as shareholders or employees). However, stakeholders will differ greatly in their degree of interest and/or influence.

Strategic apex The highest management level in an organisation, whose purpose is to ensure that the organisation follows its mission and manages its relationship with its environment.

Support staff The administrative personnel whose purpose is to provide services to other parts of the organisation.

Technostructure The group of technical/professional staff concerned with the best way of doing a job, specifying output criteria and ensuring that personnel have appropriate skills.

telecommuting Working from home, facilitated by information technology enabled communication with colleagues.

transaction costs The costs of engaging in economic activity resulting from an organisation’s relationship to the market.

video conferencing People in distant locations conducting conferences, through the use of computer networks to transmit audio and video data.

Glossary

41 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

working capital A measure of a company's liquidity and financial health. It encompasses short term assets (stock, debtors, cash) as well as less short term liabilities (creditors) by which they are financed; often referred to as net current assets. Working capital is generally calculated as: Working capital = current capital - current liabilities.

References Table of statutes Great Britain Companies Act 2006. Elizabeth II. Chapter 46. (2006) London: The Stationery Office. Great Britain. Consumer Credit Act 1974. Elizabeth II. Chapter 39. (1974) London: The Stationery Office. Great Britain. Consumer Credit Act 2006. Elizabeth II. Chapter 14.(2006) London: The Stationery Office. Great Britain. Data Protection Act 1998. Elizabeth II. Chapter 29. (1998) London: The Stationery Office. Great Britain. Sale of Goods Act 1979. Elizabeth II. Chapter 54.(1979) London: The Stationery Office. Publications Anthony, R.N. (1965) Planning and Control Systems: A Framework for Analysis, Boston, MA, Division of Research, Harvard Graduate School of Business. Bentley, T.J. (1998) Managing Information: Avoiding Overload, London, Chartered Institute of Management Accountants, Kogan Page. Chandler, A.D. (1962) Strategy and Structure, Boston, MA, MIT Press. Coates, J.B., Rickwood, C. and Stacey, R.J. (1996) Management Accounting for Strategic and Operational Control, Oxford, Butterworth-Heinemann. Davenport, T.H. and Prusak, L. (1997) Working Knowledge, Boston, MA, Harvard Business School Press. Emmanuel, C., Otley, D. and Merchant, K. (1990) Accounting for Management Control (2nd edn), London, Chapman and Hall. Fayol, H. (1949) General and Industrial Management, London, Pitman. Harrison, G.L. (1978) ‘The role of the management accountant in the marketing function of business: case observations and analyses’, Research paper no. 157, School of Economics and Financial Studies, Macquarie University. Johnson, H.T. and Kaplan, R.S. (1987) Relevance Lost: The Rise and Fall of Management Accounting, Boston, MA, Harvard Business School Press. Kotler, P. (1967) Marketing Management, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, Prentice Hall. Mintzberg, H. (1978) ‘Patterns in Strategy Formation’, Management Science, vol. 24, no. 9, pp. 934–48. Mintzberg, H. (1979) The Structuring of Organisations, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, Prentice Hall. Porter, M.E. (1985) Competitive Advantage: Creating and Sustaining Superior Perfor- mance, New York, Free Press.

References

42 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Rockart, J.F. (1979) ‘Chief executives define their own data needs’, Harvard Business Review, vol. 57, no. 2, pp. 238–41.

Acknowledgements This course was written by Dr Mike Lucas. Except for third party materials and otherwise stated (see terms and conditions), this content is made available under a Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 4.0 Licence. The material acknowledged below is Proprietary and used under licence (not subject to Creative Commons Licence). Grateful acknowledgement is made to the following sources for permission to reproduce material in this course: Course image: Ken Teegardin in Flickr made available under Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 2.0 Licence. Images Figure 1: Mintzberg, H. (1979) ‘Five basic parts of organisations’, The Structure of Organizations, Pearson Education, Inc. Illustrations Section 4.5: © John Morris, www.CartoonStock.com Section 5.2: © Mike Shapiro, www.CartoonStock.com Section 6.4: © Mike Shapiro, www.CartoonStock.com Every effort has been made to contact copyright owners. If any have been inadvertently overlooked, the publishers will be pleased to make the necessary arrangements at the first opportunity. Don't miss out: If reading this text has inspired you to learn more, you may be interested in joining the millions of people who discover our free learning resources and qualifications by visiting The Open University - www.open.edu/openlearn/free-courses

Acknowledgements

43 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Business and Business Environment/Support/Organisations_and_business environment.pdf

Organisations and management

accounting

About this free course

This free course is an adapted extract from the Open University course B292 Management accounting http://www.open.ac.uk/courses/modules/b292

This version of the content may include video, images and interactive content that may not be optimised for your device.

You can experience this free course as it was originally designed on OpenLearn, the home of free learning from The Open University: www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content- section-0.

There you’ll also be able to track your progress via your activity record, which you can use to demonstrate your learning.

Copyright © 2016 The Open University

Intellectual property

Unless otherwise stated, this resource is released under the terms of the Creative Commons Licence v4.0 http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/4.0/deed.en_GB. Within that The Open University interprets this licence in the following way: www.open.edu/openlearn/about-openlearn/frequently-asked-questions-on-openlearn. Copyright and rights falling outside the terms of the Creative Commons Licence are retained or controlled by The Open University. Please read the full text before using any of the content.

We believe the primary barrier to accessing high-quality educational experiences is cost, which is why we aim to publish as much free content as possible under an open licence. If it proves difficult to release content under our preferred Creative Commons licence (e.g. because we can’t afford or gain the clearances or find suitable alternatives), we will still release the materials for free under a personal end- user licence.

This is because the learning experience will always be the same high quality offering and that should always be seen as positive – even if at times the licensing is different to Creative Commons.

When using the content you must attribute us (The Open University) (the OU) and any identified author in accordance with the terms of the Creative Commons Licence.

The Acknowledgements section is used to list, amongst other things, third party (Proprietary), licensed content which is not subject to Creative Commons licensing. Proprietary content must be used (retained) intact and in context to the content at all times.

The Acknowledgements section is also used to bring to your attention any other Special Restrictions which may apply to the content. For example there may be times when the Creative Commons Non- Commercial Sharealike licence does not apply to any of the content even if owned by us (The Open University). In these instances, unless stated otherwise, the content may be used for personal and non- commercial use.

We have also identified as Proprietary other material included in the content which is not subject to Creative Commons Licence. These are OU logos, trading names and may extend to certain photographic and video images and sound recordings and any other material as may be brought to your attention.

Unauthorised use of any of the content may constitute a breach of the terms and conditions and/or intellectual property laws.

We reserve the right to alter, amend or bring to an end any terms and conditions provided here without notice.

All rights falling outside the terms of the Creative Commons licence are retained or controlled by The Open University.

Head of Intellectual Property, The Open University

2 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Contents Introduction 5 Learning Outcomes 6 1 What is an organisation? 7

1.1 Mintzberg’s five components of organisation 7 1.2 Why do organisations exist? 8 1.3 What types of organisation are there? 9

2 What is organisational structure? 11 2.1 Principles of organisational structure 12 2.2 Tall versus flat organisations 14

3 Forms of organisational structure 16 3.1 Functional structure 16 3.2 Product or service structure 17 3.3 Geographical structure 17 3.4 Matrix structure 18 3.5 Project teams 19 3.6 Hybrid structure 20 3.7 Recent trends in organisational design 21

4 Organisational departments and functions 22 4.1 Typical business organisation departments and functions 22 4.2 The Production function 22 4.3 The Research and Development function 23 4.4 The Purchasing function 24 4.5 The Marketing function 24 4.6 The Human Resources function 26 4.7 The Accounting and Finance function 27

5 Decentralisation and centralisation 27 5.1 Advantages of decentralisation 27 5.2 Disadvantages of decentralisation 28 5.3 Responsibility centres 29 5.4 The divisionalised organisation 31 5.5 Line and staff relationships 31

6 The organisational environment 32 6.1 Political and legal environment 32 6.2 Economic environment 33 6.3 Demographic and social trends impacting on organisations 33 6.4 Sociological factors 34 6.5 Technology and its impact 36

Conclusion 37 Keep on learning 37 Glossary 38

3 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

References 42 Acknowledgements 43

4 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Introduction Management accounting is concerned with providing information and analysis to managers to help them plan, evaluate and control activities, in order to achieve an organisation’s objectives. Whereas financial accounting is concerned with reporting on the past financial performance of an organisation, management accounting is essentially concerned with improving its future performance. In order to understand the concepts and principles of management accounting it is necessary first to have some appreciation of what managers do! This, in turn, requires an understanding of the organisations in which managers work – and of the external environment in which these organisations exist and operate. This OpenLearn free course, therefore, looks at the nature of organisations, specifically their objectives and structure. Organisational objectives and structure are key elements of organisations and they determine management functions and responsibilities within the organisation. The course also considers the main environmental factors (economic, social, political, legal and technological) that impact on organisational behaviour. This OpenLearn course is an adapted extract from the Open University course B292 Management accounting. Tell us what you think! We’d love to hear from you to help us improve our free learning offering through OpenLearn by filling out this short survey.

Introduction

5 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Learning Outcomes After studying this course, you should be able to: l understand the nature and purpose of different types of organisations (commercial, voluntary, public sector and

so on) l describe the different ways in which organisations may be structured l understand basic concepts of organisational structure l describe the main departments or functions of a business organisation l explain the advantages and disadvantages of centralised and decentralised organisations.

1 What is an organisation? An ‘organisation’ is a group of individuals working together to achieve one or more objectives. Although organisations have been defined differently by different theorists, virtually all definitions refer to five common features:

1 they are composed of individuals and groups of individuals 2 they are oriented towards achieving collective goals 3 they consist of different functions 4 the functions need to be coordinated 5 they exist independently of individual members who may come and go.

1.1 Mintzberg’s five components of organisation Mintzberg (1979, p. 24) suggested that all organisations consist of five components, as shown in Figure 1.

Figure 1 Mintzberg’s five parts of the organisation

At the top of the organisation is a Strategic apex the purpose of which is to ensure the organisation follows its mission and manages its relationship with its environment. The

1 What is an organisation?

7 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

individuals comprising the apex, for example, the Chief Executive Officer (CEO), are responsible to owners, government agencies, unions, communities and so on. Below the apex is the Middle line, a group of managers who are concerned with converting the objectives and broad plans of the Strategic apex into operational plans that can be carried out by the workers. As organisations grow and become more complex, they usually develop a separate group of people who are concerned with the best way of doing a job, specifying output criteria (e.g., quality standards) and ensuring that personnel have appropriate skills (e.g., by organising training programmes). This group of analysts is referred to by Mintzberg as the Technostructure. The organisation also adds other administrative functions that provide services to itself, for example legal advice, public relations, mailroom, cafeteria and so on. These are the Support staff. Finally, at the bottom of the organisation, is the Operating core. These are the people who do the basic work of producing the products or delivering the services. Mintzberg’s generic organisational model also illustrates an important principle of organisation structure: the separation of direction and management, whereby those people who decide the mission and general direction of the organisation are different (other than in a very small organisation) from those who handle the implementation of plans and subsequent controlling of operations to ensure that objectives are met. Senior managers (the Strategic apex) will establish long-term organisational objectives and policies through which goals are to be achieved. Middle managers (the Middle line) will be responsible for translating the necessarily broad and general strategic plans into detailed action plans, specifying managerial responsibilities for particular tasks and how resources are to be allocated. These middle managers will also be responsible for monitoring activities and taking action to ensure that resources are being used efficiently and effectively to achieve organisational objectives.

Efficiency refers to the relationship between inputs and outputs. An activity or process is efficient, if it produces a given output with the minimum of inputs necessary. Effectiveness refers to the extent to which goals/objectives are actually achieved.

Other important principles of organisational structure are discussed later in Sections 2 and 3.

1.2 Why do organisations exist? Organisations exist because groups of people working together can achieve more than the sum of the achievements which the individuals in the organisation could produce when working separately. For example, one person might struggle all day to carry a piano upstairs, whereas a team of four people, each taking one corner, may need to put in much less than a quarter of the effort of one person to complete the task (Coates et al., 1996, p. 19). Although such cooperation is beneficial, if individuals pull in different directions, the result is counter-productive. Thus coordination is necessary and this is a fundamental role of management, as will be discussed in a later section of this session. It can also be argued that organisations exist as a result of the impact of transaction costs, because they can arrange transactions between their different parts at a lower total cost than that available in the open market. In crude terms, it may be cheaper to make or do something ‘in house’ because this cuts out the time consuming process of negotiating

1 What is an organisation?

8 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

terms – and renegotiating them every time your requirements change. Before the Industrial Age, it was common for artisans/craftsmen to work individually from home, producing various products, which merchants would purchase from these individuals and sell to consumers. All transactions were conducted through market exchange without the need for formal organisations. As economic development gained pace, however, it became clear that it was more efficient to organise production internally within a firm rather than undertake each transaction externally through the market. The latter process involved substantial costs in terms of time that had to be spent investigating suppliers, detailing specifications, negotiating/renegotiating contracts, checking that agreed terms had been met and so on.

1.3 What types of organisation are there? Organisations can be classified in different ways. One way is according to their over- arching purpose, or primary objective. Broadly, organisations may be classified as ‘for- profit’ (i.e., commercial) or ‘not-for-profit’ entities. ‘For-profit’ (commercial) organisa- tions may have several different objectives. For a very long time, it was generally accepted that maximising the wealth of the owners and continuing in existence were the primary objectives of profit seeking organisations. However, as organisations also aim, for example, to provide goods and services to customers and employment to employees, it is perhaps more reasonable to suggest that increasing, rather than maximising the wealth of owners, is a more fitting objective. ‘Not-for–profit’ organisations comprise a large variety of organisations including charities, clubs, cooperative firms/social enterprises and public sector organisations. Public sector organisations are owned, funded and run by central or local government. They include:

l public hospitals l the armed forces (military) l most schools and universities l government departments.

These organisations exist to provide services which, for various reasons, it is considered impractical or undesirable for the commercial sector to provide. Whereas commercial organisations, charities and social enterprises must generate sufficient funds from their activities to sustain themselves on a continuing basis, public sector organisations are funded by government. Nevertheless, constraints on government expenditure mean that resources are limited. Consequently, economic scarcity requires that virtually all organisations be run effectively and efficiently. As a result, many of the management principles employed by the commercial sector are also employed in the not- for-profit sector, requiring extensive use of management accounting in all sectors. A traditional view of differences between sectors is illustrated in Figure 2. However, these distinctions are becoming blurred, as indicated by the overlapping circles. Commercial organisations are increasingly pursuing social responsibility objectives, while not-for- profit organisations are increasingly adopting commercial criteria to ensure the sound financial management of scarce resources.

Maximisation of shareholder value has long been the publicly stated objective of most business enterprises. It is likely, however, partly as a result of the global financial crises

1 What is an organisation?

9 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

that began in 2008, that the publicly stated objectives will be expanded to embrace more stakeholders, such as employees and the local community.

Figure 2 Organisations highlighting differences between sectors

Activity 1 Think of an organisation that you know well.

l In which sector or sectors from Figure 2 do you feel your organisation most comfortably fits?

l Which factors (profit, accountability, commitment) exert pressure on it or influence its objectives?

1 What is an organisation?

10 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Provide your answer...

Discussion You may have decided that your organisation sits clearly inside one of the circles or, more likely, you will have sited it in an intermediate position – operating for commercial purposes, but anxious to satisfy other criteria such as accountability to a wider public. For example, there has been a rise in the number of investment companies which use not only financial but also ethical criteria to decide in which organisations to invest. Such criteria could include the environmental impact of the production processes used by the companies in question, or the working conditions and wages of their employees. Another example of the mixture of the pressures that can affect organisations could be taken from the social care sector: a organisation in this sector might be keen to provide an excellent service to local people, but it could also have to operate on commercial principles in managing costs in order to compete with more cost effective providers.

2 What is organisational structure? The term organisational structure refers to the relationships between the various functions and positions in an organisation. Structure determines authority and responsibility for particular tasks/activities. It also specifies the routes of communication between different parts of the organisation. Organisational structure therefore has important implications for the design of management accounting systems. For example, some organisations are highly decentralised, with decision making authority delegated to relatively junior managers at lower levels in the organisational hierarchy. In this case, a major role of the organisation’s management accounting system will be to monitor the outcomes and provide feedback to senior managers about the performance of those who have the decision making authority. Such a role will not be necessary in a highly centralised organisation, where senior managers make all the important decisions.

Theories of organisational structure With the emergence of large industrial enterprises in the nineteenth century, management theorists began to consider how organisations should be designed and managed. As you will read later in this session, early organisational theorists such as Henri Fayol (1949) attempted to derive universal prescriptions for the optimal design of organisations. More recently, theorists have emphasised the contingent nature of optimal organisational design – depending on variables such as size, production technology, degree of stability in the organisation’s business environment, nature of competition in the industry and so on. These factors are assumed to influence, for example, whether organisations are ‘tall’ or ‘flat’, centralised or decentralised in terms of decision making and so on. (These terms are discussed later.)

Ultimately, organisational structure is a means of influencing and controlling the behaviour of the individuals who work in the organisation. Structure is used to assign authority and responsibility to individuals and hold them accountable for the achievement of specific tasks or objectives (Emmanuel et al., 1990, p. 38). Management accounting is an

2 What is organisational structure?

11 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

important part of this process as it provides managers with the information to carry out the various activities for which they are responsible. It also measures and monitors their performance to ensure that the organisation achieves its objectives.

A good example of a management accounting technique employed widely for organisational planning and control purposes is budgeting.

The sort of information managers need to undertake various activities and the way their performance is measured/monitored will depend on the way in which the organisation is structured.

2.1 Principles of organisational structure Certain principles are basic to the operation of any organisation:

Specialisation The work of the organisation is divided up into separate activities or tasks and particular individuals concentrate on specific tasks or activities. This enables the application of specialised knowledge and so improves organisational efficiency and effectiveness.

Coordination If an organisation’s activities are to be separated into different areas or operations, it will be necessary to ensure that the various actions are coordinated, that is, consistent with each other and working towards the same organisational objectives. This is a very important task of management. The management hierarchy or ‘chain of command’ facilitates the coordination of various departments and their activities.

Management principles of the hierarchy of authority Management theorists (notably Henri Fayol, 1949) have, over the years, developed several principles relating to the hierarchy of authority for coordinating activities. Some of the most important are:

l Unity of Command. Every person should receive orders and be accountable to one and only one superior. If people receive orders from more than one superior, conflict and confusion may well result.

l The Scalar Chain. There should be a clear line of authority from top to bottom, linking all managers at all levels.

l The Responsibility and Authority Principle. If an organisational member is allocated responsibility, then that person should also be given the necessary authority to carry out the tasks necessary – including the right to ask other people to undertake particular tasks. A manager should not be given responsibility without the necessary authority, but conversely delegation of authority implies responsibility and the need for accountability.

2 What is organisational structure?

12 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Span of control refers to the number of subordinates directly reporting to a manager or supervisor.

l Span of Control. There is a limit to the number of activities or people that can be supervised effectively by one person. What constitutes an effective span of control will be determined by a number of factors, including:

l the similarity of tasks/functions undertaken (the more similar, the greater the potential effective span of control)

l the proximity of the tasks to each other and to the supervisor (the closer the proximity, the greater the potential effective span of control)

l the complexity of the tasks (the more complex, the smaller the potential effective span of control)

l the direction and control needed by subordinates (the more direction and control needed, the smaller the potential effective span of control).

Activity 2 Consider the organisation where you (or a close friend or relative) work or have worked.

l What is the span of control of your immediate manager? l What is the span of control of her or his manager? l Do you think they are appropriate, bearing in mind the ability of either person to

monitor what is going on in the organisation?

Provide your answer...

Discussion The appropriateness of a span of control may depend on the extent of the delegation that can be exercised by managers (i.e., entrusting the responsibility for tasks to someone else) and also on reporting mechanisms within the organisation. Many organisations have introduced systems of regular meetings between managers and staff at which SMART objectives are set and monitored. SMART objectives are:

l Specific l Measurable l Achievable l Realistic l Time-bound (i.e., have a defined time scale associated with their achievement).

If objectives are SMART, managers should be able to tell whether or not they have been achieved. The appropriateness of the span of control will then be related to the number of people who can realistically be monitored in this way and the frequency with which monitoring takes place.

2 What is organisational structure?

13 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

2.2 Tall versus flat organisations Where there is a large number of levels in the management hierarchy, the organisation is said to be ‘tall’. This will tend to result in narrow spans of control. Where there is a small number of levels in the hierarchy, the organisation is said to be ‘flat’. Flat organisations will tend to have wide spans of control. Figure 3 shows a comparison of tall and flat organisation structures.

Figure 3 Tall and flat organisations

In recent years, there has been a trend towards delayering, whereby tall organisations have tended to become flat organisations by the removal of various levels in the hierarchy. This has been facilitated by:

(a) Information technology, which has reduced the need for many middle management jobs, which were largely concerned with processing information to facilitate control within the organisational hierarchy.

(b) The management philosophy of empowerment, whereby people at lower levels have been delegated authority to take actions and make decisions which would previously have been the domain of middle managers

Changes in organisation structures have led to changes in approach to management and vice versa.

The advantages of delayering are:

(a) A significant reduction in costs as middle managers’ salary costs are removed. (b) Increased motivation as people at lower levels are given power/discretion to make

decisions. Improved performance is likely to be a consequence of increased motivation.

2 What is organisational structure?

14 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

(c) Improved, faster communication between senior management and operational levels – increasingly important in a faster changing, more uncertain and increasingly competitive external environment.

There are also disadvantages to delayering, the principal one being a possible loss of control. Middle managers are often necessary to translate the inevitably broad and general plans of senior management into operational plans and actions that can be implemented. Senior managers may have only a hazy understanding of what is going on at the operational level and much is thereby entrusted to relatively junior people (Coates et al., 1996, p. 116).

Activity 3

l How will a tall organisational structure, in contrast with a flat one, impact on the span of control and the speed of information flows through the organisation?

l What do you think are the advantages and disadvantages of flat organisations?

Provide your answer...

Discussion In tall organisations, managers have smaller spans of control (i.e., fewer people reporting directly to them). This reduces the number of people they have to manage, but means it takes longer for information to travel through the layers of the organisation. In flat organisations, the opposite is true: communication can be quicker because of fewer layers, but the spans of control are larger. In recent years, tall organisations have tended to be associated with large bureaucracies. Communication will be formal and middle managers may be in a position to use information as a device to retain control. On the other hand, smaller spans of control may mean that managers have more time to manage. Furthermore, there are more explicit career paths, with opportunities for promotion. In flat organisations, the opposite is true: communication can be quicker because of fewer layers, but the spans of control are larger. In recent years, tall organisations have tended to be associated with large bureaucracies. Communication will be formal and middle managers may be in a position to use information as a device to retain control. On the other hand, smaller spans of control may mean that managers have more time to manage. Furthermore, there are more explicit career paths, with opportunities for promotion. Flat organisations have developed because there is a belief that communication is impaired by additional levels of management. Flatter organisations are thought to be able to react to change more quickly. Managers may be forced to delegate if their span of control is enlarged. This can be motivating for those to whom work is delegated. On the other hand, career paths are less explicit: employees may have to look sideways or even outside the organisation for career development opportunities.

2 What is organisational structure?

15 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

3 Forms of organisational structure It is no easy task to design and develop a structure. Many organisations continuously debate whether to structure around products, geography, common tasks or information. It is, however, possible to distinguish six important forms of organisational structure:

1 functional structure 2 product or service structure 3 geographical structure 4 matrix structure 5 project team 6 hybrid structure

Each of these forms is now explained in turn.

3.1 Functional structure As you can see from Figure 4, in a functional structure people are grouped according to the type of job they do.

Figure 4 A functional structure

This structure may be appropriate when people within functional departments need to communicate regularly with each other. For example, in a marketing department, the marketing director will coordinate the activities of marketing specialists in fields such as promotion, advertising, product design, market research, and packaging. Although there is a need for communication with all the other parts of the company, the bulk of the information exchange and communication is likely to be within the functional areas, so it makes sense to group these people together. Functional structures, however, can have disadvantages.

l Career paths tend to develop through functions and this can reduce managers’ awareness of other issues facing the organisation. The organisation will not develop many generalists this way (e.g., people who know about marketing and operations or finance and HR). This will expose the organisation to significant risks, as managers will not have an overview of its operations.

l Staff may work for the benefit of their department and not the organisation as a whole.

3 Forms of organisational structure

16 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l Many members of staff may never meet an external customer and may not therefore have a customer service orientation.

3.2 Product or service structure

Figure 5 Product and service structures

At first glance this looks similar to the functional structure, but here staff members are grouped together on product or service lines. This very often happens in larger organisations. For example, a big accountancy firm may group staff by the industry served or a public education department may group staff around different areas of work (e.g., pre- school children, primary, secondary and special needs). Each product or service group will have its own production and service people and also its own accounting and personnel staff. A product or service structure can be more responsive to customer needs and better at motivating staff. However, there is a danger of creating independent units, which can be difficult to manage as they assume the attitude, ‘we know what the customer wants, so stop interfering!’. It can also mean that professional expertise becomes fragmented. For example, if each product line has its own small accounting team (perhaps just one person) this may reduce career opportunities for specialists.

3.3 Geographical structure

3 Forms of organisational structure

17 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 6 A geographical structure

A variation on the product or service structure is to group staff by physical location – for example, by region, country or continent. This has advantages for international organisations because there are likely to be big differences in markets, languages and cultures. National issues are usually best identified locally. However, there are several disadvantages to structuring by location:

l information flows between staff in different locations can be costly and problematic l there may be duplication of activities, typically, support functions such as accounting,

human resources and information technology l it may be difficult to achieve integrated strategies across a number of different

countries.

3.4 Matrix structure We have seen that functional, product or service, and geographical structures all have disadvantages. In a matrix structure, each person has two reporting lines: (i) to the functional head; and (ii) to a project, product, service or region manager. These dual reporting lines are permanent. Advocates of matrix structures believe that they combine the advantages of both functional and product or service structures. Figure 7 is an example of a matrix structure.

Figure 7 An example of how a matrix structure might work

In Figure 7, there is a Finance function and everyone in it will report to the Finance Director. However, each product (1, 2, 3, 4) will have its own independent finance team who also will report to the relevant product or service manager. Hence each group has two people to whom they report – a functional manager and a product/service manager. There are, however, problems associated with a matrix structure. First, heads of reporting lines may need to meet regularly to decide how to apportion each person’s time. What

3 Forms of organisational structure

18 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

happens if the Finance Director and the Service 1 manager disagree about what the Service 1 finance team should be doing? Staff may feel uncomfortable with the change and uncertainty implicit in a matrix structure. In practice, matrix structures can be very difficult to manage. Dual reporting can lead to conflict, confusion, and overlapping responsibilities. This can then result in loss of accountability. There could be a number of people who are responsible if Service 1 budgets are delivered late. The person responsible could be the Finance Director who changed the format, or the Service 1 manager who would not agree a sales budget, or the Service 1 finance team who took advantage of the conflict between the Finance Director and the Service 1 manager to get more time to do the task. Matrix structures can suffer from low responsiveness, slow decision making and high levels of internal political conflict. On the other hand, they can offer a way of forcing people to work flexibly across functional boundaries (which can result in some productivity benefits for the organisation and outweigh the potential disadvantages). Organisations such as Texas Instruments, Shell, NASA, NCR, ITT and Monsanto Chemical have attributed some of their success to the matrix structure, which, in their opinion, helped them respond rapidly to customers’ needs.

3.5 Project teams Some organisations carry out the bulk of their work through project teams, which are often set up to react to changing circumstances and allow the organisation to respond quickly. They are an example of what are called organic structures, as distinct from the mechanistic structures that have been described so far. Project teams draw staff from across the organisation, seconded on a full or part time basis. The latter can be very stressful for the individual, who effectively gets two jobs usually for the life of the project. An example of how this might work can be seen in Figure 8. This looks very like the matrix structure you have just looked at – and in a way it is. Clearly, those serving on project teams also have two reporting lines: to their functional head and to the project manager. The main difference is that the project teams are not permanent groupings like the Service 1, 2, 3, 4 groupings we saw in the matrix structure in Figure 7. Instead, these project teams only last as long as the projects on which they are working. This can lead to problems of control but, on the other hand, it can generate a tremendous sense of excitement as project goals are achieved. Also, fast moving changes can be implemented as a result of the flexibility and speed of response that this sort of structure can give an organisation.

3 Forms of organisational structure

19 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 8 An example of project teams working across a functionally structured organisation

3.6 Hybrid structure In practice, organisations evolve and changes to their structure should occur as and when necessary. This evolutionary process can produce structures that are well adapted to meeting the particular needs of the moment. A hybrid (mixture) of functional and product or service structures is common, and Figure 9 illustrates how this might look. Here we see that the sales function is structured along product lines.

3 Forms of organisational structure

20 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 9 The organisational structure of a department store as a typical hybrid of product and function.

A hybrid structure might include functional departments, the work of which is primarily internal (e.g., finance and HR), with the rest of the company organised on a product, service, geographic or project basis, as required to meet best the needs of the customer (as in Figure 9).

3.7 Recent trends in organisational design In response to a dynamic, fast changing and competitive environment, flexibility and speed of decision making have become increasingly important in modern organisations. This has led to a number of trends in recent years:

1 The flattening of structures to remove levels in the organisational hierarchy. This shortens the chain of command and thereby increases the speed of decision making.

2 The establishment of multi-functional project teams and an empowered, multi-skilled workforce to increase flexibility.

3 A customer service orientation rather than an inward, internal process orientation. 4 The emergence of the ‘flexible firm’. In an increasingly competitive environment,

continuous reduction of costs is essential. Organisations have responded by replacing full time, permanent, salaried staff with temporary and part time contract labour. This allows greater flexibility, as labour can be readily taken on/laid off as demand conditions fluctuate. It also provides substantial savings in pension, health insurance and holiday pay costs. Such organisations consist of a small core of permanent full time salaried professional staff, who organise and direct the

3 Forms of organisational structure

21 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

organisation’s affairs, supplemented by various levels of contract staff. Some of these will be professionals contracted for particular projects, but the majority are likely to be the flexible workforce that carries out the routine operations of the organisation.

4 Organisational departments and functions Business organisations typically consist of a number of departments or functions and it is important to have an appreciation of the purpose and activities of these departments/ functions in order to understand the role of management accounting in the organisation. After all, management accounting is concerned with providing managers at all levels with information to help them undertake their various activities and to monitor/report on the impact of these activities on the organisation. A well designed management accounting system must be based on an understanding of what various managers actually do.

Management accountants are increasingly acting as ‘business partners’ to teams in other functional areas of the organisation. If they are to be accepted within these decision making teams, it is essential they understand the operations and technology of the organisation.

4.1 Typical business organisation departments and functions A typical business organisation may consist of the following main departments or functions:

l Production l Research and Development (often abbreviated to R&D) l Purchasing l Marketing (including the selling function) l Human Resource Management l Accounting and Finance.

4.2 The Production function The Production function undertakes the activities necessary to provide the organisation’s products or services. Its main responsibilities are:

l production planning and scheduling l control and supervision of the production workforce

4 Organisational departments and functions

22 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l managing product quality (including process control and monitoring l maintenance of plant and equipment l control of inventory l deciding the best production methods and factory layout.

Close collaboration will usually be necessary between Production and various other functions within the organisation, for example:

l Research and Development, concerning the implications of product design for production methods and cost

l Marketing, concerning desired product functionality, appearance, quality, durability and so on

l Finance, concerning the availability of funds for purchase of new equipment and the acceptability of inventory levels.

l Human Resource Management, concerning staff motivation implications of job design and production methods.

Service organisations Although many of the principles of good management in a manufacturing environment also apply in organisations that provide services (rather than manufacture products), service businesses, such as banking and professional firms of accountants and solicitors, do have a number of distinctive features which have implications for how they are managed.

1 Services are less easily standardised than manufactured products and so service quality tends to be more variable. This makes human resource management and motivation more critical.

2 Services are often ‘intangible’ (i.e., something that cannot be precisely measured or assessed) and multi-dimensional – what exactly is the ‘service’ being offered by a bank, a private hospital or educational establishment? This can make attracting customers more difficult as it often depends on promoting an intangible item.

3 Unlike manufactured products, services cannot be stored, but must be consumed as they are produced or they are wasted. This creates additional problems matching productive capacity with customer demand. This is reflected in, for example, the common practice of commercial airlines offering very cheap flights based on marginal cost to fill empty seats – a plane flying empty to New York is a service provided but wasted!

4 Ascertaining the cost of individual services is often also problematic, as the cost structure of many service businesses is such that costs are often shared among different services. This makes, among other things, pricing and the analysis of profitability of different services more difficult than with most manufactured goods.

4.3 The Research and Development function The Research and Development (R&D) function is concerned with developing new products or processes and improving existing products/processes. R&D activities must be

4 Organisational departments and functions

23 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

closely coordinated with the organisation’s marketing activities to ensure that the organisation is providing exactly what its customers want in the most efficient, effective and economical way.

4.4 The Purchasing function The Purchasing function is concerned with acquiring goods and services for use by the organisation. These will include, for example, raw materials and components for manufacturing and also production equipment. The responsibilities of this function usually extend to buying goods and services for the entire organisation (not just the Production function), including, for example, office equipment, furniture, computer equipment and stationery. In buying goods and services, purchasing managers must take into account a number of factors – collectively referred to as ‘the Purchasing Mix’, namely, Quantity, Quality, Price and Delivery.

l Quantity. Buying in large quantities can attract price discounts and prevent inventory running out. On the other hand, there are substantial costs involved in carrying a high level of inventory.

l Quality. There will usually be a trade-off between price and quality in acquiring goods and services. Consequently, Production, R&D and Marketing Functions will need to be consulted to determine an acceptable level of quality which will depend on how important quality is as an attribute of the final product or service of the organisation.

l Price. Other things being equal, the purchasing manager will look for the best price deal when procuring goods and services, although price must be considered in conjunction with quality and supplier reliability, in order to achieve best value, rather than lowest price only.

l Delivery. The time between placing an order and receiving the goods or services, the lead time, can be critical for production planning and scheduling and also has implications for inventory control. Suppliers must therefore be evaluated in terms of their reliability and capability for on time delivery.

In short, the ‘purchasing mix’ can be considered as making sure that the organisation has the right amount, of the right quality, at the right price, in the right place at the right time!

4.5 The Marketing function Marketing is concerned with identifying and satisfying customers needs at the right price. Marketing involves researching what customers want and analysing how the organisation can satisfy these wants. Marketing activities range from the ‘strategic’, concerned with the choice of product markets (and how to compete in them, for example, on price or product differentiation) to the operational, arranging sales promotions (e.g., offering a 25 per cent discount), producing literature such as product catalogues and brochures, placing advertisements in the appropriate media and so on. A fundamental activity in marketing is managing the Marketing Mix consisting of the ‘4Ps’: Product, Price, Promotion and Place.

l Product. Having the right product in terms of benefits that customers value. l Price. Setting the right price which is consistent with potential customers’ perception

of the value offered by the product.

4 Organisational departments and functions

24 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l Promotion. Promoting the product in a way which creates maximum customer awareness and persuades potential customers to make the decision to purchase the product.

l Place. Making the product available in the right place at the right time – including choosing appropriate distribution channels.

In order to be successful, a business enterprise must either have a lower price than its competitors, or a product that is in some way superior – or both! A competitive strategy based on low price is known as a cost leadership strategy. A competitive strategy based on developing a superior product is known as a differentiation strategy.

The historical evolution of marketing Several writers (e.g., Harrison, 1978) have argued (and it is now widely accepted among management theorists and practitioners) that there have been three distinct eras in the history of advanced capitalist countries, such as the UK, which have affected the status, role and responsibilities of the Marketing function. These were:

1 The Production Era (pre–1930). This refers to a period of time during which products (and services) were relatively scarce (thereby constraining consumer choice) and the most important function of business was that of production. Marketing, in so far as it existed, was considered the least important function.

2 The Sales Era (1930–50). This refers to an era characterised by a shift in emphasis of business management from the production function to that of selling. With continued industrial development and innovations, many new consumer oriented products became available and a much more competitive selling environment resulted. This made it necessary to seek out customers and make significant use of advertising, promotion and personal selling.

3 The Marketing Era (1950–present). This period marked another significant change in the attitude of senior management towards the status and responsibilities of marketing. This change, referred to by many writers as the Marketing Concept (Kotler, 1967), meant a departure from the previous concept of marketing as being the sales function of a business, to one where marketing had a much greater responsibility in total company policy formation and operation. Under the Marketing Concept, marketing was placed at the beginning of the process of determining the products (services) which were needed by the market, the price at which they should be sold and the way in which they were to be distributed.

4 Organisational departments and functions

25 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 10 ‘We produce an inferior line of goods. That’s why we’re looking for a real first class marketing man.’

4.6 The Human Resources function The Human Resources function is concerned with the following:

l Recruitment and selection. Ensuring that the right people are recruited to the right jobs.

l Training and development. Enabling employees to carry out their responsibilities effectively and make use of their potential.

l Employee relations. Including negotiations over pay and conditions. l Grievance procedures and disciplinary matters. Dealing with complaints from

employees or from the employer. l Health and Safety matters Making sure employees work in a healthy and safe

environment. l Redundancy procedures Administering a proper system that is seen to be fair to all

concerned when deciding on redundancies and agreeing redundancy payments.

Organisations are dependent on their employees. Consequently, their recruitment and selection require careful management.

In recent years, the Human Resources function has attained a more important status as there has developed an increasing need (especially in service organisations) to ‘get the most’ from employees, in terms of customer service, for the benefit of the organisation.

4 Organisational departments and functions

26 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

4.7 The Accounting and Finance function The Accounting and Finance function is concerned with the following:

l Financial record keeping of transactions involving monetary inflows or outflows. l Preparing financial statements (the income statement, balance sheet and cash

flow statement) for reporting to external parties such as shareholders. The financial statements are also the starting point for calculating any tax due on business profits.

l Payroll administration Paying wages and salaries and maintaining appropriate income tax and national insurance records.

l Preparing management accounting information and analysis to help managers to plan, control and make decisions.

5 Decentralisation and centralisation Centralisation describes a situation where decision making authority is held predomi- nantly by senior managers within an organisation. Such a situation is common within smaller businesses where the owner/manager takes all the important decisions. Centralisation, however, is not only found in such organisations, as a number of very large organisations, such as banks and some large retailers, are also highly centralised. Little, if any, discretion is given to branch managers, who must simply run their branches in accordance with the procedures established by Head Office. Decentralisation describes the situation where the authority to make decisions is delegated to people at lower levels of the organisation. This often occurs where growth in size and increased complexity make the delegation of significant decision making authority necessary. Decentralisation is a matter of degree and is usually present to varying degrees in most organisations.

Effective delegation has benefits for managers, staff and the organisation as a whole.

5.1 Advantages of decentralisation Coates et al. (1996, pp. 115–6) identify the advantages of decentralisation as follows:

l Specialisation. Managers can develop more detailed and specialised knowledge by concentrating on a limited aspect of the organisation’s operations. This should result in better quality decisions.

l Timeliness. Quicker decisions are possible if it is not necessary to pass decisions up through the hierarchical chain of command. In addition, senior managers’ time is then available for more important decisions affecting the future of the whole organisation.

l Motivation. Having authority to make decisions usually results in greater motivation and commitment and hence improved performance.

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

27 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l Human resource development. Less experienced managers can ‘learn their trade’ without their mistakes jeopardising the entire organisation. The impact of mistakes/ misjudgements is likely to be confined to a limited aspect of the organisation’s operations.

l Organisational segment performance comparison. By dividing the organisation into separate segments, it is possible to evaluate which aspects of operations are performing well and which are not – something not usually possible when the inputs/ outputs are at a more aggregate level.

5.2 Disadvantages of decentralisation Coates et al. (1996, pp. 115–6) also identify the disadvantages of decentralisation as follows:

l Dysfunctional decision making. This occurs where managers take actions which improve the measured performance of their organisational segment, but damage the organisation as a whole. For example, a manager in one department may keep costs down in his/her own department in ways which have an impact on the quality of service provided to other departments.

l Loss of control. There is a danger that senior management may lose control of the organisation, as they become far removed from the detail of underlying operations and unaware of the decisions being made by lower level managers.

l Increased cost of control. Costly management information systems may be necessary to monitor the performance of lower management levels to ensure that delegated decision making authority is being used in the best interests of the organisation.

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

28 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 11 ‘In the interest of overcoming my reluctance to delegate, starting Monday I want you to do all of my worrying for me.’

5.3 Responsibility centres Decentralisation results in the creation of separate responsibility centres – aspects/ areas of the organisation’s operations for which a particular manager is responsible. The main types of responsibility centre in common use are as follows. Cost centre. The manager is assumed to be able to influence significantly the level of cost incurred and will be judged according to how well costs are controlled. There may or may not be revenues associated with the particular aspect of operations concerned, but if there are, the manager is assumed to have no control over these. Managers of cost centres will need regular information to be provided by the accounting system, concerning how individual cost items compare with budget – that is, budget variance and, of course, budgetary planning information, for example, cost targets to be achieved. Revenue centre. The manager is assumed to be able to influence significantly the level of revenue earned and will be judged on the basis of this. Revenue centres are principally intended to be applied to sales operations, where the manager’s responsibilities relate to the generation of income, whether or not there are attributable costs. Managers will need information concerning targets for individual revenue generating units (e.g., products), and also regular feedback information on actual versus budgeted revenues. Profit centre. The manager is assumed to be able to influence significantly both costs and revenues and is judged on the basis of the level of profit generated by the particular aspect of operations concerned. The term profit centre is usually limited to the situation where the manager does not have responsibility for the level of investment in the centre (this decision being made by more senior management). Managers need information concerning both revenues and costs, for example, which products/services are profitable.

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

29 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Investment centre. This is a type of profit centre, but one for which the manager also has significant influence over investment decisions. In such cases, it would be expected that, in addition to the normal profit centre measures (e.g., Return on Sales), profit would be related to the capital invested (e.g., Return on Investment). Managers need the same information as for profit centres and in addition, detailed appraisals of potential investments and control information concerning the level of investment (e.g., working capital levels, namely, inventory, receivables and payables) at any particular point in time.

Activity 4 What do you think would be the appropriate type of responsibility centre for each of the following functions/departments?

l A marketing department l A research and development department l A machinery service and repair department of a factory l The German manufacturing and distribution division of a large multinational

company l A regional sales office of a US company

How would you measure the performance of the manager/s of each centre?

Provide your answer...

Discussion In some organisations, which are departmentalised on the basis of product groups, each product group department will have its own marketing activities. Where, however, an organisation is departmentalised on a functional basis and has a separate marketing department serving all its product groups, this department will incur expenditure on behalf of the whole organisation, but will not have its own revenues. It is likely then to be a cost centre. The same is true of a research and development and a service and repairs department. Research and development is difficult to measure, but this is attempted in many firms by use of such measures as number of patents registered, percentage of sales from recently introduced products and so on. The German manufacturing division of a large multinational company is likely to earn revenues (the level of which it can presumably influence) and incur costs (the level of which it can also influence). It is likely to be a profit centre, or even an investment centre. A regional sales office is likely to be able to influence the level of revenue generated, but the main elements of cost (e.g., sales personnel salaries) are likely to be the result of decisions made by more senior (Head Office) managers. It is likely to be a revenue centre. Responsibility centres should be evaluated according to financial performance (comparison of budgeted and actual costs, revenues and profits as appropriate). It will probably be desirable also to measure various non-financial indicators that are important for each centre achieving its goals – for example, in the case of the service and repairs department, average response time for machine breakdowns, and in the

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

30 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

case of the research and development department, the number of new product or process innovations, and so on.

5.4 The divisionalised organisation The ultimate form of decentralisation occurs when an organisation is separated into a number of investment centres that operate almost as independent businesses, each with its own profit responsibility. The basis of divisionalisation may be according to product (or service), geographical area and so on. Such a divisional structure is illustrated by the common legal form of groups with subsidiary companies. Each division in the organisation will typically have its own functional structure.

5.5 Line and staff relationships The existence of an organisational structure implies that authority and control are exercised from above and pass down through the hierarchy. The relationships that result are known as line relationships. In any organisation, there should be a clear line of authority and responsibility from the top to the bottom of the hierarchy: the ‘scalar chain’ which indicates the line relationships. By contrast, staff relationships exist when a manager gives/receives advice from another organisational member. For example, the Accounting and Finance manager will provide information and analysis to help the Marketing and Production managers make decisions and control their respective operations.

Activity 5 This activity draws together some important ideas you have considered concerning organisation structure. Consider the organisation in which you work, or one with which you are familiar. (Focus on the part of the organisation with which you are most familiar.)

l What is the span of control? l How many layers or levels of management are there? Is your organisation tall or

flat? l Is authority centralised or decentralised? l How clear is the definition of jobs? Do some of them overlap? l To how many people do employees report? Are there single or dual lines of

control?

You may find it difficult to answer these questions, especially if there are dual responsibilities or reporting lines in some areas.

Provide your answer...

5 Decentralisation and centralisation

31 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

6 The organisational environment Organisations exist in an environment – everything that surrounds the organisation physically and socially. The constituents of the organisation’s environment are likely to have an important impact on the management of the organisation. An organisation’s management must systematically analyse its environment in formulating plans to achieve organisational objectives. The major environmental factors impacting on an organisation can be grouped under four headings: political/legal, economic, social/demographic and technological (reflected in the acronym: PEST analysis).

6.1 Political and legal environment Clearly, there are laws that must be complied with, emanating from a number of sources, of which the organisation must be aware. These cover areas such as:

l ways of doing business (e.g., included within contract law); professional negligence (included within the law of tort)

l protection of consumers (e.g., Sale of Goods Act 1979, Consumer Credit Act 1974, 2006)

l safe working environment for employees (health and safety legislation) l confidentiality and use of information held concerning customers or employees (Data

Protection Act 1998) l duties of directors and financial reporting requirements (company law, in particular,

the Companies Act 2006) l minimum wage, equal opportunities and unfair dismissal rules (employment law)

pollution, waste disposal (environmental legislation) l tax liabilities (tax law).

In recent years, the European Union (EU) has become increasingly important for member states in terms of international trade rules. In addition to requiring the removal of trade barriers, the EU requires that:

l there be free movement of capital between countries l governments do not discriminate between companies in different EU countries in

awarding government contracts l financial services can be provided in any EU country l telecommunications organisations be opened up to greater competition l qualifications awarded in one country are recognised in the others.

In addition to the legal framework, government impacts directly on many organisations in a number of ways:

l via taxes or subsidies to discourage/encourage particular activities (e.g., alcohol consumption)

6 The organisational environment

32 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

l national and, in particular, European, regulations have impacted on organisations in ways such as product standardisation, anti-discrimination legislation, workers’ rights, etc.

l location incentives (often funded by the European Union) to encourage businesses to locate in particular areas

l by providing barriers to entry (e.g., the requirement to obtain a license to operate) and thus restricting competition in a particular field

l the government may be a major customer l anti-monopoly, competition legislation l as a supplier of infrastructure (e.g., roads), government can influence competition

(e.g., road versus rail freight).

Political change, for example, wars, expropriation or nationalisation, political instability and so on, can also present a major threat to organisational plans.

6.2 Economic environment Economic variables such as inflation, interest rates, savings patterns, economic growth, exchange rates, the levels of taxation and government spending all influence the amount of money people have to spend. This is likely to have an impact on most organisations. Businesses will experience, for example, varying levels of demand for their products or services and charities will experience varying levels of donations, as the amount of money people have to spend fluctuates in response to variations in major economic variables.

6.3 Demographic and social trends impacting on organisations Demography is concerned with the study of data relating to the population and groups within it – births, deaths, diseases and so on – as indicators of the conditions of life in communities. Recent trends in the UK include a fall in the number of young people entering the labour market and an increase in the number of retired people. Such data are used by organisations, especially in the identification of consumer markets, but they are also important for human resource management too. Organisations must monitor demographic changes in their HR planning, especially with regard to recruitment. These changes must be taken into account in considering the best ways to tap into the future talent pool. It will be necessary to assess the current and future labour requirements in terms of both the level and the type of labour. The area from which the labour force is to be drawn must be identified. Once the labour force recruitment area is identified, the size and composition of the available labour force can be determined. The next step then involves a comparison of need as opposed to supply. In view of recent demographic changes, it is likely to be necessary to tap into currently under-utilised labour resources such as older workers and women returning to work after long periods spent bringing up children. HR policies need to be geared towards these requirements, for example, by providing training (e.g., in IT skills), part time working and child care facilities.

6 The organisational environment

33 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

6.4 Sociological factors A number of factors concerning the way society is structured will also be of relevance to many organisations.

Social class An important component of social structure is social class. Social class refers to the hierarchical distinction between individuals or groups in society. The factors that determine class vary from one society to another. The most obvious meaning of this term used to be in relation to the stratum of society into which one was born (aristocratic, middle class, working class) and class still means this to many people. In contemporary capitalist societies, it is common to define class in terms of income, status, education or profession, or a combination of these. An important implication of the existence of such a class structure is that social class can create different customer groups. It is therefore a tool for market segmentation. The social classes are widely used to profile and predict different customer behaviour. Identifying a segment, in which customers share certain characteristics, such as level of income, is useful when developing products for those customers.

Culture Culture refers to a set of shared attitudes, values, goals and practices that characterise a society or a social group within it. Cultural factors also have a significant impact on customer behaviour as culture is the most fundamental influence on a person’s wants and behaviour. As with social class, culture can create customer groups and is therefore important for marketing. For example, there has been a cultural shift towards greater concern about health and fitness, which has created opportunities for serving customers who wish to buy:

l low calorie foods l health club memberships l exercise equipment l activity- or health-related holidays.

Similarly, the increased desire for leisure time has resulted in increased demand for convenience products and services such as microwave ovens, ready meals and direct marketing service businesses such as telephone banking and insurance. Each culture contains sub-cultures – particular groups of people with shared values. Sub- cultures can include nationalities, religions, and racial groups of people sharing the same geographical location. Sometimes a sub-culture will create a substantial and distinctive market segment of its own. For example, the ‘youth culture’ or ‘club culture’ has quite distinct values and buying characteristics from the much older ‘grey generation’.

6 The organisational environment

34 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Figure 12 ‘This looks good. It’s a six hour special on how society is becoming too sedentary.’

Cultural shifts also impact on other functions within an organisation. For example, there has been a dramatic increase in the number of women participating in the workforce and this raises a number of potential (and actual) discrimination issues, for instance, in terms of promotion and seniority and sexual harassment. HR policies must attempt to guard against these. Many organisations are responding by, for example:

l introducing flexible working hours to help women cope with the demands of career and family responsibilities

l providing education and training for managers and the workforce to encourage equal opportunities and discourage discrimination.

Another important cultural shift is the increasing concern for the physical environment among organisations’ various stakeholders (employees, customers, investors, local community and so on). Organisations are responding in a number of ways:

l by introducing ‘green products’ to exploit the opportunity, for example, environmen- tally friendly deodorants, washing powder and cleaning agents

l by exercising greater care in disposing of industrial waste l by reducing their carbon footprint by, for example, sourcing raw materials locally,

not using air freight, using video conferencing instead of executive travel, using energy efficient appliances, etc.

l by social and environmental reporting. Increasingly, large companies are providing information (which is not currently required by law or accounting regulations) on environmental policies in their annual financial reports.

Many companies now present a corporate social responsibility report, although the content varies greatly between companies. This report is usually posted on the company’s website.

6 The organisational environment

35 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

In addition to such voluntary responses based on enlightened self-interest, organisations are increasingly needing to familiarise themselves with environmental legislation and direct government action, for example:

l the congestion charge in inner London l fines for breaching pollution guidelines l the landfill tax on hazardous waste.

6.5 Technology and its impact In recent years, information systems (IS) and information technology (IT) have had a profound impact on most organisations. So pervasive is IT that IT skills are now essential for employees in virtually all organisations. IT has:

l facilitated flatter organisations and wider spans of control l made possible faster, more accurate processing of larger volumes of data l provided access to more – and more up to date – information for managers l provided computer modelling (e.g., simulations) which can improve the quality of

planning and decision making l made possible the provision of control information to senior managers in real time l improved customer service by provision of electronic data interchange (EDI)

between organisations, customer databases, extranets and so on.

Perhaps even more dramatic than the improvements in information processing are the improvements in communications that IT has provided. E-mail provides instant worldwide messaging; online conferencing enables collaboration between people in geographi- cally distant locations; voice mail allows communication between people whose working time schedules do not coincide; video conferencing allows face to face meetings without the need for expensive travel. IT has also changed the relationship between employers and employees and the nature of work, for example in terms of:

l home working (telecommuting) is commonplace, providing more flexible working arrangements and reducing the time and cost of travelling to work

l greater visibility provided to management, allowing increased monitoring and control.

Activity 6

(a) Explain (spend no more than about ten minutes on this) why it is necessary for an organisation to undertake a PEST analysis.

(b) Give three examples of actions that might result from such an analysis.

Provide your answer...

Discussion Environmental changes may have a significant impact on the organisation’s ability to achieve its objectives, including, possibly, survival. Major environmental changes,

6 The organisational environment

36 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

however, can often be anticipated if the environment is systematically monitored and analysed, and appropriate action can be taken to safeguard against threats and/or exploit opportunities arising. Examples of possible actions in response to an environmental analysis include:

l developing a new product range based on emerging technology ahead of the competition

l developing staff education and training programmes in anticipation of future skills shortages in the local labour market

l planning a programme of redundancies based on anticipation of a serious economic downturn.

Conclusion This course has provided an introduction to the nature of organisations. You should now have an appreciation of the way in which different organisations are structured and of the different components within an organisation. You should also have an understanding of the main environmental factors that impact on organisations, including political/legal, economic, social/demographic and technological factors.

Keep on learning

Conclusion

37 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Study another free course There are more than 800 courses on OpenLearn for you to choose from on a range of subjects. Find out more about all our free courses.

Take your studies further Find out more about studying with The Open University by visiting our online prospectus. If you are new to university study, you may be interested in our Access Courses or Certificates.

What’s new from OpenLearn? Sign up to our newsletter or view a sample.

For reference, full URLs to pages listed above:

OpenLearn – www.open.edu/openlearn/free-courses

Visiting our online prospectus – www.open.ac.uk/courses

Access Courses – www.open.ac.uk/courses/do-it/access

Certificates – www.open.ac.uk/courses/certificates-he

Newsletter – www.open.edu/openlearn/about-openlearn/subscribe-the-openlearn-newsletter

Glossary anti-monopoly, competition legislation Laws which seek to maintain the benefits of competition (in order to protect con- sumers), by preventing the emergence of monopolies in a particular market.

balance sheet An accounting report summarising an organisation’s assets and liabilities.

barriers to entry Factors that prevent competitors from entering a particular market.

carbon footprint The total amount of carbon emissions (greenhouse gasses), that result from an organisation’s activities.

cash flow statement

Glossary

38 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

An accounting report showing the principal types of cash inflows and outflows during a period and any cash surplus or deficit arising.

cooperative firms/social enterprises Organisations which are typically engaged in commercial activity, but whose primary purpose is social (for example, to provide employment) rather than earning profit for the owner/s. Such organisations are typically owned by their employees and/or customers.

Cost centre. A production or service location, function, activity or item of equipment for which costs are accumulated.A responsibility centre (e.g. division, department) where local man- agement has responsibility for and is called to account on the basis of costs (or expenses) only.

Culture The set of shared attitudes, values, goals and practices that characterise a society or social groups within it. Culture is a term which describes the psychology, attitudes, experiences, beliefs and values of an organisation. It has also been defined as the specific collection of values and norms that are shared by people and groups in an organization and that control the way they interact with each other and with stake- holders outside the organisation.

databases A computer-based store of organised data, structured so that it can be used to deliver information to more than one application.

delayering The process of removing layers in the management hierarchy, so that ‘tall’ organisations become flatter, with fewer hierarchical levels.

Demography The study of data relating to the population, for example, birth and death rates and population age profiles.

divisionalisation The process of dividing an organisation into a number of separate investment centres/ business segments (divisions) that operate almost as independent businesses.

effectively Achieving the specified outcomes; the extent to which specified outcomes are achieved.

efficiently Achieving specified outputs with the minimum necessary inputs (for a given quality specification).

electronic data interchange (EDI) The exchange of information directly between separate information systems (usually in different organisations). It is the basis of electronic commerce.

empowerment Giving employees power, in order to increase their self-confidence and motivation in order to improve their performance in pursuing organisational objectives.

extranets A form of intranet, accessible by specified individuals who may be outside a particular organisation, for example as customers or suppliers.

‘For-profit’ (commercial) organisations Commercial organisations whose primary purpose is to earn profit for the owner/s.

Glossary

39 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

income statement An accounting report summarising revenues earned, expenditure incurred and any surplus/deficit of revenue over expenditure during a certain period.

Investment centre. A type of profit centre for which the manager also has significant influence over the amount of capital investment and is therefore also responsible for profit in relation to capital employed.

lead time The time between a customer placing an order and the product or service being delivered.

line relationships The vertical relationships (in the organisational hierarchy) between managers and subordinates.

Marketing Concept The combination of factors which marketing managers take into account when marketing a product or service, namely: product, price, promotion and place.

mechanistic structures Tall, hierarchical, bureaucratic organisation structures, with centralisation of authority, formalisation of procedures and high levels of specialisation.

Middle line The group of middle managers whose role is to convert the objectives and broad plans of the Strategic Apex into operational plans that can be carried out by the organisation's workers.

‘Not-for–profit’ organisations Organisations that exist to pursue a particular social objective rather than to earn profit for the owner/s.

online conferencing A computer based communication system which enables collaboration between people in geographically distant locations.

Operating core The people who do the basic work of providing the products or delivering the services.

organic structures Flat organisation structures, with decentralisation of authority and low levels of specialisation.

PEST analysis An analysis of the organisation’s Political/legal, Economic, Social/demographic and Technological environment factors (hence the acronym PEST). This analysis is undertaken as part of the organisation's long- term planning process.

Profit centre. A division or department where local management has responsibility for revenue and costs, and is called to account on the basis of the difference between them (e.g. profit, loss, surplus, deficit).

Purchasing Mix The combination of factors which purchasing managers take into account when procuring goods or services, namely: quantity, quality, price and delivery.

responsibility centres

Glossary

40 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

An organisational segment such as a department or a function which a particular manager is accountable for.

Return on Investment Profit expressed as a percentage of the capital invested in an enterprise.

Return on Sales Profit earned expressed as a percentage of sales revenue.

Revenue centre. An organisational segment for which a particular manager is held accountable in terms of revenue earned.

social and environmental reporting The provision of information about an organisation’s social and environmental policies in its annual financial report.

social class The hierarchical distinction between individuals or groups in society. In contemporary capitalist society, it is common to define class in terms of income, education or profession –or a combination of these.

social responsibility objectives Objectives of an organisation relating to wider needs (for example, protecting the environment, provision of employment) rather than just the needs of the owners/ providers of funds.

staff relationships The horizontal relationship between a manager and another organisational member to/ from whom the manager gives or receives information or advice.

stakeholders Individuals or groups who have an interest in the activities of an organisation (they may be influenced by it) and may also have the power to influence the future course of the organisation (such as shareholders or employees). However, stakeholders will differ greatly in their degree of interest and/or influence.

Strategic apex The highest management level in an organisation, whose purpose is to ensure that the organisation follows its mission and manages its relationship with its environment.

Support staff The administrative personnel whose purpose is to provide services to other parts of the organisation.

Technostructure The group of technical/professional staff concerned with the best way of doing a job, specifying output criteria and ensuring that personnel have appropriate skills.

telecommuting Working from home, facilitated by information technology enabled communication with colleagues.

transaction costs The costs of engaging in economic activity resulting from an organisation’s relationship to the market.

video conferencing People in distant locations conducting conferences, through the use of computer networks to transmit audio and video data.

Glossary

41 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

working capital A measure of a company's liquidity and financial health. It encompasses short term assets (stock, debtors, cash) as well as less short term liabilities (creditors) by which they are financed; often referred to as net current assets. Working capital is generally calculated as: Working capital = current capital - current liabilities.

References Table of statutes Great Britain Companies Act 2006. Elizabeth II. Chapter 46. (2006) London: The Stationery Office. Great Britain. Consumer Credit Act 1974. Elizabeth II. Chapter 39. (1974) London: The Stationery Office. Great Britain. Consumer Credit Act 2006. Elizabeth II. Chapter 14.(2006) London: The Stationery Office. Great Britain. Data Protection Act 1998. Elizabeth II. Chapter 29. (1998) London: The Stationery Office. Great Britain. Sale of Goods Act 1979. Elizabeth II. Chapter 54.(1979) London: The Stationery Office. Publications Anthony, R.N. (1965) Planning and Control Systems: A Framework for Analysis, Boston, MA, Division of Research, Harvard Graduate School of Business. Bentley, T.J. (1998) Managing Information: Avoiding Overload, London, Chartered Institute of Management Accountants, Kogan Page. Chandler, A.D. (1962) Strategy and Structure, Boston, MA, MIT Press. Coates, J.B., Rickwood, C. and Stacey, R.J. (1996) Management Accounting for Strategic and Operational Control, Oxford, Butterworth-Heinemann. Davenport, T.H. and Prusak, L. (1997) Working Knowledge, Boston, MA, Harvard Business School Press. Emmanuel, C., Otley, D. and Merchant, K. (1990) Accounting for Management Control (2nd edn), London, Chapman and Hall. Fayol, H. (1949) General and Industrial Management, London, Pitman. Harrison, G.L. (1978) ‘The role of the management accountant in the marketing function of business: case observations and analyses’, Research paper no. 157, School of Economics and Financial Studies, Macquarie University. Johnson, H.T. and Kaplan, R.S. (1987) Relevance Lost: The Rise and Fall of Management Accounting, Boston, MA, Harvard Business School Press. Kotler, P. (1967) Marketing Management, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, Prentice Hall. Mintzberg, H. (1978) ‘Patterns in Strategy Formation’, Management Science, vol. 24, no. 9, pp. 934–48. Mintzberg, H. (1979) The Structuring of Organisations, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, Prentice Hall. Porter, M.E. (1985) Competitive Advantage: Creating and Sustaining Superior Perfor- mance, New York, Free Press.

References

42 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Rockart, J.F. (1979) ‘Chief executives define their own data needs’, Harvard Business Review, vol. 57, no. 2, pp. 238–41.

Acknowledgements This course was written by Dr Mike Lucas. Except for third party materials and otherwise stated (see terms and conditions), this content is made available under a Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 4.0 Licence. The material acknowledged below is Proprietary and used under licence (not subject to Creative Commons Licence). Grateful acknowledgement is made to the following sources for permission to reproduce material in this course: Course image: Ken Teegardin in Flickr made available under Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 2.0 Licence. Images Figure 1: Mintzberg, H. (1979) ‘Five basic parts of organisations’, The Structure of Organizations, Pearson Education, Inc. Illustrations Section 4.5: © John Morris, www.CartoonStock.com Section 5.2: © Mike Shapiro, www.CartoonStock.com Section 6.4: © Mike Shapiro, www.CartoonStock.com Every effort has been made to contact copyright owners. If any have been inadvertently overlooked, the publishers will be pleased to make the necessary arrangements at the first opportunity. Don't miss out: If reading this text has inspired you to learn more, you may be interested in joining the millions of people who discover our free learning resources and qualifications by visiting The Open University - www.open.edu/openlearn/free-courses

Acknowledgements

43 of 43 http://www.open.edu/openlearn/money-management/organisations-and-management-accounting/content-section-0?LKCAMPAIGN=ebook_MEDIA=ol Thursday 25 May 2017

Business and Business Environment/Support/Organizational Structure.ppt

Copyright © 2013 by The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. All rights reserved.

McGraw-Hill/Irwin

7-*

Learning Objectives

Identify the factors that influence managers’ choice of an organizational structure

Explain how managers group tasks into jobs that are motivating and satisfying for employees

Describe the types of organizational structures managers can design, and explain why they choose one structure over another

Explain why managers must coordinate jobs, functions, and divisions using the hierarchy of authority and integrating mechanisms

7-*

Designing Organizational Structure

Organizational structure: Formal system of task and reporting relationships that coordinates and motivates organizational members so that they work together to achieve organizational goals

Organizational design: Process by which managers make specific organizing choices that result in a particular kind of organizational structure

7-*

Figure 7.1 - Factors Affecting
Organizational Structure

7-*

Grouping Tasks into Jobs

Job design: Managers decide how to divide tasks into specific jobs

Job simplification: Reducing the number of tasks that each worker performs

Job enlargement: Increasing the number of different tasks in a given job by changing the division of labor

Job enrichment: Increasing the degree of responsibility a worker has over a job

7-*

Figure 7.2 - The Job Characteristics Model

7-*

Grouping Jobs into Functions

Functional structure: An organizational structure composed of all the departments that an organization requires to produce its goods or services

7-*

Grouping Jobs into Functions

Advantages

Encourages learning from others doing similar jobs

Easy for managers to monitor and evaluate workers

Allows managers to scan, monitor and obtain information about the changing competitive environment

Disadvantages

Difficult for managers in different functions to communicate and coordinate with one another

Functional managers may become preoccupied in achieving their departmental goals that they lose sight of organizational goals

7-*

Divisional Structures

Organizational structure composed of separate business units within which are the functions that work together to produce a specific product for a specific customer

Product structure: Each product line or business is handled by a self-contained division

7-*

Product Structure

Advantages

Allows functional managers to specialize in one product area

Division managers become experts in their area

Removes need for direct supervision of the division by corporate managers

Divisional management improves the use of resources

Allows organization to be market and customer centred and aligned

7-*

Figure 7.4 - Product, Market,
and Geographic Structures

7-*

Geographic Structure and its Types

Geographic structure: Each region of a country or area of the world is served by a self-contained division

Global geographic structure

Managers locate different divisions in each of the world regions where the organization operates

Occurs when managers are pursuing a multi-domestic strategy (customization of products and markets)

7-*

Geographic Structure and its Types

Global product structure: Each product division, not the country or regional managers, takes responsibility for deciding where to manufacture its products and how to market them in foreign countries

7-*

Figure 7.5 - Global Geographic
and Global Product Structures

7-*

Market Structure

Market structure: Each kind of customer is served by a self-contained division; also called customer structure

Matrix structure: An organizational structure that simultaneously groups people and resources by function and product

7-*

Product Team Design Structure

Product team structure: Members are permanently assigned to a cross-functional team and report only to the product team manager or to one of his direct subordinates

Cross-functional team: Group of managers brought together from different departments to perform organizational tasks

7-*

Figure 7.6 - Matrix and Product
Team Structures

7-*

Coordinating Functions and Divisions

Authority: Power to hold people accountable for their actions and to make decisions concerning the use of organizational resources

Hierarchy of authority: Organization’s chain of command, specifying the relative authority of each manager

7-*

Allocating Authority

Span of control: The number of subordinates that report directly to a manager

Line manager: Someone in the direct line or chain of command who has formal authority over people and resources

Staff manager: Someone responsible for managing a specialist function, such as finance or marketing

7-*

Figure 7.7 - The Hierarchy of Authority and Span of Control at McDonald’s Corporation

7-*

Figure 7.8 - Tall and Flat Organizations

7-*

Centralization and Decentralization
of Authority

Top managers must seek the balance between centralization and decentralization of authority

Decentralizing authority: Giving lower-level managers and non-managerial employees the right to make important decisions about how to use organizational resources

Decentralized teams may begin to pursue their own goals at the expense of organizational goals

7-*

Integrating and Coordinating Mechanisms

Integrating mechanisms: Organizing tools that managers can use to increase communication and coordination among functions and divisions

7-*

Figure 7.9 - Types and Examples of Integrating Mechanisms

7-*

Strategic Alliances, B2B Network Structures, and IT

Strategic alliance: An agreement in which managers pool or share firm’s resources and know-how with a foreign company and the two firms share in rewards and risks of starting a new venture

Network structure: Series of strategic alliances that an organization creates with suppliers, manufacturers, and distributors to produce and market a product

It allows firms to bring resources together in a boundary-less organization

E.g. Lands’ End Case: B2B Buy Committee & Centre

7-*

Strategic Alliances, B2B Network Structures, and IT

Outsource: To use outside suppliers and manufacturers to produce goods and services

Boundaryless organization: Members are linked by computers, faxes, computer-aided design systems, and video-conferencing and who, rarely, if ever, see one another face-to-face

Knowledge management system: Company-specific virtual information system that allows workers to share their knowledge and expertise and find others to help solve problems

7-*

Strategic Alliances, B2B Network Structures, and IT

Business to Business (B2B ) network: Group of organizations that join together and use IT to link themselves to potential global suppliers to increase efficiency and effectiveness

Lands’ End Case: B2B Buy Committee, Buy Centre

Business and Business Environment/Support/SWOT.pptx

Strategic management

By

Mr J Hussain

Unit F297

1

SWOT Analysis

http://www.businessstudiesonline.co.uk/live/index.php?option=com_content&view=article&id=2&Itemid=8

2

By the end of this session:

Everybody will be able to explain each element of the SWOT matrix and complete one on your chosen organisation

Most will be able evaluate how SWOT analysis can help a firm to make decisions

Some will be able to correctly answer a past paper question

Lesson Objectives

… A strategic planning tool that separates influences on a business’s future success into internal and external factors.

SWOT Analysis is…

Define realistic goals

Improve capability

Overcome weaknesses with strengths

Identify threats than can be turned into opportunities

SWOT Analysis allows businesses to…

…separates and compares internal and external influencers:

A SWOT Matrix…

Internal Strengths, Weaknesses

External Opportunities, Threats

Can be a competitive advantage like…

A strength

Superior product quality

Lowest price

Best expertise

Location

Can be a disadvantage such as…

A weakness

A tired brand

Inferior location

High overheads

A lack of R&D

Elements that a business could exploit to its advantage…

An opportunity can be…

A regulatory or tax change

A high-profile event (marketing opportunity)

An untapped market

A gap left by a failed competitor

Elements in the environment that could cause trouble for the business or project...

A threat can be…

Unfavourable regulation changes

A new entrant into the market

Problems with the economy

Market shrinkage

Strengths Weaknesses
 Worldwide known brand. Offers their customers high quality products and services. Is strongly present in several branches of the entertainment industry.  Costs of operation are high. Company's name is still highly associated with an specific target audience - children. Creative and innovative ideas are required to bring and retain customers.
Opportunities Threats
Room to develop the market in emergent countries. Expansion into different segments. Develop more attractions for theme parks. Strong competitors in the entertainment industry. High competition on finding and affording the most creative human resources. Lack of protection of Intellectual property in many non-developed countries.

SWOT Analysis...

Example

Internal Factors

External Factors

Positives

Negatives

Strengths of using SWOT

Easy to complete and understand

It is a source of information for strategic planning

Understanding your business better

Builds organisation’s strengths

Identifies its weaknesses

Maximize its response to opportunities

Addresses organisation’s threats

It helps in identifying core competencies of the firm

It helps in setting of objectives for strategic planning

It helps in knowing past, present and future so that by using past and current data, future plans can be written or altered.

Limitations of using SWOT

Doesn't prioritise issues

Doesn't provide solutions or offer alternative decisions

Can generate too many ideas but not help you choose which one is best

Can produce a lot of information, but not all of it is useful

Changes in the external environment such as price increases, new competitors, exchange rates and tax changes

Business and Business Environment/Support/The Business environment.pptx

The Business Environment

The internal and external environment

The Internal environment

The Internal environment will include some or all of the following aspects:

Resource analysis

Competence identification and analysis

Value chain analysis

Products and their position in the market

Resource analysis

Resource: An asset, competency, process, skill, or knowledge controlled by the corporation.

Tangible resources – physical assets of an organisation

Intangible resources – non-physical assets of an organisation

Resources- The 6Ms

Men- all factors related to human resources:

Staff expertise, numbers, levels, turnover, morale.

Management , structure, skills, expertise motivation

Organisation, structure, internal communication

6Ms cont’d

Money: all factors relating to the financial position of the business

Cash flow, profitability, forecasts, available funding

Credit rating, assets, image with shareholders and financiers

6Ms cont’d

Machinery-operational factors

Operational capacity and efficiency, quality control

Technological position, research and development

6Ms cont’d

Materials: Purchases and supplier factors

Suppliers’ reliability, flexibility, exclusivity, value, cost, sourcing

Stock levels and logistics of distribution

6Ms cont’d

Markets: Issues of marketing and distribution to the customers

Market status, potential, position and market share and distribution channels

Image ,reputation and brand loyalty and influence

Make up; culture and structure

Value chain analysis (Porter’s value chain)

The value chain is model that helps to analyse specific activities through which firms can create value and competitive advantage

If firms are to achieve competitive advantage by delivering value to customers, they need to know how this value is created or lost

The value chain analysis

Primary activities

Primary activities –directly add value to the final product

Inbound logistics-includes receiving, storing, inventory control, transportation, etc

Operations-includes machining, packaging, assembly, equipment maintenance, testing and all other value creating activities that transform inputs into final products

Outbound logistics-activities that required to get the finished product to customers; warehousing, order fulfilment, transportation, distribution management

Primary activities cont’d

Marketing and Sales-activities associated with getting buyers to purchase a product, including channel selection, advertising, promotion, ,selling, pricing, retail management , etc.

Service-activities that maintain and enhance the products’ value, including customer support, repair services, installation, training, spare parts management, upgrading, etc

Secondary activities

Secondary activities do not directly add value themselves

Secondary activities provide the infrastructure which enables the primary activities to place.

Firm infrastructure-systems vital to business which support the whole chain ,such as general management, planning, finance, accounting, quality management, etc.

Secondary activities cont’d

Human resources-activities associated with recruiting ,development ,retention and rewarding people

Technology development-includes technology development to support the value chain activities such as R &D, process automation , design, redesign

Procurement-procurement of necessary inputs to the primary activities

The margin is the level of profit enjoyed by the firm

The Product Life Cycle

Stages of the Product Life Cycle

Development (before launching) – a dangerous period because cash flow will be negative, i.e. high costs and no revenue yet.

Introduction –when sales still low, and costs per unit high – especially if it involves high technology

Growth – when sales are growing fast, and economies of scale improving

Maturity – when sales are at highest, and costs per unit low, e.g. coca cola (specific product)

Decline – when sales are falling, and costs per unit low, e.g. Microsoft 2000 (specific product) or 35mm cameras (type of product).

The external environment

The External environment

The external environment can be broken into two further divisions:

the macro-environment

the micro-environment

The macro environment

(Also called the General environment)-factors that affect the firm on a long term basis and are common to society as a whole.

Examples-government legislation, foreign competition, exchange rate fluctuations, technological change or even climatic changes

Analysed through PESTEL

The micro environment

(Also called the Competitive environment)-factors close to the firm and affect it on a 'day to day' basis

Examples - company itself, suppliers, your competitors, customers, substitutes

Can be analyzed through Porter’s five forces

PESTLE analysis

Political-the current and potential influences from political pressures.

Economic-the local, national and world economy impact.

Sociological-the ways in which changes in society affect us.

Technological-how new and emerging technology affects our business.

Legal-how local, national and world legislation affects us.

Environmental-the local, national and world environmental issues

Political factors

Environmental protection/legislation

Consumer protection

Government’s attitude

Competition regulation

Advertising standards

Economic factors

Economic growth

Taxation international trade

Exchange Rate

Inflation

Consumer confidence

Minimum wage

Social factors

Income distribution

Demographics

Labor & Social mobility

Lifestyle changes

Attitudes to work and leisure

Education

Fashion and Fads

Health & Welfare

Living conditions

Technological factors

Internet

Energy use and costs

Rates of technological obsolescence

New discoveries

Govt and Industry focus on tech

Govt spending on research

Legal factors

Employment law

Health and Safety

Taxation both corporate and consumer

Other regulations

International trade barriers

Strength of the rule of law

Environmental factors

How people’s perception and reaction to environmental (physical/ecological factors) issues can affect a business.

Porter's fives forces

“It is a framework that classifies and analyzes the most important forces affecting the intensity of competition in an industry and its profitability level.” (Porter 2008).

It looks at the five main factors affecting an industry;

1) Competitive rivalry 2) Power of suppliers 3) Power of buyers 4) Threats of substitutes 5) Threat of new entrants.

Porter’s 5 forces

Rivalry among competitors

This force examines how intense the competition currently is in the marketplace.

determined by the number of existing competitors and what each is capable of.

high when there are just a few businesses equally selling a product or service, when the industry is growing and when consumers can easily switch to a competitors offering for little cost.

Threat of new entry

Analyses how easy or difficult it is for competitors to join the market place.

The easier it if for competitors to enter a market place the greater the risk of a business’ market share being reduced.

Bargaining power of suppliers

analyzes how much power a businesses supplier has and how much control it has over the potential to raise its prices, which in turn would lower a business's profitability.

looks at the number of suppliers available: the fewer there are, the more power they have.

Businesses are in a better position when there are a multitude of suppliers.

Bargaining power of buyers

Looks at the power of consumers to affect pricing.

Consumers have more power when they are few, but there are lots of sellers, as well as when it is easy to switch from one business to another.

Threat of substitutes

The existence of products outside of the realm of the common product boundaries, which fulfill the same need, increases the propensity of customers to switch to alternatives.

This should not be confused with competitors' similar products; it is instead a different product that fills the same need.

Take transportation as an example: Ford Motor company would view London Underground as a substitute to someone buying a new car

SWOT analysis

SWOT analysis is an executive summary of the different elements of the internal and external environmental analysis.

Under SWOT, the detailed analysis of an organisation's external environmental and internal resource position is distilled and summarised into key factors.

Internal (Capability) Analysis Strengths Weaknesses
Resources
Products
External (Environment) Analysis Opportunities Threats
Competition
Political
Economic
Socio-cultural
Technological

SWOT

Identification of an organisation's situational position by means of a SWOT analysis is an important phase in prior to consideration of options which the organisation can follow.

Appropriate strategies are likely to:

align opportunities and strengths

transform weaknesses, and

overcome threats